Home

Manual - TRS RenTelco

1. Triggered waveform Untriggered waveforms Figure 3 21 Triggered versus untriggered displays The Trigger Event The trigger event establishes the time zero point in the waveform record All points in the record are located in time with respect to that point The instrument continuously acquires and retains enough sample points to fill the pretrigger portion of the waveform record that part of the waveform that is displayed before or to the left of the triggering event on screen When a trigger event occurs the instrument starts acquiring samples to build the posttrigger portion of the waveform record displayed after or to the right of the trigger event Once a trigger is recognized the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete and the holdoff time has expired Trigger Sources The trigger source provides the signal that triggers acquisition Use a trigger source that is synchronized with the signal you are acquiring and displaying You can derive your trigger from the following sources m Input channels are the most commonly used trigger sources You can select any one of the four input channels The channel that you select as a trigger source will function whether it is displayed or not m AC Line Voltage is a convenient trigger source when you are looking a
2. lo d ESE Jo Instrument monitor as ef large screen instrument o NS Co SO display SCOPE ONLY a Oe XGA OUT 5 i cp b Ge GPIB IEEE stb 488 PORT oHe O O lt Gti o Network DA 0000 Figure 1 1 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel 1 8 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information Item Monitor Printer Rackmount Other Powering On the Instrument Description If you use a nonstandard monitor you may need to change the Windows display settings to achieve the proper resolution for your monitor To set up a dual display see page 1 17 Connect the printer to the EPP enhanced parallel port connector directly If your printer has a DB 25 connector use the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the EPP connector For information on printer usage see Printing Waveforms on page 3 250 Refer to the Rackmount Installation Instructions for information on installing the rackmount kit Refer to the Readme file on the Product Software CD for possible additional accessory installation information not covered in this manual Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time Either one of the fo
3. F 4 l Frequency bins Figure 3 57 Time and frequency graphs of the Hamming window 3 198 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Hanning Kaiser Bessel and Blackman Harris Windows These windows have various resolution bandwidths and scallop losses see figures 3 58 3 59 and 3 60 Choose the one that best allows you to view the signal characteristics that you are interested in The Blackman Harris has a low amount of energy leakage compared to the other windows The Hanning has the narrowest resolution bandwidth but higher side lobes Amplitude n requency bins Figure 3 58 Time and frequency graphs for the Hanning window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 199 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Amplitude Time 67 dB side lobe dalk bida Fs De DS Piss Ceraoe eras ey ee bs Frequency bins Figure 3 59 Time and frequency graphs for the Kaiser Bessel window 3 200 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Amplitude Time 92 dB side lobe EN ANIN ATT He OURRE GER AL z
4. GAIN CAL connections Figure 1 9 Universal test hookup for functional tests CH 1 shown 1 24 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Incoming Inspection Channel buttons c WERTICAL POSTION 6p y POSTION 6 amp 4 5 POSITION gy3 POSITION H3 JQ A A ran A N SA We ye SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE EA Figure 1 10 Channel button location 5 Set up the instrument Push the front panel AUTOSET button This sets the horizontal and vertical scale and vertical offset for a usable display and sets the trigger source to the channel that you are testing m Touch the Vert button and then touch Offset Confirm that the Ch1 Offset is about 0 18 to 0 54 V 0 0 V if not using a probe 6 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true m Verify that the vertical scale readout and the waveform amplitude for the channel under test are as shown in Table 1 3 Table 1 3 Vertical settings CSA7404 TDS7704B TDS7404 TDS7254 amp TDS7154 With P7240 or P7260 200 mV 5 2 divisions Setting Without a probe Scale 2 5 divisions Waveform amplitude m The front panel vertical POSITION knob for the channel you are testing moves the signal up and down the screen when rotated m Turning the vertical SCALE knob counterclockwise for the channel you are testing decreases the amplitude of
5. Time Frequency bins Figure 3 55 Time and frequency graphs for the Gaussian window 3 196 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Rectangular Window This window is equal to unity see Figure 3 56 This means the data samples in the gate are not modified before input to the spectral analyzer This window has the narrowest resolution bandwidth of any of the windows but it also has the most spectral leakage and the highest side lobes Amplitude Time 13 dB side lobe lt Se ee ee ee il ee ee Frequency bins Figure 3 56 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Rectangular window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 197 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Hamming Window This window is unique in that the time domain shape does not taper all the way to zero at the ends see Figure 3 57 This makes it a good choice if you wanted to process the real and imaginary parts of the spectrum off line and inverse transform it back to the time domain Because the data does not taper to zero you could then remove the effect of the window function from the result Amplitude Heh Se SRRAAR Et biaa il TT iil il Ii
6. Save in e Setups EJ e r E 040427 _062843000 set File name 040427 062843 Ei Save as type Setup Files set p Cancel Autoincrement ile name Help CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save your setup Cont Name a 7 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons to navigate destination to the directory in which to save your setup Name your 8 Name your setup file by doing one of the following setup steps Accepting the default file name that appears in the File name field Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Clicking an existing name in the file list if any are listed Data in the existing file will be overwritten Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields Select the Auto increment file name check box to save a series of files without typing in a new name each time For more information see Using Auto Increment File name on page 3 222 9 If not selected select set in the Save as type field as the type of file to save Setup files are always type set Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set a
7. Start posttrigger acquisition Figure 3 29 Triggering with Horizontal Delay on 3 106 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Triggering with Reset You can specify a condition that if it occurs before the B trigger event resets the trigger system When the reset event occurs the trigger system stops waiting for the B event and returns to waiting for an A event You can specify a Reset when the B trigger event does not occur m before a timeout that you specify m before an input signal that you specify enters a state that you specify m before an input signal that you specify transitions in a direction that you specify NOTE A minimum of 100 ns must exist between the B Event that triggers the oscilloscope and any B Event occurring after Reset becomes TRUE Since any number of intervening B Events may occur the 100 ns limit is usually not a problem except when the B Event that triggers the oscilloscope immediately precedes the Reset Event Reset becomes TRUE B Event that triggers the scope First B Event after Reset Reset B Event 100 Nanosecond minimum ____ gt Figure 3 30 Reset trigger limitation CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 107 Triggering The flow diagram in Figure 3 31 summarizes all combinations of triggering and horizontal delay Trigger on A Only with horizontal delay off Trigger on A O
8. Figure 3 47 Duration and resolution control effects Using the gate controls Gating determines what portion of the acquired waveform is transformed into the frequency domain The gate has a position and a width control The gate position is the time in seconds from the trigger location to the center 50 position of the gate interval see Figure 3 48 The position and width units are seconds CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms lt Duration gt Gate position E Zero phase reference Time domain acquisition Gate gt Trigger width position Frequency domain samples Figure 3 48 Definition of gate parameters The gate must reside within the duration interval of the source waveform If the source waveform duration is adjusted and the gate position and width would result in the gate being outside of that duration then the gate position or width is set within the limits The width of the gate affects the resolution bandwidth of the spectral analyzer See Using Spectral Math Controls on page 3 183 for more details The data contained in the gated region is transformed to the frequency domain The gate is identified on the display using dashed markers similar to cursors The default gate width setting is equal to the duration of the source waveform Using the Frequency Domain controls The gated region of the source waveform is transformed
9. CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 11 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 3 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Comm Ext Ratio 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye measurement top and eye base eee Ext Ratio 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and eye base Ext Ratio dB 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and eye base Eye Height 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window top right bottom and left In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and base Eye Width 2 horizontal arrows indicating the eye width at the crossing level In detailed mode there are 2 vertical bars indicating the crossing times Crossing In Detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base 1 horizontal arrow indicating the crossing position In standard mode 1 horizontal arrow indicating the crossing position Eye Top 2 horizontal arrows and 1 horizontal bar indicating the eye window left the eye window right and the eye top Eye Base 2 horizontal arrows and 1 horizontal bar indicating the eye window left the eye window right and the eye base Jitter P P 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 hori
10. soos Logic qualify 8 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger ey the trigger on page 3 102 Z To set mode 9 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger and holdoff types p009 See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 3 88 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering To Trigger Based When you select the type Transition Time slew rate the instrument will trigger on Transition Time on a pulse edge that traverses between an upper and lower threshold faster or Overview Select transition triggering Select the source Select slope To trigger based on transition time _ gt slower than a transition time you specify To set up for transition time triggering do the following procedures Control elements and resources From the toolbar touch Trig and select the A Event tab Tri of the Trigger control window Touch Transition eni A Se B Event Mode Acquire A m Transition Time Trigger for Pranon SE Upper Level Spe a Select 12 A aca 500 098 Stand Y To specify which channel becomes the trigger source Aber iia z E E x s ransition Time Trigger Transition touch Source and select the source from the list Trigger Type
11. 0 00 00 eee e ee eee C 5 Pris Ger Commands sos cet gee be thet gone el a a eea ka ae aoa C 7 Display Commands 0 0c cece ee eee ees C 9 Cursors Commands 0 eee ce eee C 11 Measure Commands rerit rra cee ec cee eee eens C 11 Masks Commands 6 10 5 esee 4 tid eritis bearer sane s eea tetra n r taoa C 13 Math Commands 2 5 5cavs ot Sites aa a a Ye bee a le beets C 13 Application Commands rekis teripi tr ccc ce eens C 14 Utilities Commands essere iser a cece eens C 15 Hel pi COM Mans oc 324 cee seery e a a a ei kia aa ee Beales C 16 IBUTLODS 5 8 pie tek tat haan t aveyd Sha elias Std ce alle as cree Beal Dy A tad eel ao aaa OME alee C 16 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual v Table of Contents Glossary Index vi Appendix D Cleaning ccc cece cece cece cece ence D 1 Exterior Cleaning os naa EEEREN eee EEE oes leet ee EN D 1 Flat Panel Display Cleaning 0 0 cece cece eee eee eee D 2 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel 1 8 Figure 1 2 Powering on the instrument 0eceeeeee 1 10 Figure 1 3 Removing the hard drive 0ceeceeceees 1 12 Figure 1 4 Reinstalling the hard drive 0 ce eeeeeee 1 13 Figure 1 5 Enabling your LAN and connecting to a network 1 16 Figure 1 6 Setting up
12. A Position A Scale 3 Label i Units Offset Termination Position 80 0mdiv Invert Coupling Parndimidth z Click And Drag Controls onto the Tab Below ical Display fiz MyScope Setup Untitled F Vertical ee vertical F Rename Tab Label User Pref ie Units Offset Delete Termination Vertical Vertical Vertical Source Display Chi Rename Tab L cam chi 4 Postion cere i Seale osition User Pref i Label Units Offset Delete mination Vertical Source chi Y 500 0mY Ka Fw Vertical Source Chi Position 1 52div Scale 500 0m CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual MyScope Overview Add tabs Set user preferences Delete controls Save MyScope control window N 11 To create a new MyScope control window Cont Click New Tab to add a tab to your MyScope control window You can have up to eight tabs To rename a tab do one of the following m Click Rename Tab m Double click the tab Then type the new name To change the tab order click and drag a tab to a new location Click User Pref to specify user preferences that are loaded with your MyScope control window To delete controls do one of the following m Select a tab and then click Delete The tab and all of the controls are deleted m Sel
13. To compensate or calibrate probes you must connect the Probe Calibration and Deskew Fixture to the instrument use the procedure in the manual that came with the deskew fixture you are using see Figure 3 41 071 7022 xx Figure 3 41 Probe calibration and deskew fixtures To Calibrate Probes To Deskew Channels 3 162 To compensate the instrument so that it can take accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature use the procedure in the manual that came with the deskew fixture you are using see Figure 3 41 You can adjust a relative time delay for each channel This lets you align the signals to compensate for signals that may come in from cables of differing lengths The instrument applies deskew values after it completes each acquisi tion therefore the deskew values do not affect logic triggering Also deskew has no affect on fast acquisition XY and XYZ display formats To deskew channels use the procedure in the manual that came with the deskew fixture you are using see Figure 3 41 Select Display Only On with deskew for the fastest measurement and math throughput Select Display Only Off with deskew for the most accurate measurements and math See the online help for more information CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Compensate Passive To compensate passive probes to
14. Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 lt MathWaveform gt Math1 Math2 Math3 Math4 lt UnaryOperator gt Average Integral Derivative Invert Sqrt Exp log 10 log e Fabs Sin Min Max Ceil Cos Tan ASin Sinh ACos Cosh ATan Tanh Floor Spectral Magnitude Spectral Phase Spectral Real Spectral Imag lt BinaryOperator gt lt lt gt gt CHS EXX The logical operators generate a vector that is all 0 0 or 1 0 Operators amp amp and are not provided but if x and y are expressions equal to 0 or 1 then x y is the same as x amp amp y and x y gt 0 99 is the same as x ly lt Meas Result gt meas1 meas2 meas3 meas4 meas5 meas6 meas7 meas8 lt Variable gt gt VAR1 VAR2 VAR3 VAR4 VARS VAR6 VAR7 VARS Waveform Differentiation The math capabilities of the instrument include waveform differentiation This allows you to display a derivative math waveform that indicates the instantaneous rate of change of the waveform acquired CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 171 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Derivative math waveform Source waveform 3 172 Derivative waveforms are used in the measurement of slew rate of amplifiers and in educational applications You can create a derivative math waveform and then use it as a source for another derivative waveform The result is the second derivative o
15. 10 0nsidiv 10 0GS s 100ps pt SUI setup time hold time 10 ns Logic Qualify a Trigger Overview Prerequisites 1 To Trigger ona 2 3 102 pattern Figure 3 27 Triggering on a Setup Hold time violation When you logic qualify a trigger type the instrument will trigger when the inputs to the logic function that you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option FALSE To logic qualify a trigger do the following proce dures Trigger on a pattern The instrument must be installed and operating The acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch Glitch Width Runt Timeout Setup and Hold Transition or the Window trigger type From the Trigger if drop down menu select Logic Control elements and resources See page 3 23 for acquisition setup Trigger if Glitch Loge Y Occurs loge aes Ch3 Ch4 xY xY 12V 12V CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To define pattern inputs To set thresholds To define the logic For further assistance Trigger on a pattern Cont 5 To set the logic state for each of the input channels Ch1 Ch2 touch each Input Threshold and select either H
16. 2 x net offset 10V x reading 0 16 division x V division setting Net offset is the nominal voltage that must be applied to the channel to bring the trace to center screen Net offset offset position x volts division and is expressed in volts Measurement type 2 mV div to 3 98 mV div 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 1 V div CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual DC accuracy in volts 8 6 x net offset 1V x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 08 division x V division 2 5 2 x net offset 1V x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 08 division x V division 2 5 2 x net offset 10V x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 08 division x V division A 7 Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Delta voltage measurement between any two averages of 16 waveforms acquired under the same setup and ambient conditions Nonlinearity typical Analog bandwidth Analog bandwidth with P7240 active probe or TCA BNC adapter typical CSA7404B amp TDS7404B A 8 Description 2 mV div to 3 98 mV div 8 6 x net offset 1V x reading 0 16 division x V division setting 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 2 5 2 x net offset 1V x reading 0 16 division x V division setting 2 5 2 x net offset 1
17. Accessories amp Options Table 1 4 Options Cont alo alaa o9 o J g giz 2 4 sS N A Ja N k Option Description ole SS o J3E TDSJIT3 Essentials application y y y JT3 TDSJIT3 Advanced Jitter Analysis application with random and deterministic jitter analysis v K K CP2 TDSCPM2 Compliance Testing for ITU T G 703 and ANSI T1 102 communications wW J K K K standards Requires Option SM PW3 TDSPWR3 Power measurement and analysis application Option 3M and a TCA 1MEG KY IK K K K buffer amplifier recommended for use with this software RTE Serial Data Compliance and Analysis application a w j PCE PCI Express Compliance Module for Option RTE wW jv K Requires Option RTE IBA INFINIBand Compliance Module for Option RTE wrk K Requires Option RTE USB USB2 Compliance Testing Software for USB1 0 USB2 0 standards requires TDSUSBF USB X x v test fixture SM Serial Communications Mask Testing Standard on CSA7000B Series in aaa ST Serial Pattern Triggering Standard on CSA7000B Series a w j TC Add one TCA 1MEG TekConnect high impedance buffer amplifier EHAR Field upgrades CSA7BUP Many are available Contact Tektronix see the back of the title page for a complete list of a available CSA7UP options TDS7BUP Many are available Contact Tektronix see the back of the title page for a complete list of lt w jv IK available TDS7UP options Service offerings C1 Calibration services extended to co
18. Overview To trigger on a glitch Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with a signal connected to an input channel Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 23 for acquisition setup Select glitch 2 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri A Al j g triggering the Trigger control window and touch Select 3 Touch Glitch oe See ee Glitch Y 4 ara m l G ai Trigger L vele Polarity Select the 4 To specify which channel becomes the trigger source Im _ r Bai S source touch Source and select the source from the list Teloger Type ae e me ain v 5 jh EJ Soo Trigger Levels Polarity Sharad i ther Select the 5 To specify the glitch polarity touch Pos positive Neg polarity and negative or Either from the Polarity window width m Pos looks at positive going pulses Neg looks at negative going pulses m Either looks at both positive and negative pulses Source Glitch Trigger Glitch widt 6 To specify the width of the glitch touch Width and set ee r EE the glitch width using the multipurpose knob or keypad a e Hit CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 83 Triggering Overview Set to trigger if 7 width Set the level 8 Logic qualify 9 the trigger To set mode 10 and holdo
19. Q Factor 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base In detailed mode 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and base CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 13 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported B 14 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual ey ET Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Both the instrument menu bar and a toolbar allow you to control instrument operation Where possible this manual describes operation using first the front panel and then the toolbar This appendix describes functions available from the menu bar For more information about these commands see the online help File Commands Table C 1 lists the commands available from the File menu on the menu bar Table C 1 File menu commands Menu Submenu Function Reference Waveforms Reference Setup Displays the Reference Setup window that you use to set up and control reference waveforms Display On Off Displays the Waveform Display control window that you can use to turn the display of waveforms on and off Position Scale Displays the control window that you use to position the waveform and set the vertical scale Label Displays a control window that you use to label your waveforms Save Wim Displays the Reference Setup window that you use to save and control reference waveforms Save All Wim Displays the window that you use to save all reference waveforms R
20. Triggering on a Window Overview Select window 1 triggering Select the 4 source Set the 5 thresholds 3 92 leaves a window set by an upper or lower threshold level To trigger on a window threshold violation Push the front panel ADVANCED button On the Trigger Setup control window select the A Event tab and touch Select Touch Window To specify which channel becomes the trigger source touch Source and select the source from the list The upper and lower threshold levels define the voltage limits of the window To set the threshold levels touch Upper Level or Lower Level and use the multipurpose knobs or pop up keypad to set the values Control elements and resources TRIGGER 4 N Aa ADVANCED EDGE Mode Source Upper Level 600 0mV Lower Level 600 0mV ent f A gt B Sec Trigger Type Window Salact Trigger Levels Sharad Y Source Chi Y Che Ch3 Cha Lower Level 600 0mv Source Window Trigger CHD Upper Level x 600 0mV Lower Level 600 0mv Window Trigger chi v ie oe Window Trigger Use this procedure to trigger the instrument when the input signal enters or AWindow Acquire Wi Event Enter window Window Event Enter Window Window Event Enter Window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a window threshold violation Control elements and
21. a a General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do
22. i EET Frequency bins Figure 3 60 Time and frequency graphs of the Blackman Harris window m Flattop2 Window This window has the lowest scallop loss of any of the windows see Figure 3 61 It also has a wider resolution bandwidth but lower side lobe attenuation Also it is unique because the time domain shape has negative values CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 201 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Amplitude Time 90 dB side lobe i t nh TT Frequency bins Scallop loss is 0 0065 dB dB 0 05 Frequency bins Figure 3 61 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Flattop2 window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 202 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Tek Exponential Window The Tek Exponential window see Figure 3 62 was invented at Tektronix In the time domain it is not a symmetrical bell shape as is the case with the other windows see Figure 3 62 Instead it is exponential with a peak at the 20 position of the time domain gate The frequency domain shape is triangular Use this window for impulse response testing where the 20
23. m Select the Auto increment file name check box to save a series of files without typing in a new name Ee coe each time For more information see Using Auto Increment File Name on page 3 222 o Sn Auto increment file name Export Setup Help Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon buttons to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields Save the file 26 Touch the Save button to save the file To cancel without saving a file touch the Cancel button Cancel Help For further 27 For more help on exporting files touch the Help assistance button to access contextual online help See page 3 263 to learn about using online help CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 243 Data Input Output To Usean How you use the exported waveform depends on your application The following Exported Waveform example is a simple application the procedure is general and may require adapting for your spreadsheet or other data analysis tool Overview To use exported waveforms Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 MS Excel 97 2000 or 2002 running on a PC or on the instrument Access to a waveform exported by the instrument a Import the 3 In Excel select Open from the File menu Use the Text Inport Wizard Step 1 of 3 waveform data window
24. Buttons Function Displays online help on the current window Displays the contents and index dialog of the online help If the help window is minimized help is redisplayed Displays the instrument specifications Displays how to obtain technical support Displays how to supply customer feedback Displays the instrument version number serial number instrument id copyright installed option list and option installation key Touch Buttons to switch to toolbar mode CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual ee eee Appendix D Cleaning A Exterior Cleaning Use these procedures to clean your instrument If additional cleaning is required have your instrument serviced by qualified service personnel CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If any dirt remains use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis Clean the On Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel Do not spray or wet the switch directly CAUTION Do not use chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use only deionized water when cleaning the front panel butt
25. Control elements and resources Begin your 5 Touch the row or column number to select the entire row Insert Format Tools Data window Help E Edit chart or column containing your imported waveform values OSM GRY aea eE e l eB 10 E ron see right e E SS Blex AANE aA Select the Chart button from the toolbar or from the Insert menu Access the Chart Wizard Select the entire row or column Specify a 7 From the Chart Wizard make sure Built In is Chart Wizard Step 1 of 4 Chart Type line graph selected Then select either of the following chart Standard Types Custom Types m Lines in the Standards Types tab poe eas ii Column Area e608 08 lad Columns with Depth 200 08 amp Cones 150E 08 E Floating Bars 1 00E 08 L t Line Column SMEA g kif Line Column on 2 Axes ae ae Lik Lines on 2 Axes pees J ex Logarithmic 150E 08 EE Outdoor Bars 2 00E 08 2 Pie Explosion 2506 08 3 00E 08 Smooth lines in the Custom Types tab Series 1 User defined Built in f from Smooth lines subtype from Excel 95 Cancel lt Back Einish Finish the 8 Click Next to step through the next two steps accepting chart the defaults setting at each step Click the Finish button in step 4 You should have a waveform display similar to th
26. Net offset is the nominal voltage that must be applied to the channel to bring the trace to center screen Net offset offset position x volts division Offset accuracy is the accuracy of this voltage level SCALE range Offset accuracy 2 mV div to 9 95 mV div 0 2 x net offset 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div setting 10 mV div to 99 5 mV div 0 35 x net offset 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div setting 100 mV div to 1 V div 0 35 x net offset 15 mV 0 1 div x V div setting SCALE range Offset accuracy 2 mV div to 9 95 mV div 0 35 x net offset 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div setting 10 mV div to 99 5 mV div 0 5 net offset 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div setting 100 mV div to 1 V div 0 5 net offset 15 mV 0 1 div x V div setting CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Effective bits typical CSA7404B TDS7704B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B Delay between channels 4 Channel to channel crosstalk Description Nine division sine wave input at the indicated frequency sampled at 50 mV division and 20 GS s Input frequency 1 MHz 1 GHz 1 5 GHz 2 GHz CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7704B amp TDS7254B only 2 5 GHz CSA7404B TDS7704B TDS7404B amp TDS7254B only 3 GHz CSA7404B TDS7704B amp TDS7404B only 4 GHz CSA7404B TDS7704B amp TDS74
27. 3 35 3 40 Sampling and acquisition mode 3 37 Save format export 3 235 Save waveform C 1 Saving a setup 3 221 Saving a waveform 3 227 Scale 3 122 horizontal C 6 vertical 3 173 C 1 C 4 Scaling and positioning 3 10 Screen C 11 Screen text 3 132 C 9 Glossary 14 Second monitor setup 1 17 Select for copy C 3 Select for export C 2 Select input coupling 3 13 Select slope 3 89 Select the input signal channel 3 12 Select waveform interpolation 3 135 Selected waveform Glossary 15 Selecting zoom 3 127 Sequential triggering 3 103 Serial number C 16 Serial pattern setup C 8 Serial pattern triggering 3 117 Serial pattern trigger C 7 Set FFT vert scale 3 209 Set horizontal acquisition window 3 14 SET LEVEL TO 50 button 3 70 Set math averages C 14 Set thresholds A Trigger control window 3 96 3 98 3 103 Set time amp date C 15 Set to 50 main trigger menu 3 70 Index 16 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index Set to ECL A Trigger control window 3 90 Set to TTL A Trigger control window 3 90 Set vertical acquisition window 3 13 Set hold trigger 3 81 Setting Glossary 14 Setting acquisition controls 3 23 Setting vertical range and position 3 19 Setup control window Glossary 14 dual display 1 17 file C 2 recalling 3 221 saving 3 221 second monitor 1 17 Setup and hold trigger how to setup 3 102 Setup hold setup C 8 Setup hold trigger 3 80 C 7 h
28. C 14 Magnitude verses frequency 3 182 Main trigger menu polarity 3 85 3 87 pulse 3 89 3 94 Set to 50 3 70 slope 3 89 state 3 98 3 99 true for less than 3 97 true for more than 3 97 width 3 83 3 85 Manuals part numbers 1 35 related xvi Margins printing 3 251 Mask testing 3 165 Math overview 3 167 Math color 3 133 Math menu Chi Ch2 C 14 Chi Ch2 C 14 Ch3 Ch4 C 14 Ch3 Ch4 C 14 display on off C 13 C 14 equation editor C 14 label C 14 magnitude spectrum C 14 math setup C 13 C 14 phase spectrum C 14 position scale C 13 C 14 set math averages C 14 spectral controls C 14 spectral setup C 14 Math setup C 13 C 14 Math waveforms 3 141 3 142 apply averaging 3 177 consider the source 3 178 creating and using math waveforms 3 167 cursor measurements 3 173 defining math waveforms 3 168 defining spectral math waveforms 3 182 See also Spectral Math derivative See Derivative math waveform derivative math waveform illustration 3 172 differentiation 3 171 disallowed in DPO 3 41 display the math control window 3 175 expression syntax 3 171 FastFrame 3 169 functional transformation of an acquired waveform illustration 3 168 how to create 3 169 how to manage displaying 3 178 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 integral See Integral math waveform offset position and scale 3 173 operations on math waveforms 3 177 peak peak amplitude measurement of a derivative
29. CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 1 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 1 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Name ail Low Tr Maximum AE Mean AL Minimum Negative Duty Cycle Negative Overshoot Negative Width TIE Peak to Peak LA Phase Period Positive Duty Cycle Definition The value used as 0 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method it is the minimum value found With the histogram method it refers to the most common value found below the midpoint Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage NegativeWiath o NegativeDutyCycle Period x 100 Voltage measurement Measured over the entire waveform or gated region _ L
30. It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that curve Intensity Display brightness Interleaving A method by which instruments attain higher digitizing speeds The instrument applies the digitizing resources of unused channels that is channels that are turned off to sample those that are in use turned on Table 3 3 on page 3 40 lists acquisition rates vs number of channels that are on Knob A rotary control Knob Resolution The amount of change caused by each click of a knob Live Waveforms Waveforms that can update as the acquisition system updates them Channel waveforms are live waveforms reference waveforms are not Math waveforms are live if they contain live waveforms in their expressions Ch1 Ref1 defines a live math waveform Ref1 Ref2 does not Glossary 8 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Logic state trigger The instrument checks for defined combinatorial logic conditions on channels 1 2 and 3 on a transition of channel 4 that meets the set slope and threshold conditions If the conditions of channels 1 2 and 3 are met then the instrument triggers Logic pattern trigger The instrument triggers depending on the combinatorial logic condition of channels 1 2 3 and 4 Allowable conditions are AND OR NAND and NOR Low The value used as 0 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are neede
31. On the instrument a trigger logic pattern and state function Optical to Electrical converter A device that converts an optical signal to an electrical signal OR A logic Boolean function in which the output is true if any of the inputs are true Otherwise the output is false On the instrument a trigger logic pattern and state function Peak Detect acquisition mode A mode in which the instrument saves the minimum and maximum samples over two adjacent acquisition intervals For many glitch free signals this mode is indistinguishable from the sample mode Peak detect mode works with real time non interpolation sampling only Peak to Peak Amplitude voltage measurement of the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude Period A timing measurement of the time covered by one complete signal cycle It is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 11 Glossary Glossary 12 Persistence The amount of time a data point remains displayed There are three persistence modes available in the instrument Variable Infinite and Off Phase A timing measurement between two waveforms of the amount one leads or lags the other in time Phase is expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one complete cycle of one of the waveforms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other
32. Once the waveform record exists enhanced or not you can use the postprocessing capabilities of the instrument to further process that record perform measurements waveform math and so on Refer to Using the Acquisi tion Controls on page 3 24 for a description of the acquisition modes CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 35 Acquiring Waveforms 3 36 Waveform Record While sampling on the input signal provides the data that makes up the waveform record for any given channel the instrument builds the waveform record through use of some common parameters common means that they affect the waveforms in all channels Figure 3 10 shows how these common parameters define the waveform record as shown in the figure they define where in the data stream and how much data is taken Locate the following parameters in the figure m Sample Interval The time between sample points taken during acquisition m Record Length The number of samples required to fill a waveform record m Trigger Point The trigger point marks the time zero in a waveform record All waveform samples are located in time with respect to the trigger point m Horizontal Position If horizontal delay is off the time lapse from the first sample taken first point in the waveform record to the trigger point in percent of samples before the trigger When horizontal delay is off the trigger point and the horizontal reference are at the same
33. Print window shown in Figure 3 65 Access the Windows help system for more information Printer Name Status Type Where Comment Frint range All C Pages C Fage Setup z Print Preview Cancel Help ektronix Phaser 740 Extended x Properties Ready Tektronix Phaser 740 Extended feari Printto file Copies Number of copies 1 a from 1 to 2 Hl g 1 Figure 3 65 Print window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output To Set Up the Page To set the format of the printed page from the menu bar select the File menu and then select Page Setup The instrument displays the Page Setup window shown in Figure 3 67 m Paper select the paper size and source from the drop down lists Orientation select either Portrait or Landscape see Figure 3 66 m Margins set the margins you want for your page Doooooooon oooo0oo0o00o0o0o oa00000u000 DoOooooooon Landscape format Portrait format Figure 3 66 Hardcopy formats m Palette select either Color or Black amp White m View select either Full Screen or Graticule s Only m Full Screen displays both the graticule and menu areas of the screen m Graticule s displays only the graticule area of the display Image select either Normal or InkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color Mode m Normal exports the image exactly as it appears on screen m InkSave
34. S waveform Page 3 8 SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE A G POSITION CH4 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 2 7 ee ee Display Map Single Graticule Drag icon to change the trigger level Drag cursors to measure waveforms on screen _Refs Jl App Help Men J 25 Jun 03 13 21 48 _ Vert J Horiz J Trig L Disp Cursor Meas J Masks J Math Setups AP re Tek Run Sample Drag the position icons to a reposition a waveform i i Curst Pos X s 3 113 8us p 3 iy E F Curs2 Pos g Lice 2 ets n ef ae i 5 NENE 99 243 Click icon to assign multipurpose gt oh cipro ies knobs to waveform vertical j position and scale Zoom 1 On Zoom 2 On Zoom 3 On Zoom 4 On Histogram Vertical Drag across the waveform area to Histogram Horizontal zoom the boxed waveform segment pee a8 S enaap E ee E Also enable disable histograms and measurement gating pe i ih eae Fee ee ere ogram Off 40 0us div Measurement Gating Off 1 25MS s 800ns pt 70 0mV He 500mv Cancel 2 8 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual EEE Front Panel I O Map CSA7000B Series m gt gt Floppy disk drive ojoo g amp a e 2 a o
35. Save in S Setups X el e Ey Base file name 040427 _062528 Hcon fo Cancel Save as type Setup Files set Help Figure 3 64 Auto increment file name feature Enter a Base file name and touch Save For the initial save the default count is 000 Your first file is saved as Basefilename count ext where ext is the file extension On subsequent saves the instrument searches for the highest numbered file name and increases the number by one as in Basefilename001 ext For example if you save a series of rise time data files you can use Risetime as the base file name Your first file is saved as Risetime000 ext The next file will be Risetime001 ext and so on If Count reaches 999 it is suggested that you change the base file name to Basefilenamel for example Risetime1 on the next save Your next file will then be saved as Risetime1000 ext To Save Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to save a setup to one of ten internal locations the instrument hard disk a floppy disk or third party storage device Overview To save your setup Control elements and resources _ Prerequisites The instrument must be powered up 2 Setup the instrument controls as you want them saved as part of a recallable setup For help in making your setup check the references at right and other sections in this chapter specific to the setup you wish to make m See Powering On the Instr
36. Under certain conditions a waveform may be aliased on screen Read the following description about aliasing and the suggestions for preventing it When a waveform aliases it appears on screen with a frequency lower than the actual waveform being input or it appears unstable even though the TRIG D light is lighted Aliasing occurs because the instrument is not sampling the signal fast enough to construct an accurate waveform record See Figure 3 7 Actual high frequency waveform Apparent low frequency waveform due to aliasing Sampled points gt Figure 3 7 Aliasing Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing To quickly check for aliasing slowly increase the horizontal scale time per division setting If the shape of the displayed waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base setting your waveform was probably aliased To avoid aliasing be sure to sample the input signal at a rate more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component For example a signal with frequency components of 500 MHz would need to be sampled at a rate faster than 1 Gigasamples second to represent it accurately and to avoid aliasing The following tips may help you eliminate aliasing on a signal m Turn on Fast Acquisition mode to maximize the waveform capture rate m Turn on Waveform Database mode to capture more data m Try adjusting the horizontal scale for proper waveform display m Try pushing the AUTOSET butto
37. Upper Limit Trigger Levels Lower Limit AWidh Acquire Source Pulse Width Inside Y Upper Limit 500 0ps Trigger Levels Sharad Y Lower Limit 500 0ps 3 87 Triggering Overview Trigger based on pulse width Cont Control elements and resources Set to trigger To set the range of widths in units of time the trigger source when will search for and to specify whether to trigger on pulses that are outside this range or within this range do the following steps B Event AWigth Acquire 5 Touch Pulse Width and select from the list er REG mers m Inside triggers on pulses that fall within the ee specified range et Outside triggers on pulses that are outside the range To set the range of pulse widths in units of time touch REESE Pulse Width us ees Inside W Inside Y Upper or Lower Limit and enter the values with the senha a multipurpose knob or keypad a TEEN pesto 2 m Upper Limit is the maximum valid pulse width the i Lower Limit trigger source will look for x Lower Limit 50000ps 500 0ps aad Lower Limit is the minimum valid pulse width The instrument will always force the Lower Limit to be less than or equal to the Upper Limit Set the level 7 Touch Level and use the multipurpose knob or keypad A Event_ A gt BSeq B Event Aon sn to set the trigger level ais ane Pulse wit E P bene limit Trigger Levels Lower Limit Sharad
38. accessories 1 36 cal C 4 calibrate 3 162 calibration fixture 3 162 compensation Glossary 13 definition Glossary 13 low frequency compensation 3 163 Probe channel deskew 3 162 Glossary 3 Probes and signal connection 3 9 Product accessories 1 33 description 1 1 software 1 3 Programmer help 1 14 Propagation delay B 1 Proximal Glossary 13 Pulse trigger Glossary 13 Pulse triggering 3 77 A Trigger control window 3 85 Pulse A Trigger control window 3 83 3 87 3 89 3 94 Q Q factor B 5 Quality factor B 5 C 12 Quantizing Glossary 13 Quitting the application 1 15 R Window trigger C 7 Radian 3 210 Range vertical input 3 18 Readout channel 3 130 cursor V bars 3 214 trigger 3 72 Real time only C 6 Real time acquisition controls 3 31 Real time sampling 3 37 Glossary 13 Recall default setup C 1 Recall waveform C 1 Recalling a setup 3 221 Recalling a waveform 3 227 Recent setup file C 2 Record acquisition shared by all channels 3 23 Record length 3 21 3 122 3 183 Glossary 13 defined 3 36 derivative math waveforms 3 172 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 15 Index integral math waveforms 3 174 Recovered clock 3 55 3 56 3 65 3 117 Glossary 13 data 3 55 3 56 Rectangular window 3 192 3 194 3 197 3 211 Reference clock 2 10 C 15 color 3 132 levels 3 147 3 148 levels method 3 143 memory Glossary 13 setup C 1 wavefo
39. amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Sequential Triggering Overview and setup for triggering after 3 103 time delay and triggering on events To Trigger on a Sequence Setting up triggering on a sequence 3 109 3 3 Overview Tasks or topics Display Features Data Processing Calculation Subtasks or subtopics Using the Display Taking Measurements Displaying Waveforms Using display features and customizing 3 119 the display Using the Waveform Overview of display features and setup of 3 119 Display the display To Display Waveforms in Display adjustments you can make 3 124 the Main Graticule Setting Zoom Controls Overview and use of Zoom 3 125 To Zoom Waveforms Setup to zoom a waveform 3 126 Customizing the Display Customizing display elements 3 131 Set Display Styles Overview of display adjustments you can 3 135 make Customize Graticule and Overview of graticule and waveform 3 137 Waveforms adjustments you can make Measuring Waveforms Setup for measuring parameters 3 139 Taking Automatic Overview and setup for taking automatic 3 140 Measurements measurements To Take Automatic Set for automatic measurements 3 144 Measurements To Localize a Setup to measure a segment of a 3 149 Measurement waveform Taking Cursor Measure Overview and setup for taking cursor 3 151 ments measurements To Set the Cursor Sources Selecting the cursor sources 3 155 Taking Histograms Overview and setup f
40. divisions high Any math using Ch1 will not be affected by this change because the Ch1 voltage levels have not changed See Source Dependencies on page 3 170 How to manage displaying Turn on and off the display of math waveforms from the Math control window Use the same control window controls waveform selection buttons vertical position and vertical scale knobs Mouse or touch screen operations for positioning waveforms on screen work also CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Use Math Waveforms The procedure that follows demonstrates some common operations that you can perform on math waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The Math waveform must be defined and displayed See the reference listed at right See To Define a Math Waveform on page 3 175 Select and 2 Touch the Math button to display the Math control van J ath display window Math J 3 Touch any Math x tab to make that math waveform the _ jumyaaiilenaal selected waveform DET TRTE 7 Define Edit Expression Spectral Analysis m If the waveform that you select is not defined use A Pte N Sees the To Define a Math Waveform procedure starting SS s oe ES on page 3 175 to define the math waveform Py Ea A m f the waveform is not displayed touch Display to toggle it on CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments
41. export Select setup for export To save a waveform Cont 3 From the menu bar select File and then select Select for Export The menu lists all available waveform image and measurement types available for export Full Screen to export a bitmap of all screen contents Graticule to export a bitmap of only the graticule area Waveform to export waveform data Measurements to export measurement data 4 From the menu bar select File and then select Export Setup to display the Export Setup control window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources Ai Edit Vertical H oriz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measur Reference Waveforms Instrument Setup Recall Default Setup Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Export Setup Select for Export 4 Full Screen image Graticule image Waveform data Export 1 040427_062843000 set 2 TDSSetup000 set Measurements data Minimize Ctr4 M Shutdown jal Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Reference Waveforms F Instrument Setup Recall Default Setup Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Export Setup N Select for Export k Export 1 040427_062843000 set 2 TDSSetup000 set Minimize Ctrl M Shutdown 3 237 Data Input Output Overview Setup to export 3 238 images To save a waveform Cont 5 Select the Images tab to display the Images c
42. integration 3 173 intensity 3 133 interpolation 3 133 C 9 interval Glossary 17 printing 3 250 recalling 3 227 save formats 3 235 saving 3 227 Waveform clipping See Clipping Waveform intensity display menu 3 46 Waveform record 3 36 definition applied to all channels 3 23 illustrated 3 36 3 153 spectral source long versus short 3 183 Waveforms and zoom 3 126 clear 3 233 delete 3 233 Measuring 3 139 Wavelength selection 3 59 Width Glossary 11 Glossary 12 setup C 8 trigger C 7 Width trigger 3 78 3 87 A Trigger control window 3 87 how to set up 3 87 3 118 how to setup 3 102 main trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Window 3 192 Blackman Harris 3 211 characteristics 3 192 3 194 Flattop2 3 211 functions 3 182 Index 22 Gaussian 3 211 Hamming 3 211 Hanning 3 211 Kaiser Bessel 3 211 rectangular 3 211 rectangular vs bell shaped 3 197 selecting 3 193 setup C 8 Tek Exponential 3 211 trigger 3 79 Window trigger defining limits 3 93 how to set up 3 102 logic inputs 3 93 setting up 3 92 Source 3 92 threshold levels 3 92 trigger if 3 93 Windows descriptions of 3 211 X XY C 9 format 3 47 Glossary 17 XYZ C 9 format 3 47 Glossary 17 Y YT C 9 format 3 47 Glossary 17 Z Zero phase reference point 3 195 establishing for impulse testing 3 195 Zoom 3 121 3 122 3 125 3 138 3 150 100 C 5 C 7 50 50 C 5 C 7 80 20 C 5 C 7 a waveform 3 12
43. touch Utilities and select Set Time amp Date to display the Set Time and Date control window Touch Hour Minute or Second and use the multipur pose knobs keypad or arrow buttons to enter the time Touch Year Month or Day and use the multipurpose knobs keypad or arrow buttons to enter the date Touch Set time and date now to set the time and date Touch Get Current Time to get the current time from the Windows operating system You can display the current date and time on screen so that they appear on hardcopies that you print To date and time stamp your hardcopy do the Control elements and resources Trigger Level Marker 7 Shor Long Display Date Time On Ott Display Trigger T CIEE Help Buttons Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date k GPIB Configuration Get Current e Hour Minute ka Second Time 0 4 0 Lv se ve a Date Set Time and Date Time Set time and date now Year Month 1900 Set time and date now Get Current Time CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Remote Communication Remote communication is performed through the GPIB interface Consult the online Programmer Guide for help with establishing remote communication and control of the instrument To access the Programmer Guide locate the Product Software CD that was shipped with the instrument Install the CD in the personal computer that you
44. waveform illustration 3 173 select a function 3 176 select a math waveform 3 175 select and display 3 179 set scale and position 3 180 source dependencies 3 170 sources 3 170 spectral analysis of an impulse illustration 3 167 spectral math waveforms 3 182 take automatic measurements 3 180 take cursor measurements 3 181 to define a math waveform 3 175 to define an expression 3 175 to define edit a math expression 3 176 to use 3 179 to use math waveforms 3 179 using math 3 169 using math waveforms 3 178 waveform differentiation 3 171 waveform integration 3 173 MathCad file format 3 236 MathLab file format 3 236 Max 3 146 Maximum B 2 C 11 C 12 Glossary 9 Mean 3 146 B 2 B 3 C 11 C 12 Glossary 9 Mean 1 stddev B 3 Mean 2 stddev B 3 Mean 3 stddev B 3 Measure menu all C 12 amplitude C 11 area C 12 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 11 Index burst width C 12 Comm C 12 crossing C 12 cycle area C 12 cycle distortion C 12 cycle mean C 11 cycle RMS C 11 delay C 12 ext ratio C 12 ext ratio dB C 12 ext ratio C 12 eye height C 12 eye top C 12 eye width C 12 fall time C 12 frequency C 12 gating C 12 high level C 11 histogram measurements C 12 hits in box C 12 Horiz C 12 jitter 6 sigma C 12 jitter pk pk C 12 jitter rms C 12 low level C 11 maximum C 11 C 12 mean C 11 C 12 mean 1 stddev C
45. 1 us after the falling edge of the pulse on Ch1 Ch2 provides the B events and Ch3 provides the reset event The reset event window is from the A event to the reset event at the rising edge of Ch3 Triggers remain reset as long as the reset event is true If the trigger delay is increased from 1 us to 2 us the instrument will not trigger because the Ch3 reset event would occur before the next Ch2 event CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 113 Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont Control elements and resources File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons Tek Run Sample 10 Sep 03 17 04 20 Aevent i BES aman R T eee oa eee End of trigger delay if tert 3 F AEAN E E A TE E eee mee eae 7 B event Reset event start E a s 2 01 iy i i i f x R 3 Reset event end f f AEvent A B Event Mode A Runt gt Trigger After Time gt Bievent Acquire A gt B Sequence A Only Horizontal Delay Mode A Event Ref Pt Trigger Reset 7 Bi Type State or a inn m A then B i Source Threshold Sk cha Y ooy rig Afte ri Trig Delay Position Reset A gt B sequence if logic state 1 0ps 50 0 is True B Trig Level 208 0m 3 114 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont Control elements and resources T
46. 131 Label the Waveform on page 3 229 and Annotate Measurements on page 3 146 for additional information CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Input to process 1 Figure 3 35 Annotated display Customize Measurements To allow you control over how your waveform data is characterized by measurements the instrument lets you set the methods used for each measurement See High Low Method on page 3 142 and Reference Levels Method on page 3 143 See Statistics on Measurement Results To see how automatic measurements vary statistically you can display a readout of the Min Max Mean and Standard Deviation of the measurement results See Display measurement statistics on page 3 146 for more information Select Measurement Parameters You can select from an extensive range of parameters to measure for a list see Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Measure Part of a Waveform You can feed the entire waveform to a measurement or limit the measurement to a segment of the waveform By default the instrument takes each automatic measurement over the entire waveform record but you can use measurement gates and zoom to localize each measurement to a section of a waveform see To Localize a Measurement on page 3 149 Select Measurement Sources Select from these measurement sources channel reference and math waveforms CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instru
47. 173 Inten samp 3 135 Intensified samples 3 135 C 9 Intensity 3 46 Glossary 8 display menu 3 46 Waveform 3 133 Interleaving 3 40 Glossary 8 Internal reference 2 10 C 15 Interpolated real time C 6 Interpolation 3 39 3 40 3 133 3 134 C 9 Glossary 8 incompatible with DPO 3 41 Introduction to this manual xv J Jitter 6 sigma B 4 C 12 pk pk C 12 pk pk measurement B 4 RMS B 4 rms C 12 JPEG file format 3 236 K Kaiser Bessel window 3 192 3 194 3 199 Knob Glossary 8 multipurpose 3 154 Glossary 10 resolution Glossary 8 trigger MAIN LEVEL 3 68 L Label C 1 C 4 C 14 Label the waveform 3 229 LAN enabling 1 16 LAN connection 1 16 Level 3 69 A Trigger control window 3 84 3 88 3 95 trigger 3 67 Level presets 3 75 A Trigger 3 76 Line trigger input 3 64 3 70 Linear 3 135 C 9 Linear interpolation 3 39 3 134 Glossary 8 Logic pattern setup C 8 Logic pattern trigger C 7 Logic qualified trigger 3 102 Logic state setup C 8 Logic state trigger C 7 Logic trigger 3 80 definitions 3 80 Index 10 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index pattern Glossary 9 state 3 79 3 80 Glossary 9 Logic triggering 3 77 Logic A Trigger control window 3 98 3 99 logic 3 96 pulse 3 83 Logic main trigger menu pulse 3 89 3 94 Low B 2 Glossary 9 Low frequency compensation 3 163 Low level C 11 Low method 3 142 Magnitude spectrum
48. 3 System Overview Maps Timebase System Tells the Acquisition system to start an acquisition cycle that is to convert from analog to digital In more general terms synchronizes the capturing of digital samples in the Acquisition system to the trigger events generated from the Trigger system Acquisition System Performs the actual A D conversion and storing of digital samples Optical to Electrical Converter CSA7000B Series Converts optical signals to electrical signals DSP Transformation System Performs a variety of transformations or operations beginning with the most fundamental data element s in the system the Channel Waveform s Waveform math operations automatic measurements spectral waveforms and histogram generation are examples Input Output Systems Provides output and sometimes input of instru ment data elements in a form suitable to the user and also provides user input control The process overview that follows describes each step in the top level cycle of instrument operation 2 4 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual System Overview Maps Process Overview Map Process Overview Reset Abort Power on Power down Arm Implement setup Acquire pretrigger points Stop condition Trigger accepted Acquire posttrigger points Waveform record complete Waveform available CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Serie
49. 3 116 B Trig Level 3 110 B trigger level 3 110 Trig Event 3 110 trigger events 3 110 A gt b trigger sequence C 8 About TekScope C 16 Absolute reference 3 143 AC coupling Glossary 1 AC line voltage trigger input 3 64 3 70 Access vertical set up help 3 17 Accessories 1 33 optional 1 36 standard 1 35 Accessory software 1 14 Accuracy Glossary 1 Acquiring and displaying waveforms 3 7 Acquisition Glossary 1 input channels and digitizers 3 34 interval Glossary 1 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 1 Index modes 3 35 Envelope 3 49 record 3 36 sampling see sampling 3 35 Acquisition controls acquisition control background 3 34 acquisition hardware 3 34 acquisition modes 3 35 aliasing illustrated 3 29 average 3 26 3 30 condition 3 28 envelope 3 26 3 30 equivalent time sampling 3 37 equivalent time sampling illustrated 3 39 global controls 3 28 Hi Res 3 25 3 30 intensity 3 46 interleaving 3 40 interpolation 3 39 linear interpolation 3 39 methods to check and eliminate aliasing 3 29 peak detect 3 25 3 30 preventing aliasing 3 29 real time 3 31 real time sampling 3 37 record length 3 36 repetitive signal 3 31 roll 3 28 RUN STOP 3 30 Run Stop button only 3 27 sample 3 24 3 30 sample interval 3 36 sampling and acquisition mode 3 37 sampling mode selection 3 38 sampling process 3 35 select the acqui
50. 3 134 Varying vertical offset 3 20 V bars C 11 Vectors 3 132 3 134 C 9 display control window 3 134 Vectors display incompatible with DPO 3 41 Verification incoming inspection procedure 1 21 Version number C 16 Vert C 12 Vertical acquisition window Glossary 16 acquisition window considerations 3 18 bar cursors Glossary 16 control window deskew 3 162 cursors 3 151 3 153 deskew 3 162 Glossary 3 Vertical menu attenuation C 4 bandwidth C 4 coupling C 4 deskew C 4 display on off C 4 label C 4 offset C 4 position scale C 4 probe cal C 4 termination C 4 vertical setup C 4 zoom controls C 4 zoom setup C 5 Vertical offset 3 122 discussion on setting 3 18 Vertical position 3 122 Vertical range discussion on setting 3 18 Vertical scale 3 122 Vertical scale and offset illustrated 3 19 uses for 3 9 Vertical setup C 4 purpose 3 9 Vertical window overview 3 17 3 18 View printing 3 251 Virtual keyboard control window 3 221 3 228 VNC C 10 Voltage CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 21 Index overrange and underrange points 3 18 overview 3 18 W Waveform C 2 C 3 C 11 Glossary 16 acquiring and displaying of 3 7 clipping See Clipping copying 3 235 count B 3 database 3 26 3 30 3 49 Glossary 17 differentiation 3 171 Display 3 133 display 3 121 display on C 10 displaying 3 119 exporting 3 235 FFTs 3 182 histograms C 12
51. 3 80 slope and level 3 67 state trigger 3 80 the trigger event 3 64 timeout trigger 3 79 to check trigger status 3 72 to define a time qualified pattern trigger 3 97 to define new trigger level presets 3 76 to define pattern inputs 3 96 3 103 to define the logic 3 96 3 103 to force a trigger 3 76 to logic qualify a trigger 3 102 to reset sequential triggers 3 111 3 112 3 113 to select a preset trigger level 3 75 to select the trigger mode 3 71 to select the trigger slope 3 69 to select the trigger source 3 70 to select the trigger type 3 69 to set holdoff 3 74 to set level 3 69 to set mode and holdoff 3 84 3 87 3 88 3 91 3 95 3 97 3 99 3 101 to set the trigger coupling 3 71 to set thresholds 3 96 3 103 to set to 50 3 70 to set trigger when 3 96 to set up B Triggering 3 115 to single trigger 3 77 to trigger based on transition time 3 89 to trigger on A Main only 3 109 to trigger on a glitch 3 83 to trigger on a pattern 3 96 to trigger on a runt pulse 3 85 to trigger on a state 3 98 to trigger on B After Time 3 110 to trigger on B Events 3 110 to trigger on setup hold time violations 3 99 transition trigger 3 79 Index 20 CSA7OOOB Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index trigger and horizontal delay summary 3 108 trigger based on pulse timeout 3 94 trigger based on pulse width 3 87 trigger coupling 3 67 trigger holdof
52. B Event Data Source Chi Y Data Level gger Type SetupMold Select as 5 e Trigger Levels Shared Y B Event Data Source Chi Y Trigger Type SetupHold Y Select Clock Source che Y Trigger Levels Shared Y Mode Setup Hold Trigger Data Level E Clock Level ASetupHold gt Acquire Setup Hold Trigger Ck s h Ok RF as hv TK Setup Time 1 0ns Hold Time 500 0ps Clock Edge Ea ES ASetupHold Acquire Setup Hold Trigger Setup Time Ck 5 ins Ck AE ery Hold Time as CK 500 0ps Clock Edge ASatupHold Acquira Setup Time Ck Ey Hey Hold Time as Ck 500 0ps Clock Edge Clock Source Che W Triggering Overview Set the setup and hold times Logic qualify the trigger To set mode and holdoff CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual To trigger on setup hold time violations Cont To set the setup time and the hold time relative to the clock 8 Touch Setup Time and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the setup time 9 Touch Hold Time and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the hold time See Figure 3 27 on page 3 102 Positive setup time always leads the clock edge positive hold time always follows the clocking edge Setup time always leads the hold time by at least 2 ns Ts Ty 2 ns Note Attempting to set either time to reduce the 2 ns limit adjusts the other time to maintain
53. Best for impulse testing It sets the zero phase reference to the 20 position in the time record allowing the test to use more of the instrument record length The bullet Choice of a window on page 3 193 provides in depth information on choosing the right window for your application CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Create Mag Phase Go Track Time Frequency Domain Controls Mahi Math2 Math Math Window Type Gaussian Y Rectangular Hamming Hanning Black Harris Flattop2 KalserBessel TekExa 3 211 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Set the frequency domain controls 3 212 To define a spectral math waveform Cont The spectral analyzer center frequency and the frequency span must be within the bandwidth setting determined by the sample rate See Figure 3 49 on page 3 187 to see how a signal consisting of two sine waves looks on screen as the spectral analyzer controls are adjusted A rectangular window was used 20 To set the frequency range over which the spectral analysis is performed touch Freq Span and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the frequency range Higher sample rates allow you to set greater frequency spans To set the frequency span to the maximum allowed by the current sample rate touch the Full button 21 To set the center frequency of the spectral anal
54. Instruments User Manual 3 105 Triggering Triggering with Horizontal Delay On You can use horizontal delay when you want to acquire a waveform record that is separated from the trigger event by a significant interval of time The horizontal delay function can be used with any trigger setup You can turn horizontal delay on and off from the front panel the Horizontal Acquisition control window and many of the Trigger control windows Figure 3 29 compares the sequential trigger choices A Only Trig After Time and Trig on nt Event when horizontal delay is on Each illustration shows where pretrigger and posttrigger data is acquired relative to the trigger event Pretrigger record Posttrigger record A Main Only with Horizontal Delay Waveform record _ gt A trigger point pa Tn source lt Horizontal delay aS B trigger point Start posttrigger acquisition Trig After Time with Horizontal Delay Waveform record gt ULLAL A trigger point A trigger source source L a J EN Trigger delay time lt Horizontal delay gt Start posttrigger acquisition Trig on nth Event with Horizontal Delay B trigger point Waveform record A trigger point A trigger ULI LIL LA source B trigger source NNN MIRSIRISIRIN i DZ Waiting for nth event Horizontal delay where n 4
55. Manual Glossary Waveform database mode An acquisition mode that processes and displays a larger sample of data The waveform database is a three dimensional accumulation of source waveform data over several acquisitions In addition to amplitude and timing informa tion the database includes a count of the number of times a specific waveform point has been acquired Waveform interval The time interval between record points as displayed XY format A display format that compares the voltage level of two waveform records point by point It is useful for studying phase relationships between two waveforms XYZ format A display format that compares the voltage level of two waveform records point by point as in XY format The displayed waveform intensity is modulated by the CH 3 Z waveform record YT format The conventional instrument display format It shows the voltage of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies over time on the horizontal axis CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 17 Glossary Glossary 18 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index Symbols Empty C 14 lt A Trigger control window 3 84 gt A Trigger control window 3 84 Numbers 1 recent setup file 1 C 2 100 Zoom C 5 50 50 Zoom C 5 80 20 Zoom C 5 A A event main trigger setup C 7 A Only trigger how to set up 3 109 A Only A Trigger control wi
56. Measurements used when copying measurements CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 3 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Vertical Commands Table C 3 lists the commands available from the Vertical menu Table C 3 Vertical menu commands Menu Vertical Setup Zoom Controls Display On Off Position Scale Label Offset Termination Coupling Bandwidth Probe Cal Deskew Attenuation Function Displays the Vertical Setup window that you use to set the position scale offset termination coupling and bandwidth of a channel You can also calibrate deskew and set the external attenuation of attached probes Displays the Zoom control window that you use to set the position and scale of zoomed waveforms Displays the Waveform Display control window that you can use to turn the display of waveforms on and off Displays the control window that you use to position the waveform and set the vertical scale Displays a control window that you use to label your waveforms Vertical labels move if the waveform position changes also see display screen text on page C 9 Displays the Vertical Offset control window you use to set the vertical offset and scale of a waveform Displays the Termination control window you use to select input termination for a channel Displays the Coupling control window you use to select input coupling for a channel Displays the Bandwidth control window you use to set the bandw
57. Off for no trigger level marker Toggle on and off the display of a T at the trigger point Toggle on and off the display of the system date and time Set the date and time using the Set Time and Date setup window that is displayed Right click in the graticule area and click the Data Clear button to reset histograms statistics persistence and mask count data 1 The Menu Names refer to the menus found in the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the instrument screen CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 133 Displaying Waveforms 3 134 Normal and Persistence Displays Use the display persistence to control how waveform data ages m Off style displays waveforms without persistence each new waveform record replaces the previously acquired record for a channel You can choose to display normal waveforms as vectors which displays lines between the record points or dots vectors off which displays the record points only You can also choose an interpolation mode See Interpolation on page 3 134 m Variable Persistence style accumulates the waveform record points on screen and displays them only for a specific time interval Previous waveform data continuously fades from the display as new waveform records acquire m Infinite Persistence style accumulates the data record points until you change some control such as scale factor causing the display to be erased Waveform data builds up as new data r
58. Pixel A visible point on the display The instrument display is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high Positive duty cycle A timing measurement of the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive overshoot Amplitude voltage measurement Max High Amplitude KOUM PositiveOvershoot Positive width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points rising edge MidRef default 50 and falling edge MidRef default 50 on a positive pulse Posttrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired after the trigger event Pretrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired before the trigger event Principal Power Switch The master power switch located on the rear panel of the instrument CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Probe An input device Probe compensation Adjustment that improves low frequency response of a probe Proximal The point closest to a reference point As used in the instrument the beginning measurement point for timing measurements Pulse trigger A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the instrument finds a pulse of the specified polarity with a width between or optionally outside the user specified lower and upper time limits Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled such a
59. Reinstalling the hard drive Installing Software The instrument system and application software is preinstalled at the factory If you have to reinstall the software for any reason refer to the instructions that accompany the CDs that are shipped with the instrument If you need to restore the operating system you also need the Windows license information from the Certificate of Authenticity that is shipped with the instrument Software Release Notes Read the software release notes README TXT ASCII file on the product soft ware CD before performing installation procedures This file contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes other product documenta tion To view the README TXT file open the Notepad Windows accessory Then open the file on the Product Software CD CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 13 Installation Accessory Software Desktop Applications The Product Software CD also contains accessory software and files that you can choose to install in the instrument or in another computer Refer to the instruc tions that accompany the CD for installation information GPIB Programmer Online Help Software You can install the GPIB Programmer online help on the instrument but it may be more convenient to install it on the PC that is functioning as the GPIB system controller From the system controller you can copy and paste commands from the help directly into your
60. SS QE 558 z olel 888 o ee je je B 9939399 Probe compensation a al a lel o Ground terminal output CI g Recovered clock output Recovered data output D Channel Optical input inputs O E converter electrical output TDS7000B Series l l l Jaaa a l ls Probe compensation o le a a o Ground terminal L ye output Auxiliary trigger input 7 Channel Auxiliary trigger output inputs CH 3 SIGNAL OUTPUT scale and offset controlled by CH3 controls CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 2 9 C aa Rear Panel I O Map Removable hard disk drive to provide L O individual environment for each user or to secure data Loosen thumb screws and pull to release CD RW drive accessible from Windows Press to open OA Connectors for speaker and microphone O AN je Om i USB connector for mouse or os D 7 gro keyboard and mouse PS 2 connectors for mouse and keyboard RJ 45 connector to connect to network LJ am VIDEO O COM Upper Video port to connect a O 0007 monitor for side by side display o0O0o0o00 zajo eo COM1 serial port Parallel port Centronics to connect printer or other device j S o0o00000000000 Oaa O Cin Lower XGA port to connect a SCOPE ou monitor for instrument displa
61. Signal Type Optional on TDS7000B Series Lets the instrument know if the signal to be measured is a pulse waveform or an eye diagram Reference Levels Method A second set of levels affect the fidelity of time related measurements the Hi Mid and Lo references For example the measurement system takes risetime measurements from the waveform edge that transitions from the Low to High reference levels You can set the calculation method for each measurement The instrument provides the following calculation methods refer to Figure 3 37 as you read about each method m Relative Reference Calculated as a percentage of the High Low range m Absolute Reference Set by absolute values in user units CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 143 Measuring Waveforms To Take Automatic Measurements Overview Prerequisites 1 3 144 To take automatic measurements Obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured Reference level calculation methods Le el F D amp S Fs SS S pe Br Guy ORME of High 50 mV High reference Mid reference 0 mV Low reference Low 50 mV Figure 3 37 Reference level calculation methods The High and Low levels from which the reference levels are calculated are the levels established using the selected Hi Low method described on page 3 142 Use the procedure that follows to qu
62. Source Tracking Source Chi V Chi vV Frame HorizfAcy Frame aw SetUn 2 Controls Multiple Frames Frame Count Readouts time stamp readouts on or off aurrame Seeaaa tions Frama fence Frame Slton o Source Tracking Source m On displays time stamp readouts see Figure 3 17 fiam E m v Ea cht Y leans i H SOSEN Frame a on page 3 54 Time stamps are always acquired a La NI Setup i Multiple m Off turns off the display of time stamp readouts isis The displayed time uses the following format Sel Ch E xxx DD MMM YYYY HH MMESS mmm puu nnn ppp Ref Ch F xxx DD MMM YYYY HH MM SS mmm uuu nnn ppp A Where DD MMM YYYY HH MM SS mmm uuu nnn ppp Sel and Ref Ch F xxx are the selected or reference frame number DD MMM YYYY is the date day month and year HH MM SS mmm is the clock time hours minutes seconds and milliseconds uup nnn ppp is a fraction of a second to picoseconds CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview Time stamping frames Cont Select the 4 In the Time Stamps controls touch Source and select reference the source of the reference frame frame 5 Inthe Time Stamps controls touch Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the reference frame This value sets the starting frame when measuring the relative time between two frames Select the You may set the Selected Frame and Reference
63. System Online Programmers Guide Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy TekVISA Programming Manual VXIplug amp play Driver Help TekVISA Excel Toolbar Help oe oD07F Description Read the Reference for a quick overview of instrument features and their usage Read the User Manual for general informa tion about your instrument procedures on how to put it into service specifications of its performance maps of its user interface controls overviews and background on its features For more usage information see Online Help System below Access online help from the instrument for context sensitive information on virtually all controls and elements on screen Online help includes procedures for using instrument functions See Accessing Online Help on page 3 263 Quickly find the syntax of a command and copy the command if desired Read about communication error handling and other information on GPIB usage This guide is on the product software CD These documents consists of various connectivity and analysis tools that you can install and configure for your instrument For more information see the Analysis and Connectivity Support topic in the instrument online help An optional service manual is available for this product if you self service or performance test this instrument See Accessories amp Options on page 1 33 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual a a Sys
64. TDS7404B TDS7254B TDS7154B Step response settling errors typical Description DC 50 Q coupling Full bandwidth operating ambient 15 C to 30 C derated by 20 MHz C above 30 C SCALE range 2 mV div to 3 9 mV div 4 mV div to 9 9 mV div 10 mV div Bandwidth DC to 1 GHz DC to 1 25 GHz DC to 3 5 GHz Operating ambient 15 C to 30 C 59 F to 86 F at V div 10 mV div derated by 20 MHz C above 30 C 86 F SCALE range 2 mV div to 3 9 mV div 4 mV div to 9 9 mV div 10 mV div 62 ps 100 ps 130 ps 200 ps Full bandwidth SCALE range and step amplitude 2 mV div to 99 5 mV div with lt 1 5 V step 100 mV div to 1 V div with lt 3 V step CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Bandwidth DC to 1 GHz DC to 1 25 GHz DC to 6 GHz Settling error at time after step 20 ns lt 2 1ms lt 0 1 20 ns lt 2 1 ms lt 0 2 A 9 Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Pulse response peak detect or envelope mode Position range Offset range Offset accuracy CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B TDS7704B A 10 Description Sample rate setting Minimum pulse width 2 5 GS s or less 400 ps 5 divisions SCALE range Offset range 2 mV div to 50 mV div 0 50 V 50 5 mV div to 99 5 mV div 0 25 V 100 mV div to 500 mV div 5 V 505 mV div to 1 V div 2 5 V
65. TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary 0 cece cece cece eee e ee eees Preface ssar eb eee he Ok AE OW ROSE OOE RNA Cale Rebs About This Manual 0 0 0 cc ce eee ne een nen Related Manuals and Online Documents 00 00 cee cee ee Getting Started Product Description ois 020505 cs eses tado 6a 0 ae wg ed Sina aie ka Blade Models anote mana aana aa sata agar sans Sea naa ee aca aad we S Key Features miana ad nea Sessa ar E a Ne sane ack ate ae aoe ee Product Software nuras e g cia eine ea Gee Ps aaa eg se E ALE Software Upgrade iio veg eikonal aad ee ela pa ee ale Installation seces hae deere beth ieee a eas tee ees MMPACkiN Give tcc s ahh at ct ackas e huh an eth we aa a Hele inet teal ayet ted teh aati Checking the Environment Requirements 00 0000000 Connecting Peripherals 2 2 0 0 eee eee eens Powering On the Instrument 0 0 cece eee cece Shutting Down the Instrument 00 cece eee eee ee eee Backing Up User Files eien maue miaa cece een eens Removing the Removable Hard Drive 000 0 c eee eee Reinstalling the Removable Hard Drive 000 000 0 cee eee Installing Software 2 0 cece cee tence ences Enabling or Disabling Your LAN and Connecting to a Network Setting up a Dual Display 0 0 eee ee ee cece eee Incoming Inspectio
66. This section describes how to use Fast Acquisition mode and how it differs from normal acquisition mode Fast acquisition mode reduces the dead time between waveform acquisitions that normally occur when digitizing storage instruments DSOs acquire waveforms This dead time reduction enables Fast Acquisition mode to capture and display transient events such as glitches or runt pulses often missed during longer dead times that accompany normal DSO operation Fast Acquisition mode can also display waveform phenomena at an intensity that reflects their rate of occur rence Fast acquisition XY and XYZ modes also provide intensity information by accepting continuous non triggered data from the input channels 3 40 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Measurements and histograms are done directly on the two dimensional array of display pixels In infinite persistence mode the array accumulates more information and measurements are more accurate Some modes features are incompatible with Fast Acquisitions mode and if you select them they will inhibit Fast Acquisitions m FastFrame and Zoom modes m Envelope Average Waveform Database Hi Res and Single Acquisition Sequence acquisition modes m Interpolation equivalent time sampling is used instead m Vectors when in equivalent time mode waveforms are displayed using Dots To determine under what conditions the instrument normally in
67. To stop acquiring data push RUN STOP see Figure 3 6 Use untriggered roll to continuously observe a slow process knowing that you can always see the most recent view of that process Math and measurements work after you push STOP Untriggered Roll with Single Sequence Untriggered roll mode with single sequence displays newly acquired data points at the right edge of the waveform record while moving older waveform data points to the left Acquisitions automatically stop after a complete waveform record is acquired see Figure 3 6 Use untriggered roll with single sequence to observe data for later viewing Untriggered roll New data points New data points AN A A tN VININ 1 VN VIN Y U U U UNN cquisitions Acquisitions lt Oddata start lt Old data continues caine Untriggered roll with single sequence New data points Complete waveform record WW Old data Acquisitions E start k N A A AAAA Acquisitions VV U stop Figure 3 6 Roll mode 3 28 Global Controls Like the horizontal controls the acquisition controls apply to all active channels for example channel 1 cannot acquire in Sample mode while channel 2 acquires in Envelope mode You cannot stop channel 4 from acquiring if turned on while other channels continue to acquire CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Preventing Aliasing
68. User Manual 3 179 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Cont Related control elements and resources Set scale and 4 Touch Position or Scale and use the multipurpose knobs position or keypad to size and position the waveform on screen as you want it Note Position is in divisions so changing the scale can make the math waveform disappear until position is also changed the same effect happens with channel waveforms You can touch and drag a waveform handle to change the waveform vertical position You can adjust the waveform vertical position and scale by first touching the waveform handle and then using the multipurpose knobs to adjust the scale and position You cannot adjust the offset of a math waveform You cannot adjust horizontal scale position and sample density resolution of math waveforms different length source waveforms result in a math waveform of the shortest source record length If you adjust these settings for sources for a math waveform the adjustment is reflected in the math waveform Take 5 Touch the Meas button select the Math tab and touch a n automatic math button to choose a math waveform from Math1 measurements Math4 See right TE 6 Select a measurement for more information see Taking Automatic Measurements on page 3 140 Touch the Help button in the menu bar for more information 7 To display the measurement touch Display to toggl
69. Z540 1 and ISO9000 Calibration Certificate Four TekConnect to SMA adapters TDS7704B CSA7404B amp TCA SMA TDS7404B Four TekConnect to BNC adapters TDS7254B amp TDS7154B TCA BNC Two TekConnect high impedance buffer amplifiers includes 2 P6139A TCA 1MEG 500 MHz 10x passive probes TDS7254B amp TDS7154B Adapters CSA7404B 020 2423 xx OJE Electrical Out to CH1 Input adapter Tektronix part number 013 0327 xx O E to SMA adapter Tektronix part number 013 0326 xx U S Power Cord 161 0104 00 Mouse optical 119 6936 xx Keyboard USB 119 B146 xx Front Cover 200 4653 xx Accessory Pouch 016 1441 xx CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 35 Accessories amp Options Table 1 5 Standard accessories Cont Accessory Part number Probe Calibration and Deskew Fixture with instructions CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B 067 0405 xx TDS7704B TDS7404B amp CSA7404B 067 0484 xx Fiber cleaning kit CSA7404B 020 2494 xx FC PC UCI adapter installed CSA7404B 119 4516 xx Click N Burn Software CD 063 3575 xx Optional The accessories in Table 1 6 are orderable for use with the instrument at the time this manual was originally published Consult a current Tektronix catalog for additions changes and details Table 1 6 Optional accessories Accessory Part number Transit Case 016 1522 xx Scope Cart K4000 Option 1K P6158 20x 1 kQ low capacitance voltage divider probe P6158 P6245
70. affects sample rate Table 3 4 XY and XYZ format assignments Table 3 5 Pattern and state logic 0 cece cece c cece eeee Table 3 6 Defining and displaying waveforms Table 3 7 Operations performed based on the waveform type Table 3 8 Customizable display elements ee000 Table 3 9 Cursor functions types ccc cece eee e ee eees Table 3 10 Cursor units 0 cc ccc cece cece eee e een eee Table 3 11 Math expressions and the math waveforms PRODUCE sei died 6 aie stron See aie sola Ree ON are SAN ages RA ES Table 3 12 Spectral analyzer controls 00 ce cece e eens Table 3 13 Window characteristics ccc cece e ee eeeees Table A 1 Instrument models cece eee c ween eeees Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Table A 3 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Table A 4 Trigger specifications 0 cece cece cece ween Table A 5 Serial Trigger specifications optional on TDS7000B Series ccc cece cece cece cee en eres eeceeens Table A 6 Display specifications ccc cece eee ee eee Table A 7 Input output port specifications 000 Table A 8 O E converter CSA7000B Series only Table A 9 Data storage specifications cece eee eens Table A 10 Power source specifications ceeeeeeee Table A 11 Mechanical
71. amplitude m No recognizable trigger signal m Signals with a frequency gt 50 Hz m Signals with a frequency above the bandwidth of the instrument m Signals with high offset and low peak to peak variations Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations You can set the vertical size position and offset of each channel independently of other channels Vertical scale and offset specify the vertical acquisition window for each channel Parts of the signal amplitude that fall within the vertical window are acquired parts outside if any are not The offset control subtracts a constant DC level from the input signal before the vertical scale factor is applied and the vertical position control adds a constant number of divisions of signal after the scale factor is applied to the resulting difference The vertical scale and position controls have the following effects on the vertical acquisition window and the displayed waveform m The vertical volts per division that you set determines the vertical size of the acquisition window allowing you to scale it to contain all of a waveform amplitude or only part Figure 3 2 on page 3 19 shows two vertical acquisition windows that contain the entire waveform but only one window contains the entire waveform in the graticule on screen NOTE Amplitude related automatic measurements for example peak to peak and RMS will be accurate for vertical windows like those shown in Figure 3 2a and b becau
72. and data connectors The optical input connector uses a universal connector interface UCI that allows use of many standard fiber optic female connector styles Some of the standard UCI interfaces supported are FC ST SC and DIN Refer to a current Tektronix catalog for details Clock and data recovery circuitry provides recovered clock and data outputs The signals are also available internally for use by the instrument Circuitry also provides electrical output from the O E optical to electrical converter RECOVERED DATA This output provides a 50 Q AC coupled ECL 2 level signal from the optical data signal This signal is digitally buffered and retimed to be synchronous with the serial recovered clock RECOVERED CLOCK This output is synchronous with the incoming data signal A sample of the input data is routed to the serial clock recovery circuit Recovered clock is available when using either optical or electrical signals NOTE If no signal or an inappropriate signal is applied to the front panel the recovered clock and data will oscillate CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms ELECTRICAL OUT This output is the electrical output from the O E converter Use the supplied adapters to connect to the Ch1 input or other equipment OJE Electrical Out to Chi Use the O E Electrical Out to Ch1 Input adapter to connect the Electrical Out of Input Adapter the optical to elect
73. and down arrow buttons to toggle through the possible trigger sources m CH1 CH 4 are the input channels The channel you select as a trigger source will function whether it is displayed or not m LINE is the AC Line Voltage Because the instrument generates the trigger you do not have to input a signal to create the trigger m AUX is a fifth nondisplayable trigger source To use the auxiliary trigger connect the external triggering signal to the Auxiliary Trigger input connector on the front panel CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources TRIGGER 4 ILD EDGE Q e c D D m Q e i T 5 Zz D e w O ke m oc z fs 5 g Bs AC HF REJ LF REJ NOISE READY le TRIGD z e s m NORM AUTO LEVEL PUSH TO SET 50 0 PBBBAE 00 PEBER 0 fe i TRIGGER AD SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE Cons HERES Cann o ewn CO READY MODE LEVEL K amp S es PUSH TO SET 50 W ed ee ED Triggering Overview To set the trigger coupling To select the trigger mode Triggering from the front panel Cont Control elements and resources 7 Push the up and down arrow buttons to toggle through the possible trigger couplings DC passes all both AC and DC components of the input signal AC passes only the AC components of an input signal m H
74. base settings 10GS s to 1TS s Sample Peak detect Hi Res Average Envelope and Waveform database 500 points Depends on the number of active channels and the record length options installed Maximum record length is less in serial trigger mode 500 000 points 3 or 4 channels 1 000 000 points 1 or 2 channels only 2 000 000 points 1 channel only 2 000 000 points 3 or 4 channels 4 000 000 points 1 or 2 channels only 8 000 000 points 1 channel only 4 000 000 points 3 or 4 channels 8 000 000 points 1 or 2 channels only 16 000 000 points 1 channel only 8 000 000 points 3 or 4 channels 16 000 000 points 1 or 2 channels only 32 000 000 points 1 channel only 16 000 000 points 3 or 4 channels 32 000 000 points 1 or 2 channels only 64 000 000 points 1 channel only CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Cont Characteristic Maximum record length HiRes mode sample rate lt 1 25 GS s Seconds division range Maximum FastFrame update rate nominal Frame length and maximum number of frames Description 2 000 000 points 1 2 3 or 4 channels 50 ps div to 10 s div 265 000 frames per second Maximum number of frames for Sample or Peak Detect acquisition mode depending on memory option installed Frame length 50 points 500 points 5000 points 50 000 points 500 00
75. be useful to you the Operating System Restore Product Software and Optional Applications Software Store the product software in a safe location where you can easily retrieve it NOTE The certificate of authenticity Microsoft Windows licence agreement is attached to the rear of your instrument This certificate proves your ownership of the Windows operating system in your instrument Without this certificate you might have to purchase a new Windows license if the hard disk in your instru ment ever needs rebuilding or replacement m All the standard and optional accessories that you ordered Fill out and send in the customer registration card Checking the Environment Requirements Site Considerations 1 6 Read this section before attempting any installation procedures This section describes site considerations power requirements and ground connections for your instrument The instrument is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal position on the bottom feet For proper cooling at least three inches 7 62 cm of clearance is required on both sides of the instrument and the bottom requires the clearance provided by the instrument feet If you operate the instrument while it is resting on the rear feet make sure that you properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the instrument to avoid damaging them CAUTION To prevent damage to the instrument keep the bottom and sides of the instru
76. by the spectral analyzer to a spectral waveform This may be a phase or magnitude waveform The horizontal units are always Hz The vertical units depend on whether phase or magnitude is selected The frequency domain controls for the spectral waveform are span center and resolution bandwidth The spectrum normally appears on the display fit to a screen width of 10 divi sions m Span The span is the stop frequency at the end of the spectral waveform minus the start frequency at the beginning of the waveform The span control maximum value is equal to the current sample rate divided by two There fore if you are unable to increase the span to the desired value and if you want to keep the same source waveform duration go to the timebase controls and increase the sample rate using the resolution control Or if you want to also decrease the source waveform duration adjust the sample rate control If you decrease the sample rate the span setting may decrease if necessary to keep the span less than the sample rate divided by two CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 185 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Center This is the frequency at the center of the spectral waveform Center is equal to the start frequency plus one half of the span The adjustment range depends on the sample rate and the current span setting Remember that the span must always be in the interval of zero to one half of the sample rate Whe
77. can be set independently to any one the following types Edge Glitch Width Timeout Runt Transition Window Setup Hold Pattern or State Except for Pattern and State all of these types can be logic qualified Comm and Serial trigger cannot be logic qualified nor are they available with B triggers Triggering with Horizontal Delay Off Figure 3 28 compares the sequential trigger choices A Only Trig After Time and Trig on ntt Event when horizontal delay is off Each illustration shows where pretrigger and posttrigger data is acquired relative to the trigger event 3 104 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Pretrigger record Posttrigger record A Main Only i lt __ _ _ Waveform record __ _ gt A trigger _ _ __ source A trigger point Start posttrigger acquisition Trig After Time i lt Waveform record gt A trigger point A trigger source B trigger source lt Trigger delay time r l B trigger point Start posttrigger acquisition on first B trigger after delay Trig on nth Event Waveform record ____ A trigger point A trigger source B trigger source la v B trigger point Start posttrigger Waiting for nth event acquisition on nt B event where n 5 Figure 3 28 Triggering with Horizontal Delay off CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series
78. channel select the channel threshold and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set each threshold To choose the logic pattern type you want applied to channels 1 through 3 touch an available type from the Pattern Type window See Table 3 5 on page 3 80 for definitions of the logic functions for both pattern and state triggers To trigger on a state Control elements and resources Select state 1 Mode Astala gt Acquire Logic State Trigger E Threshold Input Threshold Ch3 Ch4 Clk POs xv 0 0V 5 00V Mode Astala gt Acquire Logic State Trigger Pattern Type Threshold m ee Input Threshold Ch3 Cha cik xv Pos 500m 0 0v 0 0v AState Acquire Logic State Trigger Trigger if Pattern Type E Es Rees EN Input Threshold Ch3 cha clk Logic State Tue Y Threshold 7 Pattern Type ma CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview Set trigger when To set mode and holdoff To trigger on a state Cont Control elements and resources 6 To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met Trigger if goes TRUE or when the logic condition is not met Logic State goes FALSE touch Trigger When Pattern and select Tue False or True from the list False Trug For the simplest operation leave this control set to TRUE Setting the control to FALSE complements the output of the chosen pattern function for exampl
79. color palettes For a definition of each color palette see Color Palette on page 3 132 Control elements and resources INTENSITY RUN f STOP Objects Persistence Intensity AutoBright Record View 75 0 FastAcq WfmDB 75 0 _150 Infinite Variable Off Resel Waveform Display Controls ppe Reference Color Record View Palette Normal Temp FastAcg WimDB Normal Temp Green Green CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Set Display Format The instrument displays waveforms in one of three formats YT XY or XYZ Use the procedure that follows to set the display format Overview To set display format Control elements and resources To select the 1 To set the display axis format touch the DISP button format and select the Appearance tab 2 Select between YT XY and XYZ display formats ae pase R YT This format is the conventional instrument display ee a format It shows a signal voltage the vertical axis as it ea eal varies over time the horizontal axis i Waveform Display a Controls n XY This format compares the voltage levels of two OO m waveform records point by point see Figure 3 15 That is the instrument displays a graph of the data of one ara BE channel versus another In fast acquisition mode XY the data is a continuous stream which is not triggered and there are no waveform records In record view XY
80. compressed air m Fiber optic cleaning swabs m Pure electronics grade isopropyl alcohol NOTE If isopropyl alcohol is used care must be taken to have a truly clean pure electronics grade isopropyl alcohol source Bottles of isopropyl alcohol can become contaminated after several uses the alcohol can then leave a residue on optical connectors after drying Cleaning kits for optical connectors such as the Tektronix Optical Connector Cleaner kit number 020 2357 00 are available from a number of suppliers To clean optical connectors follow these steps 1 Remove the UCI adapter 2 Hold the can of compressed air upright and spray the can into the air to purge any propellant 3 Spray the clean compressed air on the connectors to remove any loose particles or moisture 4 Moisten a clean optical swab with isopropyl alcohol and then lightly swab the surfaces of the connectors 5 Spray the clean compressed air on the connectors again to remove any loose particles or isopropyl alcohol 6 Blow clean compressed air through the UCI adapter before replacing it The Vertical Setup menu lets you access the optical wavelength and the Dark Level compensation procedure This menu is shown in Figure 3 20 on page 3 59 Wavelength and Dark Level menus are not available unless the O E Electrical Out to CH1 Input adapter is installed CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Compensa
81. contacts in your area WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If this product proves defective during its warranty period Tektronix at its option will either repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product This warranty applies only to products returned to the designated Tektronix depot or the Tektronix authorized representative from which the product was originally purchased For products returned to other locations Customer will be assessed an applicable service charge The preceding limitation shall not apply within the European Economic Area where products may be returned for warranty service to the nearest designated service depot regardless of the place of purchase In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must provide the applicable office of Tektronix or its authorized representative with notice of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix or its representative with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix or its representative shall pay for the return of the product to Customer Customer shall be respo
82. coupling Glossary 7 GroupDelay 3 210 H Hamming window 3 192 3 194 3 198 3 211 Hanning window 3 192 3 194 3 199 3 211 hard drive removing and installing 1 11 Hardcopy Glossary 7 Hardcopy formats 3 251 H bars C 11 Help 3 263 for in depth contextual overviews 3 264 how to get 3 16 how to use online help 3 263 on window C 16 to dig deeper 3 265 to enable full text search 3 266 Help menu C 16 about TekScope C 16 contents and index C 16 customer feedback C 16 help on window C 16 restore help C 16 specifications C 16 technical support C 16 Hi Res 3 25 acquisition mode Glossary 7 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 High B 1 Glossary 7 High level C 11 High low method 3 142 Histogram 3 148 limit controls 3 160 mean 3 148 measurements C 12 setup window 3 158 Histogram counting resetting 3 158 starting 3 158 Histograms 3 49 3 157 3 165 Hits in box B 3 C 12 Holdoff C 8 A Trigger 3 74 trigger 3 66 Holdoff trigger Glossary 7 Horiz C 12 Horiz acq run stop C 6 Horiz acq menu acquisition mode C 6 autoset C 5 delay mode on C 6 equivalent time C 6 fast acquisitions C 5 FastFrame controls C 6 FastFrame setup C 6 horizontal acquisition setup C 5 interpolated real time C 6 position scale C 6 real time only C 6 resolution C 6 roll mode auto C 6 sampling modes C 6 zoom controls C 5 zoom setup C 6 Horizontal acquisition window Glossary 7 acquisition win
83. ensure maximum distortion free input to the Overview Prerequisites Use adapter Low frequency compensation Probes instrument and to avoid high frequency amplitude errors use the procedure that follows To compensate passive probes Related control elements and resources 1 Instrument should be powered on Allow a 20 minute warm up See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and Power on the Instrument on page 1 9 2 If your probe is a 1 M Ohm probe without a TCA interface connect it to the instrument using a TCA 1MEG adapter 3 Connect fixture to the instrument see To Connect Probe Calibration Fixture on page 3 162 4 Connect one probe to the fixture 5 Push the AUTOSET button on the instrument 6 Adjust the probe compensation box for best square corner Probe compensated correctly Su p Probe overcompensated a Probe undercompensated 7 Remove the connections CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 163 Measuring Waveforms Overview To compensate passive probes Cont Related control elements and resources For further 8 Touch the Help button to access the online assistance assistance See page 3 263 to learn about using online help 3 164 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Serial Mask Testing The instrument provides a portfolio of masks optional on the TDS7000B Series for verifying compliance to
84. for each channel This lets you align signals to compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of differing length Channel Reference Indicator The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V otherwise it is ground plus offset Control window A group of related controls for a major instrument function that the instrument displays at the right of the screen Coupling The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power or information can be transferred from one to the other You can couple the input signal to the trigger and vertical systems several different ways Cursors Paired markers that you can use to make measurements between two waveform locations The instrument displays the values expressed in volts or time of the position of the active cursor and the distance between the two cursors Cycle area A measurement of waveform area taken over one cycle Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Cycle mean An amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over one cycle Cycle RMS The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 dB Decibel a method of expressing power or voltage
85. from center of screen Auxiliary input 5 V Line 0 V not settable Edge trigger DC coupling for signals having rise and fall times lt 1 ns Trigger Source Accuracy Any channel 2 x setting net offset 0 35 div x volts div setting offset accuracy 10 mV div only Auxiliary Not specified where net offset offset position x volts division Trigger After Time Trigger on n Event Delay time 5 ns to 250 s Event count 1 to 10 250 ps 1ns Edge trigger DC coupling for signals having a slew rate at the trigger point of 0 5 division ns Acquisition mode Error Sample Average 1 waveform interval 200 ps Peak Detect Envelope 2 waveform interval 200 ps 250 ns to 12 s plus random holdoff if enabled Minimum resolution is 8 ns for settings lt 1 2 us A dither of 800 ps is added to the holdoff setting CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 5 Serial Trigger specifications optional on TDS7000B Series Characteristic Serial trigger number of bits Serial trigger encoding types Serial trigger baud rate limits Serial trigger serial word recognizer position accuracy Clock recovery frequency range Clock recovery jitter typical Clock recovery tracking acquisition range typical Minimum signal amplitude needed for clock recovery typical Table A 6 Display specifications Characteristic Display t
86. gate width must be greater than or equal to the period of the start frequency of the span of the spectral analyzer that is there must be at least one cycle of the harmonic being measured within the gate region m Choice of a window Your choice of window function will depend on the input source characteristics which you want to observe and the characteris tics of the window function The window characteristics are shown in Table 3 13 m FFT length The FFT length is controlled so that the gate width in samples is never more than 0 8 of the FFT length Thus zero fill is always in effect This essentially eliminates scallop loss errors in magnitude that would occur without zero fill CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 193 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Table 3 13 Window characteristics Window Rectangular Hamming Hanning Kaiser Bessel Blackman Harris Gaussian Flattop2 Tek Exponential 3 194 pee Ea e 3 dB BW in bins Scallop loss side lobe reference Coefficients 1 3 0 543478 0 456522 1 72 1 02 dB 69 dB 50 0 40243 0 49804 0 09831 0 00122 1 92 0 81 dB 92 dB 50 0 35875 0 48829 0 14128 0 01168 2 0 0 76 dB 79 dB a 3 75 not cosine series 3 8 0 0065 dB 90 dB 50 0 213348 0 206985 0 139512 0 043084 0 003745 1 42 0 60 dB 67 dB na m 3 dB BW in Bins This is the bandwidth of the filter response of the spectral analyzer to a sine wave input for a given
87. graticule The waveforms and graticule are displayed by the graphics adapter outside of normal Windows mechanisms The graphics adapter uses a technique similar to that used by TV weathermen They stand in front of a blank blue screen that is electronically replaced by a weather map The instrument uses a blank dark gray image that is electronical ly replaced by the graticule and the waveforms that are currently being displayed If you load the bitmap into a program such as Paint the graticule and waveforms are not part of the bitmap and although they are visible on Paint s window they will not be saved or printed To capture the instrument screen with its graticule and waveform either use Copy in the Edit menu after selecting Image in the Copy Setup menu or if you want to build a bitmap file select Export in the File menu after selecting Full Screen bitmap in the Select for Export menu For additional information see Exporting and Copying Waveforms on page 3 235 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 253 Data Input Output To Date Time Stamp Hardcopies following steps Overview To date time stamp hardcopies Prerequisites 1 To display the 2 date and time 3 To set the date 4 and time To get the 8 current time 3 254 The instrument must be powered on From the toolbar touch Disp and select the Objects tab Touch Display Date Time to toggle it on From the menu bar
88. high impedance buffer amplifier 500 MHz 1 MQ BNC to TekConnect adapter includes one P6139A probe TekConnect adapter 4 GHz 75 Q to 50 Q adapter with 75 2 BNC input WSTRO WaveStar Software GPIB cable 1 m GPIB cable 2 m RS 232 cable USB Keyboard Centronics cable Replacement hard disk CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Part number P6015A ADA400A CT1 CT6 AM503S P7260 P6150 P6701A B P6703A B AFTDS TDSUBF AMT75 TCA SMA TCA BNC TCA N TCA 1MEG WSTRO 012 0991 01 012 0991 00 012 1298 xx 119 6633 xx 012 1214 xx 650 4271 xx 1 37 Accessories amp Options Table 1 6 Optional accessories Cont Accessory Part number Optical Connector Adapters CSA7404B FC PC 119 5115 00 SC PC 119 5116 00 ST PC 119 4513 00 DIN PC 47256 119 4546 00 Diamond 2 5 119 4556 00 Diamond 3 5 119 4558 00 SMA 2 5 119 4517 00 SMA 119 4557 00 Dust cap optical CSA7404B 200 4104 00 1 Requires TCA BNC TekConnect BNC adapter NOTE The P6339A probe is not supported by this instrument 1 38 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Operational Maps This chapter acquaints you with how the instrument functions and operates It consists of several maps that describe the system its operation and its documen tation Documentation Map on page 2 2 lists the documentation that supports the instrument System Overview Maps on page 2 3 describe the high leve
89. how to set up 3 110 Trigger glitch how to set up 3 83 Trigger runt how to set up 3 85 3 118 Trigger slew rate how to set up 3 89 3 118 Trigger timeout how to set up 3 94 Trigger width how to set up 3 87 3 118 Triggering advanced 3 65 advanced triggering 3 77 comm triggering 3 65 3 117 define inputs 3 98 define logic 3 98 define the clock source and edge 3 100 define the data source 3 100 delayed trigger system 3 68 edge 3 65 glitch trigger 3 78 horizontal position 3 67 logic qualify 3 102 logic trigger definitions 3 80 overview of 3 63 pattern trigger 3 79 posttrigger 3 64 pretrigger 3 64 runt trigger 3 78 select glitch triggering 3 83 select runt triggering 3 85 select setup hold Triggering 3 99 select the polarity 3 85 3 87 select the polarity and width 3 83 select the source 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 94 select timeout triggering 3 94 select transition triggering 3 89 select width triggering 3 87 sequential trigger reset 3 109 sequential triggering 3 103 serial pattern triggering 3 65 3 117 set the data and clock levels 3 100 set the level 3 84 3 88 3 95 set the setup and hold times 3 101 set the thresholds 3 86 set the timer 3 94 set the transition time 3 90 set thresholds 3 98 set to trigger if width 3 84 set to trigger when 3 85 3 88 3 91 3 94 set trigger when 3 99 Setting mode and holdoff 3 93 setup hold trigger
90. length of time it waits for a trigger event depends on the time base setting CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 65 Triggering 3 66 Trigger Holdoff Be aware that auto mode when forcing triggers in the absence of valid triggering events does not synchronize the waveform on the display See the Automatic trigger mode part of Figure 3 22 Successive acquisitions will not be triggered at the same point on the waveform therefore the waveform will appear to roll across the screen Of course if valid triggers occur the display will become stable on screen Triggered waveform Untriggered waveforms Normal trigger mode Automatic trigger mode Figure 3 22 Triggered versus untriggered displays Trigger holdoff can help stabilize triggering When the instrument recognizes a trigger event it disables the trigger system until acquisition is complete In addition the trigger system remains disabled during the holdoff period that follows each acquisition You adjust holdoff to obtain stable triggering when the instrument is triggering on undesired trigger events as shown in Figure 3 23 A digital pulse train is a good example of a complex waveform See Figure 3 23 Each pulse looks like any other so many possible trigger points exist Not all of these will result in the same display The holdoff period allows the instrument to trigger on the correct edge resulting in a stable d
91. m PCross1 mean the vertical mean of the left crossing point at PCross T2 Values The T2 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCross2mean the horizontal mean of the right crossing point at TCross2 m TCross2sigma the horizontal standard deviation of the right crossing point at TCross gt m TCross2p p the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the right crossing point at TCross DCD Values The duty cycle distortion DCD values are horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point at 50 of the eye height These areas are used to establish the DCD p the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at half the height of the eye B 8 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Measurements Annotations Table B 3 describes the annotations for each measurement Table B 3 Supported measurements and their definition Measurements Amplitude measurement annotations Annotation descriptions Amplitude High Low RMS Max Min Pk Pk Cycle RMS Overshoot Overshoot Mean Cycle Mean 2 horizontal bars indicating the amplitude value 1 horizontal bar indicating the high value 1 horizontal bar indicating the low value 1 horizontal bar indicating the RMS value 1 horizontal bar indicating the Max value 1
92. measurement annotations turn measurement Meas1 Meas 2 Meas 3 annotations off or to select the measurement that you want to annotate Meas 4 Meas 5 Meas 6 Meas 7 Meas 8 Masks Commands Table C 9 lists the commands available from the Masks menu optional on TDS7000B Series on the menu bar Table C 9 Masks menu commands Menu Mask Setup Mask Type Source Tolerance Setup Pass Fail Setup Pass Fail Results Mask On Mask Controls Mask Configure Mask Edit Setup Mask Edit Controls Submenu Display AutoSet Autofit Math Commands Function Displays the Mask Setup window that you use to create mask waveforms Displays the Type tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to select the type of mask Displays the Source tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to select the source of mask Displays the Tolerance Setup tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to set up the mask margin tolerance Displays the Pass Fail Setup tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to set up pass fail testing Displays the Pass Fail Results tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to view test results Toggles the mask on or off Displays the Mask control window that you use to control mask pass fail testing and display test results Displays the Mask Configuration setup window that you use to configure the display autoset and autofit features of mask testing Displays the Mask Edit Setup window that you use t
93. or both Vertical cursors measure time or distance on screen horizontal cursors measure voltage or amplitude and waveform and screen cursors measure both Table 3 9 expands on these definitions Table 3 9 Cursor functions types Horizontal cursors measure amplitude volts watts Each cursor ator measures with respect to 151V g m V1 Level Cursor 1 with respect to its source ground level Curs2 Pos Horizontal cursors m V2 Level Cursor 2 with respect to its source ground level m AV Level Cursor 2 Level at Cursor 1 Level is cursor displacement from the source ground times the source volts div Note that the two cursors may have different sources and therefore can have different volts div settings Vertical cursors measure distance time in seconds or bits Each f TREPPE cursor measures with respect to 436 848 m 11 Time Cursor 1 with respect to the trigger point m T2 Time Cursor 2 with respect to the trigger point Vertical cursors m AT Time Cursor 2 Time Cursor 1 Time is divisions of displacement of the cursor from its source trigger point times the source time div Waveform cursors measure both voltage and time Each cursor is i g Curs1 Pos in effect both a vertical and horizontal cursor You can select the style 496 Bus ae of the cursors These waveform cursors cannot be moved off the Lz waveform Curs2 Pos 151 2us Note that Screen cur
94. overview of the online help system Customizing the Display Use the display customizing features this instrument provides to present the display elements color graticule style waveform representation and so on according to your preferences From the Color Palette you can select temperature spectral or gray scale color grading of a waveform so that its data color or intensity reflects the sample density of the data in that area of the waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 131 Displaying Waveforms Using Display Controls Read the following topics they provide the details that can help you set up the the display system so that it displays waveforms and other display elements as you prefer Display Settings Table 3 8 lists display attributes that you can set and where they are accessed Table 3 8 Customizable display elements Display attribute Menu name Graticule Style Display Disp Display Persistence Display Disp Display Style Display Disp Screen Text Display Disp Color Palette Record View and Waveform Data base Disp Reference Colors Display Disp 3 132 Access Options Entry Graticule Style Choose from Full Grid Cross hair and Frame styles Objects Display Persistence Choose from No Persistence Off Infinite Persistence and Variable Persistence Modes Reset the persistence display Set Appearance the Variable Persist
95. patterns and optical signals To select the reference level units touch Units Absolute or Percentage m Absolute Sets the units to absolute values in user units m Percentage Sets the units as a percentage of the High Low range To set the reference levels touch HighRef Mid Ref Low Ref or Mid2 Ref and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the levels CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Referen Type undefined High Ref 90 0 Mid Ret 50 0 Low Ret ea Measuring Waveforms Overview Take a snapshot of measurements For further assistance To take automatic measurements Cont Related control elements and resources 21 22 24 From the Measurement setup control window touch the Snapshot button Comm Snapshot button if the Comm tab is selected to display a window of all single waveform measurements or Comm measurements optional on TDS7000B Series Note Snapshot measurements are taken on the selected waveform The Snapshot window tells you the waveform that the measurements are being taken on and the reference levels used Snapshot measurements are not continuously updated To update snapshot measurements touch the Snapshot Again button To select the type of snapshot measurements touch one of the Snapshot Type buttons Comm Selects snapshots of Comm measurements optional on
96. pk or PBASEpk pk Noise RMS The RMS value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user i Noise RMS PTopsigma or PBAS siama B 4 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 2 Comm measurements and their definition Cont Name Definition le S N Ratio Ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user S N Ratio PTop PBase PTopsigma Or PBaS sigma vay Duty Cycle Distortion The peak to peak time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the MidRef as a percent of the eye period DCD 100 x TDCD TCross2nean TCrosstmean Quality Factor Ratio of eye size to noise Q Quality Factor PTOPmean PBaS mean PTOPsigma PBaS siqma Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements Refer to Figure B 1 and the descriptions that follow to interpret the definitions of waveforms in categories Amplitude Timing and Area Low reference mid reference and high reference are the default reference levels and are adjustable High Min Max High Histogram High reference Mid reference Low reference Low Histogram Low Min Max Figure B 1 Levels used to determine measurements CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 5 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported High The
97. point in the waveform record Sample interval First sampled and digitized point in record Trigger point gt Horizontal delay Record length gt pA Horizontal reference Horizontal position Figure 3 10 The waveform record and its defining parameters As Figure 3 10 shows the instrument acquires points in order from left to right When all the points in the waveform record have been sampled and digitized the waveform record is in acquisition memory and becomes available for display or use in math waveforms storage and so on For a control oriented discussion of the waveform record see Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 20 and Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs Resolution on page 3 21 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Real Time Sampling The two general methods of sampling are real time and equivalent time This instrument uses both real and equivalent time sampling In real time sampling the instrument digitizes all the points it acquires after one trigger event see Figure 3 11 Always use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events een e ea TE aias om EEEN Figure 3 11 Real time sampling Equivalent Time Sampling The instrument uses equivalent time sampling to extend its sample rate beyond its real time maximum sampling rate but only unde
98. position is the zero phase reference point More of the acquired data record length is used to capture the impulse response Exact details of how to compute its values were published in the article Impulse response testing lets a single test do the work of thousands by John Pickerd in EDN magazine April 27 1995 page 95 Amplitude Time 67 dB side lobe Frequency bins Figure 3 62 Tek Exponential window in the time and the frequency domains Effects of trigger jitter The instrument acquisition system has a sample clock that is asynchronous with respect to the input signal This means that from one acquisition to the next samples may be in a different position on the waveform with respect to the trigger Samples may vary in position by up to one sample interval CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 203 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Recognizing Aliasing 3 204 There are only two samples per cycle of a signal that have a frequency equal to one half of the sample rate This is the highest nonaliased signal that can be output from the spectral analyzer Thus at this frequency one sample of acquisition jitter will show up in the spectrum as 180 degree phase variations The phase spectrum is dejittered by using the fractional trigger value of the instrument to correct all phases in the spectrum Therefore phase is accurately measured from DC to the Nyquist frequency m Effects of Avera
99. preview C 2 recall default setup C 1 recall waveform C 1 reference setup C 1 reference waveforms C 1 run application C 14 save waveform C 1 select for export C 2 shutdown C 2 waveform C 2 Filter selection 3 59 Flat panel display cleaning D 2 Flattop2 window 3 192 3 194 3 201 Flexible control access 3 11 FORCE TRIG button 3 76 Frame graticule 3 137 C 9 horizontal menu 3 51 3 53 Frame count horizontal menu 3 51 Frame length horizontal menu 3 50 Frame horizontal menu 3 53 Frequency B 1 C 12 Glossary 6 Frequency domain controls 3 182 Front panel triggering 3 68 Front panel connectors 3 56 Front panel controls INTENSITY 3 46 Full graticule 3 137 C 9 Full screen C 2 C 3 Index 8 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index Fuses 1 9 G Gate controls 3 184 Gated measurements Glossary 6 Gating 3 150 C 12 controls 3 182 Gaussian window 3 192 3 194 3 196 Glitch A Trigger control window 3 83 3 84 either trigger Glossary 6 negative trigger Glossary 6 setup C 8 Glitch trigger 3 78 C 7 Glossary 6 how to set up 3 83 3 102 GPIB 3 255 Glossary 6 configuration C 15 remote communication 3 255 Graticule 3 120 C 2 C 3 Glossary 6 100 zoom C 7 50 50 zoom C 7 80 20 zoom C 7 area 3 120 measurements 3 140 size button 3 122 split 3 129 style 3 132 3 137 C 9 zoom C 7 Graticules 3 122 Grid graticule 3 137 C 9 Ground
100. recall into a channel or a math waveform The instrument recalls each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations Ref1l Ref4 If you want to save a waveform in a useful format for other applications such as a spreadsheet use the export function see Exporting and Copying Waveforms on page 3 235 A few things to remember when saving and recalling setups All Settings are Retained The instrument includes almost all instrument settings with a few exceptions such as user options in the saved setup Retaining Current Settings Recalling a setup replaces the current setup with the recalled setup If you do not want to lose your current setup save it to its own setup file for later recall before you recall a setup Avoiding Setup Waveform Mismatches Saved setups may contain settings inappropriate for waveforms currently in your instrument For example if you save a setup that displays a math waveform that is the inverse of reference 1 when you recall the setup if the reference is empty the math and reference waveforms are not displayed Using Auto Increment Auto increment file name in the Save As and Export dialog boxes enables saving FileName numerous files without entering a file name each time To auto increment file names select Auto increment file name on the dialog box as shown in Figure 3 64 3 222 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Save Instrument Setup As x
101. select Select for Copy Vertical HorizfAcq Trig Display Cursors Meas Undo Last Autoset Copy Ctri C The menu lists all available waveform image and measurement types available for export Clear Data Select for Copy r Copy Setup Full Screen bitmap Graticule bitmap Measurement data m Full Screen to export a bitmap of all screen contents m Graticule to export a bitmap of only the graticule area m Waveform to export waveform data m Measurements to export measurement data Vertical HorizfAcq Trig j Undo Last Autoset Select setup for 3 From the menu bar select Edit and then select Copy copy Setup to display the Copy Setup control window Copy Ctri C Clear Data Select for Copy 3 246 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview Setup to copy images Setup to copy waveforms To save a waveform Cont 4 Select the Images tab to display the Images control window 5 In the Palette window select Color or Black amp White for the color palette of your copied images 6 In the View window select whether you want to copy the Full Screen or Graticules Only 7 Inthe Image window select whether you want to copy using Normal or InkSaver Mode 8 Select the Waveforms tab to display the Waveforms control window CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resourc
102. set the display readout options 3 138 to set the style 3 45 to turn fast acquisitions on and off 3 44 using fast acquisition mode 3 40 using fast acquisitions 3 41 vs normal DSO mode illustrated 3 43 waveform capture rate 3 41 Fast acquisitions C 5 Fast acquisitions mode modes incompatible with 3 41 Fast Fourier transforms description 3 182 FastFrame 3 48 3 142 3 169 controls C 6 FastFrame time stamp illustrated 3 54 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 interactions 3 49 RUN STOP 3 49 select the FastFrame and time stamps selection controls 3 53 select the frame to view 3 51 select the reference frame 3 53 set frame count 3 51 set frame length 3 50 setup C 6 time stamping frames 3 52 to lock the reference position frames 3 54 to set FastFrame mode 3 50 turn readouts on or off time stamps 3 52 using FastFrame acquisitions 3 49 view multiple frames 3 51 FastFrame mode using 3 50 FastFrame setup horizontal menu 3 50 3 54 FFT math waveform automated measurements of 3 205 phase suppression 3 210 procedure for displaying 3 207 procedure for measuring 3 205 3 214 Fiber optics Glossary 6 File formats 3 235 File menu 1 recent setup file C 2 delete all refs C 1 display on off C 1 export C 2 export setup C 2 full screen C 2 graticule C 2 instrument setup C 1 label C 1 measurements C 2 minimize C 2 page setup C 2 position scale C 1 print C 2 print
103. set up and acquire your waveforms Probes and Signal Connection Select the probe or cable that brings the signal into the instrument Choose the probe or cable that best fits your acquisition task whether it is connecting an active probe to test a digital circuit or connecting to a test fixture through SMA cables to characterize a device The connection to the instrument depends on your application Tektronix provides a variety of probes and cables for this product For a list of probes available for use see Accessories and Options on page 1 33 You can also check your Tektronix catalog for connection accessories that may support your application More information about your probes can be found in the user manual for your probes Four acquisition channels are available Each channel can be displayed as a waveform or can contribute waveform data to other waveforms math and reference waveforms for example CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 9 Acquiring Waveforms A Clipped Coupling All instruments and probes specify a maximum signal level See Specifications in your user manuals for exact limits CAUTION Exceeding the maximum limit even momentarily may damage the input channel Use external attenuators if necessary to prevent exceeding the limits Coupling determines whether an input signal is directly connected to the input channel or not connected at all These choices are referred
104. simultaneously They may all be assigned to different gates on the same source waveform or to different channel sources The controls of Math1 and Math2 may be locked and the controls of Math3 and Math4 may be locked that is turning a control on one analyzer changes the control on the other analyzer to the same value Other combinations of locking including all four analyzers are available using GPIB commands The same exclusions for math waveforms apply to spectral math waveforms In addition sources for spectral math waveforms must be channel waveforms Using Spectral Math Read the following topics they provide details that can help you create the Controls spectral waveform that best supports your data analysis tasks The spectral analyzer contains five primary control categories These are shown in Table 3 12 Table 3 12 Spectral analyzer controls Time controls Gate controls Frequency controls Magnitude controls Phase controls Source Position Center dB dBm linear real degrees radians group imaginary delay Duration record length Duration Ref level Zero threshold Duration sample rate Window Resolution bandwidth Ref level offset Phase Unwrap Resolution Using the time controls The operation of the time domain controls for the spectral analyzer is summarized by the following rules m Duration selects the time from the beginning to the end of the acquired waveform You may set duration using the record length control or
105. than the time you set Trigger Levels Sharad If you select Transition Greater Than and the instrument does not trigger it may be because the pulse edge is too fast rather than too slow To check the edge speed switch to edge triggering Then trigger on the pulse edge and determine the time the edge takes to travel between the levels set in the slew rate Thresholds menu The instrument cannot transition trigger on pulse edges that traverse between threshold levels in 600 ps or less Also to reliably transition trigger a pulse must have a width of 8 5 ns or more A pulse of less width may trigger on the wrong slope or not trigger at all Switch to edge triggering and check the pulse width if you can t transition trigger as expected To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger on page 3 102 9 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types eni A gt B Sec Trigger Type Transition Selact Control elements and resources Mode ATransition Acquire Source Transition Time Trigger Transition Chi Y Upper Level e 12 le Lower Level 800 0mV Trigger if Logic Y Pattern See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 3 91 Triggering
106. the data is triggerable and the individual X and Y waveform records are available This mode is particularly useful for studying phase relationships When you set the VERTICAL POSITION and Vertical Offset to center the display in YT mode the XY display is at center screen and each division of display in YT mode produces a division of display in XY mode 27 Jun 03 10 16 WG 20 0mv 2 Wea 10 0mv 2 When you choose the XY format channels are assigned to the axis indicated in Table 3 4 and displayed as part of an XY pair If only one source in an XY pair is displayed the instrument automatically turns on the Figure 3 15 Fast Acquisition XY display other source to complete the XY pair Moreover once XY is on selecting either source in a pair turns the pair on turning either waveform of a pair off removes both sources from the display XY format is a dot only display although it can have persistence The Vector style selection has no effect when you select XY format If in fast acquisition XY or XYZ histograms are allowed In record view XY histograms measurements math cursors zoom and waveform database are not allowed The HORIZONTAL controls still control the timebase sample rate and so forth but the changes are not reflected in the horizontal axis as in YT display format CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 47 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set display format Co
107. the sample rate control m Resolution determines the time between samples Duration is kept constant as resolution is changed Therefore the Resolution control affects both the sample rate and the record length simultaneously m Most often you will want to use a short record length because long record lengths can slow instrument response However long record lengths lower the noise relative to the signal and increase the frequency resolution for the spectral math waveform More important they might be needed to capture the waveform feature you want to include in the waveform Examples of how duration and resolution affect the acquired waveform are shown in Figure 3 47 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 183 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 184 Adjust Duration via lt 7 Dpration 1 ms gt gt Adjust Duration via record length sample rate y 7 I ii T T _ Resolution 0 04ms _ Record length 50 Resolution 0 08 ms _ Record length 25 lt 7 Duration 2 ms _ gt lt Duration 2 ms gt gt Resolution 0 02 ms _ Record length 100 Adjust Resolution Duration remains constant lt Duration 2 ms gt
108. the style Touch the DISP button and select the Appearance tab g Select between Vectors Dots or Inten Samp display styles Dots is the default setting when in Equivalent Time ET acquisition mode Vectors is the default when not in ET acquisition mode 6 Select between Off Variable and Infinite Display Persistence Off is the factory default setting Inten Samp Variable persistence is explained on page 3 134 No Persistence erases the display each time a new waveform array is displayed If your instrument supports mask testing Mask Autofit can affect persistence When enabled Autofit moves the waveform vertically and horizontally to reduce the number of hits within a given mask If infinite or variable persistence is enabled the movements will clear any persisted data If Autofit makes frequent adjustments there can be very little or even no persisted data displayed 7 If you select Variable touch Persist Time and adjust the persistence time decay rate CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual k leteci Hi Res On EZ Wr mOB Acquisition Mode a Sample E Average EnS Ean Ezd Control elements and resources FastAcq Trig Display Cursors Horizontal Acquisition Setup N Zoom Controls Autoset Undo Last Autoset Fast Acquisitions m Fast Acquisitions Roll Mode Horizontal Acquisition gt Fast Acquisitions rt k Dete
109. the Extended Diagnostics on page 1 32 provides instructions for performing internal self calibration and the extended diagnostics If the instrument fails any test within this section it may need service To contact Tektronix for service see Contacting Tektronix on the back of the title page Make sure you have put the instrument into service as detailed in Installation starting on page 1 5 Then assemble the following test equipment and proceed with the procedures that follow Self tests do not require any test equipment The functional tests require the following test equipment m One BNC cable such as Tektronix part number 012 0076 xx m One 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch formatted disk to check the file system m A P7240 probe P7260 probe with TDS7704B m A probe calibration and deskew fixture Tektronix part number 067 0405 xx 067 0848 xx for TDS7704B m One TCA BNC TekConnect adapter or one TCA SMA TekConnect adapter and one SMA male to BNC female adapter such as Tektronix part number 015 1018 xx CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 21 Incoming Inspection Self Tests This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument functions and was adjusted properly No test equipment or hookups are required Equipment None required Power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure Prerequisites 1 Verify that internal diagnostics pass Do the followi
110. the Kaiser Bessel window illustration 3 200 time and frequency graphs of the Blackman Harris window illustration 3 201 time and frequency graphs of the Hamming window 3 198 time domain controls 3 182 to define a spectral math waveform 3 207 to select a predefined spectral math Waveform 3 206 to take automated measurements of a spectral math waveform 3 205 to take cursor measurements of a spectral math waveform 3 205 unwrap phase 3 210 using spectral math controls 3 183 using the frequency domain controls 3 185 using the gate controls 3 184 using the magnitude controls 3 188 using the phase controls 3 190 using the time controls 3 183 using windows to filter 3 192 window characteristics 3 192 3 194 window functions 3 182 windowing the time domain record illustrated 3 193 zero phase reference 3 194 3 195 Spectral math waveform aliasing 3 204 phase suppression 3 190 undersampling 3 204 zero phase reference 3 195 Spectral math waveforms See Spectral Math Split cursors 3 151 Spreadsheet file format 3 236 Standard accessories 1 35 Standard deviation 3 146 C 12 Start histogram counting 3 158 State main trigger menu 3 98 3 99 State trigger 3 80 3 98 how to set up 3 98 Statistical measurement Glossary 15 Statistics 3 146 C 12 controls C 12 on measurement results 3 141 Index 18 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index Status calibration 3 161 Stddev
111. the M o thresholds channel threshold and use the multipurpose knobs Pattern Type ala a i Presets keypad or threshold presets to set each threshold Ea Fa Input Threshold ue Chi Ch2 Ch3 ch4 HW xv xv xv To define the 6 To choose the logic pattern type you want applied to the logic input channels touch an available type from the Pattern Type window See Table 3 5 on page 3 80 for definitions of the logic functions for both pattern and state triggers To set trigger To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met uae RA Logic Pattern Trigger Pattern when goes TRUE or when the logic condition is not met Patter Te Threshold A Dae goes FALSE touch Trigger When Pattern and select Ea Ea ee More Than False Less Than More Than or True from the list Input Threshold The list items More Than and Less Than are used to time qualify a pattern trigger See the procedure To define a time qualified pattern trigger that follows for instructions WE BS A ee user 3 96 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To set mode and holdoff To define a time qualified pattern trigger CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Trigger on a pattern Cont Control elements and resources 8 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the trigger mo
112. the limit In most cases you will enter positive values for both setup and hold time Positive values set the instrument to trigger if the data source is still settling inside the setup time before the clock or if it switches inside the hold time after the clock You can skew this setup hold violation zone that the setup and hold times form by entering negative values See Figure 3 26 on page 3 82 10 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger on page 3 102 11 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types Control elements and resources Data Source ne Ck Data Level EAr ker ci Ta Hold Time Ons 4 Clock Source che Y Clock Edge Setup Time 8 0ns Is Hold Time Trigger if Logic Y Pattern See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 3 101 Triggering The instrument recognizes the violation and triggers at the clock edge Data Ch1 transition occurs within 6 59 ns before the clock violating the hold time limit HS 500mV 2 Dely 6 592ns Wea Tl 8 0rs Maa s5nomv_ O 2 2 0rs Cursors measure the setup hold at oors l At 100 OMH2 J violation zone which equals Boob E DE EE EL E EAEL BALS AASL SLA GE AA DA
113. the main trigger system operates Confirm that the following statements are true m The trigger level readout for the A main trigger system changes with the trigger LEVEL knob m The trigger LEVEL knob can trigger and untrigger the square wave signal as you rotate it Leave the signal untriggered m Pushing the front panel trigger LEVEL knob sets the trigger level to the 50 amplitude point of the signal and triggers the signal that you just left untriggered Leave the signal triggered 7 Verify that the delayed trigger system operates a Set up the delayed trigger m From the Trig menu select A B Sequence This displays the A gt B Sequence tab of the trigger setup control window m Touch the Trig After Time button under A Then B m Touch the B Trig Level control in the control window b Confirm that the following statements are true m The trigger level readout for the B trigger system changes as you turn the lower multipurpose knob m As you rotate the lower multipurpose knob the square wave probe compensation signal can become triggered and untriggered Leave the signal triggered CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 29 Incoming Inspection c Verify the delayed trigger counter Touch the TRIGGER MODE button to set the mode to NORM m Double touch the Trig Delay control to pop up a numeric keypad for that control Touch the keypad to enter a trigger delay time of 1 seco
114. the waveform area contained in the Zoom graticule Off Turns off measurement gating Turning V Bar cursors off will not turn gating off You must turn gating off in the Measurement Gating control window or the Zoom drop down list Statistics neo Annotation LECCARE Gate G1 Gate G2 Tok Run Seale 4 07 Jul 03 16 03 26 Curst Pos 190 808 Curs2 Pos 151245 Measurement Pr EE ee NA eee EENETI EEEE CNES CEES ERSEN N hye Track Mode J i dep racking ean es Setup Close i s00mv BRE Frog 11 9tkHz 211 9505 IB 11 156 aus 40 0us aiv B Amp 20v jE1 98106 12 151 2us 1 25MSis_ 800ns pt EA F 21v 20981 M 268 DE 40 0mv Er 59 8rs p641 956 um 3 3 Position Wea PPK 208v Wem Emy o MEAT ECO0mV 20 0ps 11 9kHz 4 1 1 9539 20V 51 98275 2 09433 s3 ns ji640 133 07 Jul 03 18 06 06 52 2 Factor Seup Cissa CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Taking Cursor Measurements Because cursor measurements give immediate feedback of the amplitude or time values they measure they are usually quick to take and are more accurate than graticule measurements Since you position cursors wherever you want them on the waveform they are easier to localize to a waveform segment or feature than automatic measurements You can measure time or amplitude
115. then select Export Setup to display the Export Setup control window Prompt for filename a before exporti m Touch Set Print button to Export 22 The Export window lists all available waveforms allows for browsing to the destination directory naming the file Eai and selecting the file format Seve in O Images Ea Ses Fay File name 040427 _o64902 tw Save Save as type image files omp i e Auto incrementtile name Export Setup Help Select a 23 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons to navigate destination to the directory in which you want to save the file Save in D Images e a Ey 3 242 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Name the file 24 Select the file type in the Save as type drop down list to Edit path and file name force the file listing to only include these types Use dat for waveforms File name 32 Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily Sa see any other types of files in the current directory rine Sree eke Otherwise leave it as set by the Export Setup control er window Access to virtual keyboard 25 Specify the filename in which to save your waveform You can m Use the default name and directory appearing in the File name field m Rename the file by typing a new name into the File name field
116. then touch the HELP button Je je je QQ 939 R B Be tJ Select the 3 Push a channel button CH 1 CH 4 to select the N 7 VERTICAL input signal signal channel POSITION cH1 POS TION CH2 POSITION CH3 POSITION channel A channel button lights when its channel is on Q w w S lt lt lt SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE 3 12 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview Select input coupling Set vertical acquisition window To set up signal input Cont 4 g Touch Vert to display the Vertical control window To change the input coupling select the channel tab and then select from DC to couple both the AC and DC components of an input signal GND to disconnect the input signal from the acquisition Touch Close to close the window Note CSA7000B Series If the O E Electrical Out to CH1 adapter is installed the Termination Coupling and Bandwidth selections are replaced with Wavelength and Dark Level selections Use the vertical knobs to scale and position the waveform on screen Positioned vertically Scaled vertically HY F Touch Vert to display the Vertical control window To change the offset touch the Offset control and turn the multipurpose knob to ad
117. to as DC coupling and GND coupling The input resistance of each input channel is 50 Q To properly terminate signals in other impedance environments use an adapter All probes expect a specific coupling and input termination Both coupling and input termination resistance are displayed on screen Scaling and Positioning These key controls determine the portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system m Set vertical scaling positioning and DC offsets to display the features of interest on your waveform and avoid clipping See Note that follows Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 18 describes the vertical acquisition window H Acquired waveform Displayed waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m Set horizontal scale position and resolution record length so that the acquired waveform record includes the waveform attributes of interest with good sampling density on the waveform The settings that you make define the horizontal acquisition window see Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 20 NOTE Waveform data outside the vertical acquisition window is clipped that is the data is limited to the minimum or maximum boundaries of the vertical acquisition window This limiting causes inaccuracies i
118. to points of interest along the horizontal axis of the waveform 33 Read the frequency difference between the cursors from the A readout Read the frequency of each cursor relative to the zero frequency point from the cursors readout For further 34 Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access assistance context sensitive help on math waveforms See Accessing Online Help on page 3 263 for an overview of the online help system 3 214 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Spectral Math Example The following procedure is an example of setting up the instrument to perform spectral analysis of a signal This example uses the probe compensation signal available on the front panel of the instrument Overview Spectral math example Control elements and resources Install the test 1 Connect the probe compensation signal to CH 1 through hookup a suitable cable and adapter O 00 00000 0 mo0e o ow ono cow g Press DEFAULT SETUP 3 Press AUTOSET Display the 4 From the toolbar touch Vert and select the waveform Chan 1 tab 5 Touch Offset and using the multipurpose knobs or Sen s keypad set the offset to 260 mV and the Ch1 Scale to a rn 200 mV Offset CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 215 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Spectral math example cont Control eleme
119. used to calculate measurements B 6 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported PTop TCross TCrosso ge PCrosso PBase ye Aperture Figure B 2 Eye diagram and optical values P Values The P values include the mean and standard deviation of the vertical location of PTop and PBase These areas are used with a specified sample size to statisti cally measure the following values m PTopmean the mean value of PTop m PToPsigma the standard deviation of PTop m PToppk pk The vertical peak to peak deviation of PTop m PBasemean the mean value of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasegioma the standard deviation of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasepk pk the vertical peak to peak deviation of PBase The Eye Aperture defaults to the center 20 of the interval from TCross to TCrossp CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 7 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Ti Values The T1 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the leftmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCrossl mean the horizontal mean of the left crossing point at TCross m TCross1 jgma the horizontal standard deviation of the left crossing point at TCross1 m TCross1 p the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at TCross1
120. using GND coupling DC 50 Q and GND 50 Q 2 5 at 25 C 77 F 0 2 over 0 to 50 C 122 F CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp 1 5 for fin lt 1 GHz TDS7154B TDS7704B 1 7 for fin lt 2 5 GHz 2 0 for fin lt 4 GHz lt 100 mV div 100 mV div 1 5 for fin lt 2 GHz 1 1 for fin lt 2 GHz 2 for fin lt 3 GHz 1 2 for fin lt 3 GHz 2 5 for fin lt 6 GHz 1 3 for fin lt 6 GHz CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 5 Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Maximum input voltage CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B TDS7704B Number of digitized bits Sensitivity range DC gain accuracy TDS7704B A 6 Description lt 1 Vams for lt 100 mV division settings and lt 5 Vams for 100 mV settings lt 6 5 Vams for 100 mV settings for temperatrues lt 45 C lt 6 0 Vams for 100 mV settings for temperatrues gt 45 C 8 bits Fine adjustment available with 1 resolution 2 mV div to 1 V division in a 1 2 5 sequence Net offset is the nominal voltage that must be applied to the channel to bring the trace to center screen Net offset offset position x volts division and is expressed in volts 2 mV div to 3 98 mV div 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 1 V div 3 6 x net offset 1V 2 5 2 x net offset 1V 2 5 2 x net offset 10V CSA7000B Serie
121. usually adjusts the bandwidth of the analyzer filters without affecting the span and center frequency 3 186 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms i r a a a A A E iy ma al gt GE OE Y Y ETN f 7 i YN i f H _ F f S ae w E LA L l i a rf f E TE va a Y Koa NG Ya N E y ra ea Me Pa fy f Fe j y ie Nes P l ii Via E YN AAA aA nanninannan aAA AAAA al liea naaar at ia ee eee NW nwa ii N WAN EET SEN E EOE E E E bk ie od oR nee Ne eg ae Nee Center frequency is 1 0 and span is 0 5 Gate width 200 m Increase the center frequency Decrease the center frequency lt Set center frequency back to 1 and decrease the Span Decrease the Span again m Increase resolution by reducing Resolution BW increasing the gate length Increase resolution again by reducing the Resolution BW doubling the gate length Start E Center frequency Stop Span Figure 3 49 Effects of frequency domain control adjustments CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 187 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Using the magnitude controls Vertical units can be either linear or logarithmic You can select these choices by touching the Math menu button Then touch t
122. vertical arrow indicating the time of the Max 1 horizontal bar indicating the Min value 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Min 2 horizontal bars indicating the Max and Min 2 vertical arrows indicating the time of the Max and Min 3 horizontal bars indicating the High the Low and the RMS value 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the cycle time 3 horizontal bars indicating the Max High and the Low 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Max 3 horizontal bars indicating the High Low land the Min 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Min 1 horizontal bar indicating the Mean value 3 horizontal bars indicating the High Low and the Cycle Mean 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the cycle time CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 9 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 3 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Time These annotations are not visible when the reference level units are absolute instead of a percentage measurement annotations Rise Time Fall Time Duty Cyc Duty Cyc Pos Width Neg Width Period Freq Delay More Area measurement Cyc Area annotations Phase Burst Wid 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the high and low ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars i
123. want to use typically your instrument controller Follow the directions in the CD booklet You can install the guide in the instrument but that may not be convenient because it will cover the instrument screen For information on connecting the instrument to a network to enable printing file sharing internet access and other communications functions see Connect ing to a Network on page 1 16 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 255 Data Input Output 3 256 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual MyScope Creating MyScope Control Windows Overview Select from menu MyScope allows you to create custom control windows that include only the controls that you use regularly Instead of switching between several control windows you can put the controls that you use into a custom control window To create a new MyScope control window Select MyScope gt New Control Window Click to expand a category Controls that can be added to your MyScope control window are contained within each category The categories match the menu bar to aid you in finding the controls you normally use CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual This section contains procedures for creating MyScope control windows Detailed information is available in the online help Control elements and resources so Math MyScope Utilities Help Current New Contro
124. waveform Offset Position and Scale The settings that you make for offset scale and position affect the math waveform that you obtain Note the following tips for obtaining a good display m You should scale and position the source waveform so that it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped resulting in errors in the derivative waveform m You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your derivative waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so it is clipped Waveform Integration The Math capabilities of the instrument include waveform integration This allows you to display an integral math waveform that is an integrated version of the acquired waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 173 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Integral waveforms find use in the following applications m Measuring power and energy such as in switching power supplies m Characterizing mechanical transducers as when integrating the output of an accelerometer to obtain velocity The integral math waveform derived from the sampled waveform is computed based on the following equation n y n scale 2 O Dy i 1 Where x i is the source waveform y n is a point in the integral math waveform scale is the output scale factor T is the time between samples Since the resulta
125. window function It is given in units of bins A bin is the interval between spectral samples when the interpolation ratio due to FFT zero fill is one The bandwidth is measured between the points on the lobe that are 3 dB down from the peak of the lobe The bandwidth in Hz may be computed by dividing the BW in bins by the gate duration in seconds This is also referred to as resolution bandwidth RBW m Coherent gain The gain factor normally associated with different window functions is correctly scaled into the magnitude spectrum output Therefore the magnitudes in the output spectrum do not change as different windows are selected m Scallop Loss This is the magnitude error of an FFT when the frequency of the observed signal is exactly half way between two frequency samples of the spectrum when the interpolation ratio due to zero fill of the FFT is one The spectral analyzer FFT length is controlled so that zero fill is always in effect This essentially eliminates scallop loss because zero fill in the time domain causes interpolation in the frequency domain This results in accurate magnitude measurements for all window functions CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Frequency bins Figure 3 54 Example of scallop loss for a Hanning window without zero fill m Nearest Side Lobe This is the difference in magnitude between the spectral lobe peak in the spectrum and the
126. your instrument may become available at our web site See Contacting Tektronix on the back of the title page Tektronix may offer software upgrade kits for the instrument Contact your Tektronix service representative for more information see Contacting Tektronix on the back of the title page CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 3 Product Description 1 4 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation This chapter covers installation of the instrument addressing the following topics Unpacking Unpacking on page 1 5 Checking the Environment Requirements on page 1 6 Connecting Peripherals on page 1 7 Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 Shutting Down the Instrument on page 1 10 Backing Up User Files on page 1 11 Installing Software on page 1 13 Enabling or Disabling Your LAN and Connecting to a Network on page 1 16 Setting up a Dual Display on page 1 17 Verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument The graphical packing list shows the standard accessories that you should find in the shipping carton probes depend on the option you ordered You should also verify that you have The correct power cord for your geographical area CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 5 Installation m The compact discs that include copies of the software installed on the instrument and additional support software that may
127. 0 mW peak at the wavelength with the highest relative responsivity Maximum nonsaturating linear response to transient The transient optical signal response is linear 6 for lt 170 uW average input typical input 340 uW p at 850 nm lt 120 uW average input 240 uW p at 1310 and 1550 nm Output zero Dark level 1 6 uW 0 1 division x W div from 10 uW to 50 uW per division vertical scale setting Maximum noise output rms CSA7404B 1310 nm and 1550 nm 1 1 uW 6 5 of W div setting 850 nm lt 2 1 uW 6 5 of W div setting 780 nm 2 6 uW 6 5 of W div setting O E converter alone lt 0 85 uW CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 23 Appendix A Specifications Table A 8 OJE converter CSA7000B Series only Cont Characteristic Optical return loss typical Peak to peak aberrations in response to falling edge typical Maximum falling edge 10 to 2 settling time ORR disabled typical Smallest average power for mask test sensitivity typical Optical scale factor range Description With 50 um or 62 5 um core multimode fiber CPC6 gt 14 dB for 780 nm 20 nm gt 14 dB for 850 nm 20 nm With 9 um core singlemode fiber SMF 28 gt 28 dB for 1310 nm 20 nm gt 28 dB for 1550 nm 20 nm The return loss includes optical reflection contributions from the device under test s SC SPC connector interface with the user s PC style connector as well as all other o
128. 0 points CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Maximum number of frames Standard 648 5872 Option 2M 2660 24088 Option 3M 5321 48192 Option 4M 5321 48192 Option 5M 10644 96408 Standard 580 3560 Option 2M 2381 14632 Option 3M 4765 29272 Option 4M 4765 29272 Option 5M 9531 58552 Standard 163 720 Option 2M 669 2968 Option 3M 1339 5936 Option 4M 1339 5936 Option 5M 2679 11880 Standard 19 80 Option 2M 81 328 Option 3M 163 656 Option 4M 163 656 Option 5M 327 1320 Standard 2 8 Option 2M 8 32 Option 3M 16 64 Option 4M 16 64 Option 5M 32 128 A 13 Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Cont Characteristic Update rate maximum Internal time base reference frequency Long term sample rate and delay time accuracy Aperture uncertainty typical Time base delay time range Delta time measurement accuracy Description Fast Acquisition on 400 000 waveforms per second Fast Acquisition off 60 waveforms per second 10 MHz 2 5 ppm over any 100 ms interval Aging lt 1 ppm per year 2 5 ppm over any 100 ms interval Aging lt 1 ppm per year Short term lt 2 ps rms records having duration lt 100 ms lt 800 fs rms records having duration lt 10 us Long term lt 15 parts per trillion rms records having duration lt 1 minute 5 ns to 250 s For a single channel with signal amplitu
129. 000 000 000 000 Trigger time of the reference frame Time difference between the reference and selected frames se OC iem iaae na aanne ann Ka zon 400usidiv 125kS s 8 Ops pl BE 40 0mv lt lt Nai Figure 3 17 FastFrame time stamp 3 54 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms O E Converter A Connecting Optical Signals Attenuating Optical Signals CSA7000B Series The O E converter converts the optical signal to an electrical signal for use in the instrument Figure 3 18 on page 3 56 shows the input and output connectors This section describes the front panel connecting to the circuit under test how to select the optical wavelength and explains optical bandwidth CAUTION To avoid damaging your instrument replace the protective cap on the input connector when the Optical Input is not in use To prevent loss of optical power or damage to the optical connectors keep the connectors clean at all times Also ensure that all connectors and jumpers attached to the inputs are clean prior to insertion See Cleaning Optical Connectors on page 3 57 Take care to preserve the integrity of optical connectors by keeping them free of contamination For cleaning information see Cleaning Optical Connectors on page 3 57 The instrument can couple to multimode fibers with a core diameter of 62 5 50 um or singlemode fiber with a core di
130. 000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual SEE E Product Description Models Key Features This chapter describes the CSA7000B Series Communications Signal Analyzers and the TDS7000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes and their options Following this description are three sections m Installation shows you how to configure and install the instrument as well as how to reinstall the system software included with the product m Incoming Inspection provides a procedure for verifying basic operation and functionality m Accessories amp Options lists the standard and optional accessories for this product This manual supports the following instruments m CSA7404B Communications Signal Analyzer m TDS7704B Digital Phosphor Oscilloscope m TDS7404B Digital Phosphor Oscilloscope m TDS7254B Digital Phosphor Oscilloscope m TDS7154B Digital Phosphor Oscilloscope Differences between the instruments will be called out when necessary Otherwise the material applies to all instruments The word instrument refers to all products CSA7000B Series and TDS7000B Series instruments are high performance solutions for verifying debugging and characterizing sophisticated electronic designs The series features exceptional signal acquisition performance operational simplicity and open connectivity to the design environment Classic analog style controls a large touch sensitive display and graphical menus provide intui
131. 00B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Horizontal Vertical Position 40mdivs Position soaay Factor gt Dd Horizontal Position Horizontal Position 50 0 Factor Position Factor Zoom Vertical Position O 0divs Factor 10 Vertical Position O 0divs Factor 10 Position Factor Displaying Waveforms Overview To zoom waveforms Cont Control elements and resources To Lock and 12 To display the zoom Lock and Scroll setup window Automatically touch Setup in the controls window Select the Lock and Scroll Zoom Scroll tab n aS TET Areas 43 To select which zoom areas to lock touch Zoom 1 AutoScio Zoom 2 Zoom 3 or Zoom 4 to toggle the areas you E a 0 ngg want to lock on check mark Zoom E 14 To lock control of the zoom areas selected in the Zoom 3 previous step touch Lock to toggle it on Scroll Speed Zoom 4 E 1 15 To control the automatic scrolling of the selected zoom areas touch an AutoScroll control Forward Fast forward Reverse Fast reverse Tamau Stop 16 To change the scrolling speed touch Scroll Speed and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to change the scrolling speed For further 17 Touch the Help button while in the Zoom setup window assistance to access a context sensitive overview of the MultiView oe Zoom controls and their setup a See Accessing Online Help on page 3 263 for an
132. 04B only 5 GHz TDS7704B only 6 GHz TDS7704B only 7 GHz TDS7704B only Effective bits 6 0 bits 5 7 bits 5 5 bits 5 3 bits 5 2 bits 5 1 bits 4 9 bits 4 5 bits 3 5 bits 3 0 bits lt 30 ps between any two channels with the same scale and coupling settings 215 1 at rated bandwidth CSA7404B TDS7704B TDS7404B amp TDS7254B only and 80 1 at lt 1 5 GHz or the rated bandwidth whichever is less Assumes two channels with the same scale settings 1 Rise time calculation A simple formula relating these times to bandwidth for all instruments is not available The instruments have been characterized with the typical rise times listed Table A 3 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Characteristic Real time sample rate range Description Number of channels acquired CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Sample rate range 5 S s to 20GS s 5 S s to 10GS s 5 S s to 5GS s Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Cont Characteristic Equivalent time sample rate or interpolated waveform rate range Acquisition modes Minimum record length Maximum record length sample mode Standard Option 2M installed Option 3M installed Option 4M installed Option 5M installed Description Equivalent time acquisition can be enabled or disabled When disabled waveforms are interpolated at the fastest time
133. 0V x reading 0 16 division x V division setting 100 mV div to 1 V div Net offset is the nominal voltage that must be applied to the channel to bring the trace to center screen Net offset offset position x volts division and is expressed in volts lt 1 digitization level DL differential lt 2 DL integral independently based DC 50 coupling Full bandwidth TCA SMA or TCA N adapter operating ambient 15 C 0 C for TDS7154B and TDS7254B to 50 C 59 F to 122 F derated by 30 MHz C below 15 C 59 F SCALE range Bandwidth 2 mV div to 3 9 mV div DC to 1 GHz 4 mV div to 9 9 mV div DC to 1 25 GHz 10 mV div TDS7704B DC to 7 GHz DC to 7 25 GHz typical CSA7404B amp TDS7404B DC to 4 GHz TDS7254B DC to 2 5 GHz TDS7154B DC to 1 5 GHz DC 50 Q coupling Full bandwidth operating ambient 15 C to 30 C 59 F to 86 F derated by 20 MHz C above 30 C 86 F SCALE range Bandwidth 2 mV div to 3 9 mV div DC to 1 GHz 4 mV div to 9 9 mV div DC to 1 25 GHz 10 mV div DC to 4 GHz CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Analog bandwidth with P7330 active probe typical CSA7404B and TDS7404B Analog bandwidth with P7260 active probe or TCA BNC adapter typical TDS7704B Calculated rise time typical TDS7704B CSA7404B amp
134. 1 5 GHz high speed active probe P6245 P6248 1 5 GHz differential probe P6248 P7240 active 4 GHz probe P7240 P7260 active 6 GHz probe TDS7704B P7260 P7330 differential 3 5 GHz probe P7330 P7350 differential 5 GHz probe P7350 P7380SMA gt 8 GHz Differential acquisition system with SMA Inputs P7380SMA P6139A 500 MHz passive 10x probe P6139A P6243 1 GHz high speed active probe P6243 P6246 400 MHz differential probe P6246 P6247 1 GHz differential probe P6247 P6249 4 GHz differential probe P6249 P6330 differential 3 GHz probe P6330 TCP202 DC to 50 MHz current probe TCP202 P5205 high voltage differential probe P5205 P5210 high voltage differential probe P5210 1 36 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Accessories amp Options Table 1 6 Optional accessories Cont Accessory P6015A high voltage probe ADA4O0A differential preamplifier CT1 1 GHz current probe CT6 2 GHz current probe AM503S DC AC current measurement system P7260 6 GHz 5X 25X active probe P6150 9 GHz 3 GHz low capacitance divider probe P6701B optical electrical converter 500 to 950 nm P6703B optical electrical converter 1100 to 1650 nm AFTDS Telecomm differential electrical interface adapter for line rates lt 8 Mb s requires TCA BNC adapter TDSUSBF USB test fixture used with Option USB AMT75 1 GHz 75 Q ohm adapter TekConnect to SMA adapter TekConnect to BNC adapter TekConnect to N adapter TekConnect
135. 12 mean 2 stddev C 12 mean 3 stddev C 12 measurement setup C 11 median C 12 minimum C 11 C 12 more C 12 neg duty cycle C 12 neg overshoot C 11 negative width C 12 noise pk pk C 12 noise RMS C 12 off C 12 peak hits C 12 peak to peak C 11 C 12 period C 12 phase C 12 pos duty cycle C 12 pos overshoot C 11 positive width C 12 reference levels C 12 reset histograms C 12 reset statistics C 12 rise time C 12 RMS C 11 s n ratio C 12 Index 12 snapshot C 11 standard deviation C 12 statistics C 12 statistics controls C 12 time C 12 value count C 12 value mean C 12 Vert C 12 waveform histograms C 12 Measurement C 3 Glossary 9 amplitude B 1 Glossary 1 annotation 3 146 area B 1 Glossary 2 burst width B 1 Glossary 2 crossing B 4 cycle area B 1 Glossary 3 cycle mean B 1 Glossary 3 cycle RMS B 1 Glossary 3 delay Glossary 4 duty cycle Glossary 10 Glossary 12 duty cycle distortion B 5 extinction ratio B 4 extinction ratio B 4 extinction ratio dB B 4 eye base B 4 eye height B 4 eye top B 4 eye width B 4 fall time B 1 frequency B 1 Glossary 6 gated Glossary 6 high B 1 Glossary 7 hits in box B 3 jitter 6 sigma B 4 jitter pk pk B 4 jitter RMS B 4 low B 2 Glossary 9 maximum B 2 Glossary 9 mean B 2 B 3 Glossary 9 mean 1 stddev B 3 mean 2 stddev B 3 mean 3 stddev B 3 median B 3 minimum B 2 Glo
136. 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 amplitude modulated with a 1 kHz sinewave IEC 1000 4 11 AC Mains Voltage Dips and Interruption Immunity 100 reduction for one cycle EN 61000 3 2 Power Harmonic Current Emissions EN 61000 3 3 Voltage Changes Fluctuations and Flicker 1 4 If interconnect cables are used they must be low EMI shielded cables such as the following Tektronix part numbers or their equivalents 012 0991 00 012 0991 01 012 0991 02 or 012 0991 03 GPIB Cable 012 1213 00 or CA part number 0294 9 RS 232 Cable 012 1214 00 Centronics Cable or LCOM part number CTL3VGAMM 5 VGA Cable Under these conditions the specifications are amended as follows 10 mV division to 1 V division lt 0 4 division waveform displacement or lt 0 8 division increase in peak to peak noise 5 mV division and 2 mV division typical lt 8 mV increase in peak to peak noise Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrument is connected to a test object Tested in accordance with EN 61326 Annex D Complies with EMC provision of Radiocommunications Act per the following standard s AS NZS 2064 1 2 Industrial Scientific and Medical Equipment 1992 Class A CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 13 Certifications and compliances Cont Category EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing Can
137. 2 Mouse 3 123 Multimode cable Glossary 10 Multipurpose knob Glossary 10 Multipurpose knobs 3 154 C 15 MultiView zoom 3 125 3 138 See also Zoom feature 3 125 MyScope using 3 260 MyScope control window 3 257 NAND Glossary 10 NAND A Trigger control window 3 96 3 98 3 103 Neg duty cycle C 12 Neg overshoot C 11 Negative duty cycle B 2 Negative overshoot B 2 Negative width B 2 C 12 Negative A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 Net offset A 6 A 7 Network connection 1 16 No persistence C 9 Noise pk pk C 12 pk pk measurement B 4 reducing in phase FFTs 3 210 reducing in phase waveforms 3 190 RMS B 4 C 12 NOR Glossary 11 NOR A Trigger control window 3 96 3 98 3 103 Normal trigger mode 3 65 3 71 Glossary 11 Normal display C 10 Numeric file format 3 235 Nyquist frequency 3 204 0 O E electrical out to Ch1 input adapter 3 57 O E converter 3 55 O E to SMA adapter 3 57 Objects display C 9 Off C 12 Offset C 4 DC See DC Offset vertical 3 18 3 173 3 174 Online help 3 263 Operating requirements 1 7 Optical dark compensation 3 58 input connector 3 56 O E electrical out to Ch1 input adapter 3 57 O E to SMA adapter 3 57 wavelength gain compensation 3 58 Optical to electrical converter Glossary 11 Option installation 1 15 C 15 Option key 1 15 Option software 1 15 Optional accessories 1 36 Options key C 16 Options list C 16 OR Glossary 11 OR A Tr
138. 2 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 8 O E converter CSA7000B Series only Characteristic Description Optical input connector Rifocs universal connector O E wavelength range 700 nm to 1650 nm OIE gain 0 27 V mW 0 35 V mW typical at 780 nm 20 nm 0 33 V mW 0 40 V mW typical at 850 nm 20 nm 0 64 V mW 0 75 V mW typical at 1310 nm 20 nm 0 64 V mW 0 75 V mW typical at 1550 nm 20 nm Applies to graded index multimode fiber with core diameter 62 5 um or smaller at the input and O E Electrical to CH1 Input adapter Optical Channel DC measurement accuracy typical 2 2 x net offset 1 mW x reading Position x W div Offset 0 35 x Net Offset 3 uW 0 18 div x W div only between 10 uW div and 50 uW div inclusive Average of 16 waveforms The delta between any two averages of 16 waveforms acquired under the same setup and ambient conditions 2 2 x net offset 1 mW x reading 0 16 div x W div Excludes normal variations due to fiber connection to the front of the instrument Optical Channel Bandwidth includes O E 5 C to 25 C O E to TekConnect adaptor and instrument 9A GHz DC conversion gain linearity lt 4 mV div 4 5 6 x net offset 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 4 2 x net offset 100 mV div to 1 0 V div 4 2 x net offset 10 Absolute maximum nondestructive optical input 5 mW average 1
139. 3 POSITION A 2 A pan zZ zZ zZ zZ SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE c HORIZONTAL 3 POSITION RESOLUTION a MORE SAMPLES lt SCALE gt ey LEVEL PUSH TO SET 50 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To display waveforms in the main graticule Cont Related control elements and resources Adjust the 6 To adjust the point around which the waveforms Horizontal reference horizontal expand and contract touch the Horizontal Reference NX and drag it left or right on screen reference g g oo Move the Horizontal Reference along the horizontal axis until it aligns to the point on the waveform that you want to be stationary on screen Note If Delay is off Horizontal Reference is the same as Horizontal Position 7 Release the Horizontal Reference and then adjust the Horizontal Scale Quick adjust To quickly rescale a portion of a channel waveform so the timebase that it expands to fill the 10 divisions on screen touch zoom and drag across the segment of the waveform that i i you want to see in greater detail Then select Zoom 1 On Zoom 2 On Zoom 3 On or Zoom 4 On from the list to magnify the highlighted waveform segment Note The instrument displays the box enclosed area on the waveform magnified in the graticule REN Zoom 40n Both vertical and horizontal zoom functions are mae E
140. 3 10 The waveform record and its defining parameters 3 36 Figure 3 11 Real time sampling 0 cece cece eees 3 37 Figure 3 12 Equivalent time sampling 0eeeeees 3 39 Figure 3 13 Normal DSO Acquisition and Display mode versus Fast Acquisition mode ccc cece cree cece eee e evens 3 43 Figure 3 14 Normal DSO and Fast Acquisition displays 3 44 Figure 3 15 Fast Acquisition XY display 0eeeee 3 47 Figure 3 16 FastFrame cc cece cece cece e cere ee eees 3 49 Figure 3 17 FastFrame time stamp cee eeceeceees 3 54 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 18 Optical to Electrical converter and recovered clock and data connectors ssssssssssossososssosossooooo Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Using the O E Electrical Out to Ch1 Input adapter Vertical setup menu with optical controls Triggered versus untriggered displays Triggered versus untriggered displays Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers Slope and level controls help define the trigger Example advanced trigger readout 06 Violation zones for Setup Hold triggering Trigg
141. 7 setup and hold 3 102 setup hold 3 80 3 81 3 99 shared level 3 69 slew rate 3 79 Glossary 15 slope 3 67 3 69 source 3 64 state 3 80 3 98 status lights 3 72 T 3 133 C 10 timeout 3 79 3 94 3 102 Glossary 16 transition 3 79 3 102 types 3 69 width 3 78 3 87 3 102 window 3 79 3 92 3 102 Trigger after A 3 110 3 116 Trigger after events 3 110 Trigger after time 3 110 3 116 how to set up 3 110 Trigger and display 3 11 Trigger events A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 110 Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob 3 68 3 69 Trigger menu a event main trigger setup C 7 a gt b trigger sequence C 8 b event delayed trigger setup C 8 comm C 7 comm setup C 8 edge C 7 edge setup C 8 glitch C 7 glitch setup C 8 holdoff C 8 logic pattern C 7 logic pattern setup C 8 logic state C 7 logic state setup C 8 mode C 8 quick select C 7 run stop C 8 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 19 Index runt C 7 runt setup C 8 serial pattern C 7 serial pattern setup C 8 setup hold C 7 setup hold setup C 8 timeout C 7 timeout setup C 8 transition C 7 transition setup C 8 width C 7 width setup C 8 window C 7 window setup C 8 Trigger point defined 3 36 Trigger when A Trigger 3 97 A Trigger control window 3 96 3 99 transition is lt A Trigger control window 3 91 transition time gt A Trigger control window 3 91 Trigger delayed
142. 8 and waveforms 3 126 button 3 127 controls C 4 C 5 feature 3 125 graticule C 5 C 7 graticule size C 7 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 lock 3 131 reset zoom factors 3 130 scroll 3 131 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index setup 3 122 C 5 C 6 Size C 5 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 23 Index Index 24 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual
143. B 3 T Trig events A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 110 Technical support C 16 Tek Exponential window 3 192 3 194 3 203 Tek Secure 3 233 C 15 Glossary 15 TekVISA 2 2 Temperature compensation 3 160 3 166 Temperature grading C 10 Termination C 4 Test equipment for incoming inspection 1 21 Text file format 3 235 On screen 3 132 on screen C 9 Thresholds A Trigger control window 3 86 3 90 Time C 12 get current 3 254 Time base Glossary 16 Time cursor readout values 3 153 Time domain controls 3 182 Timebase 3 122 Timeout trigger 3 79 3 94 C 7 Glossary 16 A Trigger control window 3 94 how to set up 3 94 3 102 Timer A Trigger control window 3 94 To autoset the instrument 3 15 To get more help 3 16 To reset the instrument 3 16 Touch screen 3 120 3 123 Trace Glossary 16 Trace expression Glossary 16 Track C 11 Transition setup C 8 trigger 3 79 C 7 Transition trigger how to setup 3 102 Trig delay A Trigger control window 3 110 Trigger 3 64 Glossary 16 A Only 3 109 AC line voltage 3 64 3 70 auxiliary 3 64 3 70 coupling 3 67 delay 3 68 edge 3 65 Glossary 5 glitch 3 78 3 83 3 102 Glossary 6 holdoff 3 66 independent level 3 69 level 3 67 3 69 Glossary 16 level marker 3 133 line 3 64 3 70 logic 3 77 3 80 marker 3 133 mode 3 65 overview 3 63 pattern 3 79 3 96 position 3 67 pulse 3 77 readout 3 72 runt 3 78 3 85 3 102 Glossary 14 setup C
144. Control Feature Incompatible with Average Single acquisition Envelope Single acquisition Roll Measurements Explanation Acquisitions continue until the specified number of wave forms have been acquired and averaged Acquisitions continue until the specified number of wave forms have been acquired for the enveloped waveform Measurements are not available until you stop acquisitions Consider the mode that you want to use to acquire data Sample The instrument does no postprocessing of acquired samples The instrument saves the first sample of perhaps many during each acquisition interval an acquisition interval is the time covered by the waveform record divided by the record length Sample mode is the default mode CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m Peak Detect The instrument alternates between saving the lowest sample in one acquisition interval and the highest sample in the next acquisition interval This mode only works with real time noninterpolated sampling m Hi Res The instrument creates a record point by averaging all samples taken during an acquisition interval Hi Res results in a higher resolution lower bandwidth waveform This mode only works with real time noninter polated sampling A key advantage of Hi Res is its potential for increasing vertical resolution regardless of the input signal Table 3 1 indicates that you can obtain up to 13 signific
145. Display menu Table C 6 Display menu commands Menu Display Setup Appearance Screen Text Objects Colors Display Style Display Persistence Display Format Waveform Interpolation Graticule Style Submenu Dots Vectors Intensified Samples Reset All No Persistence Infinite Persistence Variable Persistence Persistence Controls YT XY XYZ Sin x x Linear Full Grid Cross Hair Frame Function Displays the Display Setup window select the display appearance display screen text display screen objects and select colors Displays the Appearance tab of the Display Setup window select the display style persistence intensity format and interpolation Displays the Screen Text tab of the Display Setup window You can enter text that you can display and position on screen Changing the waveform position does not move screen text also see vertical label on page C 4 Displays the Objects tab of the Display Setup window select the graticule style trigger level marker and date and time display Displays the Colors tab of the Display Setup window select the color of screen objects Choose Dots to display each waveform as a series of dots Choose Vectors to display vectors or lines between the dots Chose Intensified Samples to display actual samples as bright dots interpolated dots are blacked out Resets the display persistence Choose from No Persistence Infinite Persistence and Vari
146. F REJ attenuates signals above 30 kHz m LF REJ attenuates signals below 80 kHz m NOISE REJ provides lower sensitivity reducing the chance of falsely triggering on noise Push the TRIGGER MODE button to toggle between NORMAL and AUTO trigger modes m NORMAL trigger mode requires a trigger to acquire a waveform AUTO trigger mode acquires a waveform even if a trigger does not occur after a time out Be aware that in AUTO mode the acquired waveforms may not be triggered CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual TRIGGER F nD SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE Cens HEREJ Cann Com Gre CO READY EXT ROBE Cren MODE LEVEL es ic PUSH TO SET 50 Ww CO w SOURCE H JIL D TRIGGER E EDGE READY a SIJIN 3 pE E Ic Iml lol fe lel lol z 3 Z x m S E Jeol l LEVEL PUSH TO SET 50 Q 3 71 Triggering To Check Trigger Status To see the state and setup of the triggering circuit use the trigger status lights readout and screen Overview To check trigger status Control elements and resources Trigger status 1 To quickly determine trigger status check the three eer gt from trigger sta status lights TRIG D READY and ARM in the Trigger e Gores tus lights control area SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE m TRIG D on the instrument has recognized a valid trigger and is filling the postt
147. Frame FastFrame as previously shown or you can set them from the and time Selection Controls window Stamps 6 Touch Selection Controls from the Time Stamps control selection window to display the FastFrame controls controls 7 Inthe FastFrame controls window touch Selected Frame Source and select the source of the frame you want to view 8 Touch Selected Frame Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the specific frame you want to view and take time stamps on The frame you select appears on the display Note The A is the selected time stamp minus the reference time stamp 9 Touch the Reference Frame Source and select the source of the reference frame Touch Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the reference frame CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources FastFrame Rec Length 5000 Frame Count FastFrame Rec Length 5000 Frame Count FastFrame Rec Length 5000 Frame Count Frame Viewing Selected Frame Frame Source Tracking Chi S Frame yaw 2 Multiple Frames Frame Viewing TT Time Stamps Selected Frame Frame Reference Frame Source Tracking chi v tht Frame yan Frame 1 4 Multiple Frames Frame Viewing Time Stamps Selected Frame Frame Reference Frame Source Tracking Source e a ie J tne Chi Vv Frame an Frame 1 9 Multiple Frames Readouts
148. Gee ee ee ee 3 68 To Check Trigger Status 2 0 0 a E cece eee eee 3 72 Additional Trigger Parameters 2 0 0 cece eee 3 73 Advanced Triggering 12 o e ec a EES aa 3 77 To Trigger ona Glitch 0 eee eee eee 3 83 To Trigger on a Runt Pulse erri tonene a cee eee 3 85 Trigger Based on Puls Width 25 045 20003 red jaws Fee eee hema aid esa dail ee 3 87 To Trigger Based on Transition Time 0 cee eee eee eee eee 3 89 Triggering ona Window 1 cee ee eee 3 92 Trigger Based on Pulse Timeout E E Meh E anh E E EE Aa aati ane Neate a hana T 3 94 Rrigseron a Patter 4 sikelele laa ned act E a 3 95 To Tngge r ona Statens holst ed NG ae eee Set a RE 3 98 To Trigger on Setup Hold Time Violations 0 0 cece cee cee eee ee 3 99 Logic Qualify a Trigger 2 eee ee eee ences 3 102 Sequential Triggering 2 ee cece eee een ene 3 103 Using Sequential Triggering 0 eee eee eee eee 3 104 To Trigger on a Sequence 0 cece eee eee eee ee 3 109 Comm Triggering 6 si a a eee eS eee 3 117 Serial Pattern Triggering 0 irendi aA a eee 3 117 Displaying Waveforms cc cece cree e cree cece rene eens 3 119 Using the Waveform Display 0 cece eee eee eee eee eens 3 119 Using the Display artesa ear a cee wing bead ok Weal a wie Ooh kee s 3 121 To Display Waveforms in the Main Graticule 0 3 124 Setting MultiView Zoom Contro
149. Glossary 3 Cycle RMS B 1 C 11 Glossary 3 Index 4 D DATA 3 56 Data controlling input and output 3 221 Data Clear 3 133 Data input output 3 221 all settings are retained 3 222 avoiding setup waveform mismatches 3 222 begin your chart 3 245 bitmap file format 3 235 copy your file 3 249 copying waveforms 3 235 delete a reference waveform file 3 234 delete the file 3 235 delete the reference 3 233 display the reference control window 3 228 3 231 3 233 display the setups control window 3 224 3 226 display your reference waveform 3 233 export your file 3 242 exporting and copying waveforms 3 235 file formats 3 235 find the file directory 3 234 find the source directory 3 226 3 232 find your file 3 234 finish the chart 3 245 hardcopy formats 3 251 image 3 251 import the waveform data 3 244 JPEG file format 3 236 label the waveform 3 229 margins 3 251 MathCad file format 3 236 MathLab file format 3 236 name a destination 3 225 name the file 3 243 name your setup 3 224 3 225 numeric file format 3 235 orientation 3 251 page setup window 3 252 palette 3 251 paper 3 251 PNG file format 3 236 print preview window 3 253 print window illustration 3 250 printing waveforms 3 250 recall a reference waveform from a file 3 232 recall setup from a file 3 226 recall the setup 3 226 recall the waveform 3 231 recall your setup 3 227 recall your waveform 3 233 remote communicat
150. Histogram vertical available Zoomed waveforms can be aligned locked ae and automatically scrolled See Setting MultiView Aoi Zoom Controls on page 3 125 for more information idiv 125GSis 200ps pl HBH 40 0mv Cancel Explore the The next procedure describes setting up and zoom controls controlling MultiView Zoom See Setting MultiView Zoom Controls on page 3 125 Setting MultiView Zoom Controls The instrument can expand or compress zoom in or out on a waveform without changing the acquisition parameters sample rate record length and so on This section describes how to use MultiView Zoom and how it interacts with the selected waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 125 Displaying Waveforms Use MultiView Zoom push the MultiView Zoom button when you want to expand a waveform to inspect small feature s on that waveform or compare the feature to the non zoomed waveform s For example to temporarily expand the front corner of a pulse to inspect its aberrations use MultiView Zoom to expand it horizontally and vertically Using with Waveforms To help you use MultiView Zoom effectively consider how it operates on waveforms When in zoom mode the instrument vertically expands or contracts one waveform at a time unless zoom lock is on Also the instrument only vertically positions one waveform at a time when in MultiView Zoom When zooming horizontally Mu
151. Input This instrument samples in real time or random equivalent time both sampling systems provide pretrigger information by using the trigger to stop an already running acquisition Both sampling systems also sample the input after it is scaled providing improved input protection and dynamic range CAUTION To prevent damage to the acquisition system do not overdrive the inputs and observe static safe procedures Autoset Considerations Autoset acquires samples from the input signal and attempts to take the following actions based on the input data m Evaluate the amplitude range of the input signals and set the size and vertical offset of the vertical acquisition window to acquire the signal with good resolution but without clipping m Set the trigger to the approximate midlevel of the signal being autoset and switches to edge trigger mode m Evaluate the signal transitions and set the horizontal scale to produce a waveform display of 2 or 3 cycles of the input signal Sometimes Autoset cannot produce a correct display due to the nature of the input signal if so you may have to adjust the scale trigger and acquisition controls manually Some conditions that can cause Autoset to fail are m No signal present m Signals with extreme or variable duty cycles CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 17 Acquiring Waveforms m Signals with multiple or unstable signal periods m Signals with too low
152. Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons Aevent End of trigger delay B event Reset timeout STE 200mV Q Avent 3 Event A Edge Trigger Aiter Time gt BiEvent Acquire A gt B Sequence Horizontal tef P Trigger Reset Bony Delay Mode Type Time on Timeout 3 0p8 s m Athen B Trig After Time nth Trig Delay Position Si quence if timer Ops 50 0 pires B Event B Trig Level 208 0m To reset 3 If the Transition Type of Trigger Reset is selected touch Tigger Reset i aye Type Transition sequential Source and select the source of the transition from the Transition Pos Y triggers Cont list TETN ER TE 0 0v lequence if logic state Touch Slope and select the slope of the transition from RREO RE mn the list Tianstion Pos T Source eS Chi Reset A gt B sequence if logic state is True Touch Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad Trigger Reset to set the level that the source must pass through to a reset the triggers eae chi Y In the example the runt trigger A event occurs on the Rese A gt B sequence falling edge of the pulse on Ch1 The trigger delay ia expires 1 us after the falling edge of the pulse on Ch1 Ch2 provides the B events and Ch3 provides the reset event The reset event window is from the A event to the reset event at the rising edge of Ch3 If the trigger delay is increased from 1 us to 2 us the instrument will not trigger because the Ch3 reset ev
153. OR e ey Clocked NOR If none of the preconditions selected for the logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers 1 For state triggers the definition must be met at the time the clock input changes state 2 The definitions given here are correct for the Goes TRUE setting in the Trigger When menu If that menu is set to Goes False swap the definition for AND with that for NAND and for OR with NOR for both pattern and state types 3 The logic inputs are channels 1 2 3 and 4 when using Pattern triggers For State triggers channel 4 becomes the clock input leaving the remaining channels as logic inputs State Trigger A state trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function cause the function to be TRUE or at your option FALSE at the time the clock input changes state When you use a state trigger you define m The precondition for each logic input channels 1 2 and 3 m The direction of the state change for the clock input channel 4 m The Boolean logic function select from clocked AND NAND OR and NOR m The condition for triggering whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean function becomes TRUE logic high or FALSE logic low The state and pattern logic choices are summarized in Table 3 5 Setup Hold Trigger A setup hold trigger occurs when a logic input changes state inside of the setup and hold times relative to the clock When you use setup hold triggering you define
154. P preinstalled on the instrument Windows XP is the operating system on which the user interface application of this product runs and provides an open desktop for you to install other compatible applications Do not attempt to substitute any version of Windows that is not specifically provided by Tektronix for use with your instrument Product Software Comes preinstalled on the instrument This software running on Windows XP is the instrument application This software starts automatically when the instrument is powered on and provides the user interface UJ and all other instrument control functions You can also minimize the instrument application Support Software Not preinstalled on the instrument The compact discs included with the instrument contain additional software and files that may be useful to you m Readme file This file contains release notes and updates that could not be included in other product documentation m GPIB Programmer Online Help software This software in an online help format contains the information that you need to program the instrument through its GPIB interface A printable PDF file of this information is also available on the compact disc m Performance Verification Procedures The compact disc contains instructions to perform a performance verification See the instructions for the compact discs for information about installing the support software Occasionally new versions of software for
155. Positive going edge Negative going edge Trigger level can be adjusted vertically N J D4 Trigger slope can be positive or negative Figure 3 24 Slope and level controls help define the trigger You can trigger with the A Main trigger system alone or you can combine the A Main trigger with the B Delayed trigger to trigger on sequential events When using sequential triggering the A trigger event arms the trigger system and then the B trigger event triggers the instrument when the B trigger condi tions are met A and B triggers can and typically do have separate sources The B trigger condition can be based on a time delay or a specified number of counted events See Sequential Triggering on page 3 103 to learn how to use the delayed trigger system Triggering from the Front Panel 3 68 Access Procedures The front panel provides quick access to the most frequently used trigger controls The trigger readout shows you the state of the trigger system The slope coupling and source controls only work for edge triggering To access the advanced trigger controls display the Trigger Control window by pushing the ADVANCED button See Advanced Triggering on page 3 77 for more information Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger using the front panel controls CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview Triggering from the front panel Control elem
156. S eek ees deta 3 223 To Recall Your Setups 0 c g5 cea teas as wee cha RaW ae ES 3 226 Saving and Recalling Waveforms 0 0c ce eee eee eee 3 227 To Save Your Waveform oriris 0 0 c ccc cece eens 3 228 To Recall Your Waveform eases eriari ccc cee cee eee eens 3 231 TO Clear Referencesy ssi etiek san teas ANR Cha RAW awn SARS 3 233 Exporting and Copying Waveforms 0 00 cee cee eee eee 3 235 To Export Your Waveform 0 00 0 cece cee cee ees 3 236 To Use an Exported Waveform 0 0 00 cee cee cee eee 3 244 To Copy Your Waveform saersi i ea ccc eee ees 3 246 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Table of Contents Appendices Printing Wave orms yie pas wie en VENEA wile BAe pare eee bie ge Rae ar Sole E 3 250 Fo Print from Front Panel rorya cera a igre Main vn pea avn a nai ane a a eu 3 250 To Print from Menu Bal srias er keg te A E E AEE EAE wun 3 250 TO S Up the Pages EAEE E A EAE A EENAA 3 251 To Preview the Paget anih i a oee she A A aE ATE wun 3 252 To Print Using Print Screen oi pa oan 0 eee cee eee eee 3 253 To Date Time Stamp Hardcopies 0 00 0 cee eee eee 3 254 Remote Communication a en EEEE ccc eee eens 3 255 My Scop ses oie dans Viet kaeted See iee a eetaee Sees Sele te Ee es 3 257 Using MyScope Control Windows 00 cece cece eee 3 260 Accessing Online Help 0 cece cece cece cece cece ee eeeee 3 263 How t
157. Souke Chi FastFrame Selected Frame Frame i Source SetU Selection Controls HoriziAcq SetUp Selection Controls Horizi Acq SetUp 3 53 Acquiring Waveforms Overview Time stamping frames Cont Control elements and resources To lock the 10 Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from reference the Horiz Acq control window Touch FastFrame Setup position to display the FastFrame Setup control window frames fastFrame Note You can also get the FastFrame Setup control st e Hf Setup window by touching the Set Up button on the Selection Controls window 11 Touch either Frame Tracking Live or All to lock the ee anean Raforence Frame Selection reference and position frames together When the Em ja Pine Ac im frames are locked they maintain the same relative Rec Length ane Fame Horiztacq distance from each other when either frame is adjusted Multiple Frame Count Frames Readouts o oo 9 ime m Live locks together the channel and math waveforms All reference waveforms are locked together but they are separate from the channel and math waveforms All locks together all channel math and reference waveforms adjusting one waveform adjusts all waveforms SEICHUEFY 27 Jan 2608 1527501028 573 150 335 ge TT zz l Trigger time of the selected frame fRetCh1 F 1 27 Jun 2003 15 27 50 658 573 156 335 T ec Lengi A 00 00 00
158. TDS7000B Series General Selects all single waveform measure ments Phase Delay and Histogram measurements are not included in a snapshot Touch the Help button in the Measurements setup control window to access the online assistance See Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported on page B 1 for a list of the measurements and their definitions See page 3 263 to learn about using online help To Localizea Use the procedure that follows to take a measurement over a segment of the Measurement waveform otherwise the entire waveform is included in the measurement Overview Prerequisites To gate a measurement 1 Related control elements and resources Set up as from last procedure ae See To Take Automatic Measurements on page 3 144 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 149 Measuring Waveforms Overview To gate a measurement Cont Related control elements and resources Access gating 2 Enable and 3 position the gates 3 150 From the toolbar select Meas and then select Gating from the Measurement setup control window To select how to control the gated area touch Measurement Gating Cursor Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Zoom 3 Zoom 4 or Off Cursor Sets the gated area to the area between the cursors Use the multipurpose knobs to adjust the cursors on screen such that the area to measure is between the cursors Zoom 1 4 Sets the gated area to
159. Tasks ortopics Subtasks or subtopics Section title Contents Page no Triggering waveforms Signal Input Triggering Background on basic trigger operation 3 63 Triggering Concepts Background on triggering concepts 3 64 Triggering From the Front Using the front panel edge trigger controls 3 68 Panel Access Procedures Setting up triggers with front panel 3 68 controls To Check Trigger Status Checking trigger status 3 72 Additional Trigger Using additional trigger controls 3 73 Parameters Advanced Triggering Overview and setup for triggering on 3 77 specific pulse and logic conditions To Trigger on a Glitch Setting up glitch triggering 3 83 To Trigger on a Runt Pulse Setting up runt pulse triggering 3 85 Trigger Based on Pulse Setting up pulse width triggering 3 87 Width To Trigger Based on Setting up transition time triggering 3 89 Transition Time Trigger Based on Pulse Setting up pulse timeout triggering 3 94 Timeout Trigger on a Pattern Setting up pattern triggering 3 95 To Trigger on a State Setting up state triggering 3 98 To Trigger on Setup Hold Setting up setup hold time violation 3 99 Time Violations triggering Comm Triggering Overview and reference to documentation 3 117 optional on TDS7000B on using communications triggering Series Serial Pattern Triggering Overview and reference to documentarian 3 117 optional on TDS7000B on using serial pattern triggering Series CSA7000B Series
160. TekScope001 wfm E TekScope wfm File name 040427 _063636 Save Save as type Waveform Files wim xl Cancel Auto incrementfile name Help Selecta 8 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons to navigate Save Reference Waveform As E3 destination to the directory in which to save your waveform E Waveforms zj adm Select directory 9 To specify the file name in which to save your waveform Edit path and file name and name file you can m Use the default name and directory appearing in Base file name TDSwim wm E comp E the File Path field Seve as type Wavetorm Files wim z Cancel m Rename the file by typing a new name into the File 72an EA name field Access to virtual keyboard m Select the Auto increment file name check box to save a series of files without typing in a new name each time For more information see Using Auto Increment File Name on page 3 222 3 230 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Save your 10 Touch the Save button to save the waveform file or waveform reference To cancel without saving touch the Cancel Cancel Help button For further 11 assistance For more help on saving waveforms touch the Help button in the toolbar to access the contextual online help 2 See page 3 263 to learn about using online help To Rec
161. User Manual Tektronix CSA7404B Communications Signal Analyzers TDS7704B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes 071 1226 03 This document supports firmware version 4 0 3 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc TekConnect MyScope and VocalLink are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc TekVISA FastFrame and MultiView Zoom are trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive or P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support m In North America call 1 800 833 9200 m Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find
162. VANCED to display additional trigger functions Pages 3 63 and 3 77 Push to turn cursors on or off Page 3 151 Push to make a hard copy Page 3 250 Push to return settings to default values Page 3 16 Horizontally scale position delay and set record length resolution of selected waveform Page 3 20 Push to automatically set up the vertical horizontal and trigger controls based on selected channels Page 3 15 Y y y y INTENSITY Fre Auroser P5EAULT prr CURSORS y FastAcq L HORIZONTAL TRIGGER POSITION Turn the multipurpose knobs to adjust parameters selected from te gS EDGE RAC i op ff 0 the screen interface Push a Fine button to toggle between normal and fine adjustment with its multipurpose knob COUPLING SLOPE SINGLE z f JS a POS Page 3 154 RESOLUTION g MuttiView S Zoom HF REJ RM CO eS MORE LFAEJ l READY SAMPLER NOISE TRIGD lt SCALE gt LINE LEVEL PUSH TO SET 50 8 g Z Z Al Jel fel f gt 5 m lla o Baga gt CY gt CY Push to turn the touch screen on and off Page 3 123 a ae Push MultiView Zoom to add a magnified graticule to the gt display Push HORIZ or VERT to select the axis to magnify Page 3 125 gt izz 3 1216 m VERTICAL POSITION POSITION Cc POSITION Turn channel displays on and off Vertically scale or position the lt
163. Waveforms Overview To define a spectral math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources Take cursor 27 From the toolbar touch the Cursor button to display the Cursor measurements cursors and the cursor control window 28 Select the Math tab and touch the numbered button for e the spectral waveform that you want to measure BE 29 Select the cursor type by touching either the H Bars V eae Bars Waveform or Screen buttons for more information see Taking Cursor Measurements starting on page 3 151 30 Turn the multipurpose knobs to position each cursor on the waveform to measure the feature that interests you 31 Read the results in the cursor readout The cursor readout is displayed below the graticule as shown here or at the bottom of the graticule area The figure shows the cursor measurement of a frequency magnitude on an FFT The readout reads about 0 dB 4 0 mdB because it is aligned with the reference level offset The other readout reads 10 08 dB indicating the magnitude of the frequency it is measuring is 10 08 dB relative to reference level offset Display of the source waveform is turned off The cursor units will be in dB or volts for magnitude waveforms and in degrees or radians for those measuring phase OOnsdiv 25GS a B00ps pt 260mV 2 4 32 Select V Bars and use the multipurpose knobs to align the two vertical cursors
164. a dual display cece eee wees 1 18 Figure 1 7 Drag area for Windows task bar 0e0ee0e 1 19 Figure 1 8 Moving Windows desktop icons to the external MNOMILOR 6 eiii ib Sues aver CHES arene afeUhw Bases he s ore dg NaS evan a 1 19 Figure 1 9 Universal test hookup for functional tests CH 1 SHOW 205 acai 6 040 5 ovarels a tye oo etave a 40a bs deagase lod as a ADERE 1 24 Figure 1 10 Channel button location 0 cece eeee 1 25 Figure 1 11 Setup for time base test 0 cece eee ewe eee 1 27 Figure 1 12 Setup for trigger test 0 cece cece eee eee 1 29 Figure 1 13 Setup for the file system test cee eeees 1 30 Figure 3 1 Input and Acquisition Systems and Controls 3 8 Figure 3 2 Setting vertical range and position of input channels 3 19 Figure 3 3 Varying offset moves the vertical acquisition window on the waveform 66 5 oie sce g eee ates hern eae ee Slee eee ale Bree ele 3 20 Figure 3 4 Horizontal Acquisition window definition 3 21 Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate for all channels io coe 36seaia Si ee eas See ee i s ae ote 8 aera eee 3 23 Figure 3 6 Roll mode cc cece cece cece eee e eee eeeeee 3 28 Figure 3 72 Aliasing ico 6 5 wielices RANEE ANARAN 3 29 Figure 3 8 Digitizer configuration cece eee ee eee 3 35 Figure 3 9 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing 3 35 Figure
165. a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C 84 F at or below 60 C 140 F noncondensing Upper limit derates to 20 relative humidity at 60 C 140 F Altitude operating 3 048 m 10 000 ft Nonoperating 12 190 m 40 000 ft Random vibration operating 0 24 grams from 5 Hz to 500 Hz 10 minutes on each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total with floppy disk and compact disk installed Nonoperating 2 28 grms from 5 Hz to 500 Hz 10 minutes on each axis 30 minutes total 3 axis CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 27 Appendix A Specifications Table A 13 Certifications and compliances Category EC Declaration of Conformity EMC Australia New Zealand Declara tion of Conformity EMC A 28 Standards or description Meets intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union EN 61326 Emissions 34 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 61326 Immunity 1 4 IEC 1000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 4 kV contact discharge 4 kV air discharge IEC 1000 4 3 PF field immunity 3 V m 80 MHz to 1 GHz 80 amplitude modulated with a 1 kHz sinewave IEC 1000 4 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity 1 kV on AC mains 500 V on I O cables IEC 1000 4 5 AC Surge Immunity 1 kV differential mode 2 kV common mode IEC 1000 4 6 RF Conducted Immunity 3 V
166. able Persistence Modes Displays the Persistence Controls window that you use to control display persistence Choose YT XY or XYZ display formats For additional information see To Set Display Format on page 3 47 Choose from Sin x x or Linear interpolation Choose from Full Grid Cross hair and Frame styles CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 9 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 6 Display menu commands Cont Menu Record View Palette FastAcq WimDB Palette User Palette Display Trigger T Waveform Display On Display Date and Time Display Remote Normal Monochrome Gray Monochrome Green Temperature Grading Spectral Grading User Normal Monochrome Green Monochrome Gray Temperature Grading Spectral Grading User Choose Normal to use system colors for best viewing Choose Green to display waveforms in shades of green Choose Gray to display waveforms in shades of gray Choose Temp temperature to display waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in warmer colors reds Choose Spectral to display waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in blue shades Choose User to display a control window to design your own colors Choose Normal to use system colors for best viewing Choose Green to display fast acquisition and waveform database waveforms in shades of green Choose Gray to display fast acquisition and waveform database wave
167. act function of the SINGLE button depends on the acquisition mode In Sample Peak Detect or Hi Res acquisition modes acquisition stops after a single waveform is acquired In Average or Envelope acquisition modes acquisition stops after N waveforms are acquired where N is the number of averages or envelopes specified In equivalent time it takes several triggers to partially fill a record In Waveform Database mode acquisition stops after N samples are acquired where N is the number of samples specified It may take a number of sequences of acquisitions to fill a waveform to the desired number of samples Single sequence triggering is not available in Fast Acquisition mode Control elements and resources INTENSITY l STOP The instrument can trigger on glitch or runt pulses or it can trigger based on the width slew rate or timeout period of a pulse These capabilities make the instrument suitable for such tasks as unattended monitoring for and capturing of a power supply glitch or GO NO GO slew rate testing of operational amplifiers This subsection describes how to use advanced triggers glitch runt width transition slew rate window and timeout triggering Edge runt glitch width transition timeout setup hold and window triggers can be logic qualified The instrument can also trigger on a logic or binary pattern and on the state of a logic pattern at the time it is clocked The instrument can trigger on data tha
168. adian Certification Additional Compliance Installation Overvoltage Category Definition Pollution Degree Definition Safety Certification Compliance Equipment Type Safety Class Pollution Degree CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Standards or description Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC EN 61010 1 A2 1995 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL3111 1 First Edition Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement No 1010 1 92 control and laboratory use IEC61010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The installation categories are CAT III Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT II _Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level includes appliances portable tools and similar products Equipment is usually cord connected CATI Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment aro
169. ages ae mode on page 3 71 and Set holdoff on page 3 74 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 93 Triggering Trigger Basedon When you select the type Timeout the instrument will trigger if a pulse Pulse Timeout transition does not occur within a specified time limit That is the trigger will occur when depending on the polarity that you select the signal stays higher or stays lower than the trigger level for the timeout value To set up for timeout triggering do the following procedures Overview Trigger based on pulse timeout Control elements and resources Select timeout 1 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of triggering the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch Timeout A Event A gt B Sec B Event ETIE Acquire CEER soare imeut Trigger Timeu Y mf EZ EOI EI Trigger When Trigger Levels Stays High StaysLow Either Select the 3 To specify which channel becomes the trigger source GST kaama aa x ource Timeout Trigger source touch Source and select the source from the list Trigger Type es EGE a E h3 500 0ps Ch4 rigger When StaysHigh Stays Low _ Either Sharad Y EE 4t mea Levels Set to trigger 4 Touch Stays High Stays Low or Either from the Trigger when When window Timeout Trigger Timeout Trigger m Stays High causes a trigger if the signal stays higher than the trigger level for longer than the 1 timeout value m Stays Low causes a
170. al applications 1 14 Center 3 186 Chi Ch2 C 14 Chi Ch2 C 14 Chi Ch2 A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 94 3 96 3 98 3 100 3 103 Ch3 Ch4 C 14 Ch3 Ch4 C 14 CH3 signal output 2 9 2 10 Channel 3 141 3 142 Glossary 3 Glossary 8 Glossary 13 configuration 3 35 readout 3 130 reference indicator Glossary 3 trigger input 3 64 3 70 Channel probe deskew 3 162 Glossary 3 Channels deskew 3 162 digitizer configuration 3 34 shared horizontal window 3 23 shared parameters illustrated 3 23 Circuit loading Glossary 3 Cleaning exterior D 1 flat panel display D 2 optical connectors 3 57 Clear all references and setups 3 233 Clear Data 3 133 Clipping derivative math waveforms 3 173 how to avoid 3 173 3 174 integral math waveforms 3 174 CLOCK 3 56 Clock recovery outputs 3 56 Clock source A Trigger control window 3 100 Color math 3 133 palette 3 132 C 10 reference 3 132 Color palette 3 46 3 132 3 137 C 10 changing 3 137 definition 3 132 C 10 Colors C 9 Comm C 12 setup C 8 trigger C 7 triggering 3 117 Communication remote 3 255 Compensation 3 58 3 59 Configuration software installation 1 13 1 15 system 1 5 Connect input signal 3 12 Connecting and conditioning your signals 3 9 Connecting optical signals 3 55 Connecting peripherals 1 7 Connection to a network 1 16 connection to a LAN 1 16 Connectivity tools 2 2 Contents and index C 16 C
171. al signal and cover O E Se Q Dow J Glose Figure 3 20 Vertical setup menu with optical controls First select Ch1 in the Waveform section of the menu Then touch the Wave length button that matches your system You select the mask bandwidth and Bessel Thompson filter appropriate for your optical standard using the Masks menus If the Bessel Thompson filter is on the instrument is a reference receiver For detailed information on using masks see the CSA7000B amp TDS7000B Series Option SM Serial Mask Testing and Option ST Serial Triggering User Manual 3 59 Acquiring Waveforms Optical Bandwidth 3 60 CSA7000B Series Traditionally bandwidth is defined as the frequency at which the power out is one half the power out at a frequency near DC In the voltage domain the power dissipated into a resistive load such as a 50 Q termination of an input is the Vpys R where Vpms is the RMS of the voltage swing seen at the resistive load and R is the resistance value A logarithmic scale using decibels is typically used to describe the frequency dependent response A value expressed in terms of a decibel relative to a reference is defined as _ value _ EmA o a For electrical bandwidths the reference of a system is commonly the response of the system to a sinusoidal frequency at or near DC The point at which the system response is one half would therefore be 0 5 dB 10log 3dB ox 2
172. all Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to recall a waveform to a reference You can only recall waveforms into references NOTE Reference waveforms do not recall because they are already reside in the instrument You can copy a reference waveform to another reference first display the reference to be copied and then use the Save Waveform procedure to save it to another reference Ref1 Ref4 Overview To recall your waveform Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up You must have access to a waveform saved by the instrument m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 Display the 2 From the toolbar touch Refs and then select the Ref 1 reference to Ref 4 tab of the reference in which you want to recall control window the waveform L Ta Save Wim to Refi Recall Ref1 fron ae 22 ave Wim to File Delete Wim Fil Label 10 Delete Recall the 3 If recalling an internal reference touch Display to toggle own EN waveform the display of the reference waveform on Horz Pos x ic 50 0 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual el 3 231 Data Input Output Overview Recall a 4 reference waveform from a file Find the source 5 directory Select your 6 waveform 3 232 To recall your waveform Cont To display the Recall Reference Waveform window from the Recall Ref x from File window touch Recall T
173. alyzer has time domain controls for the acquired waveform These controls set the time duration and the resolution time between samples You can easily set the required sample rate and record length Gating Controls These controls are the bridge that connect the time domain to the frequency domain You can perform spectral analysis on a gated region of the input waveform This gating also determines the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer Window Functions There are eight different window functions that shape the filter response of the spectral analyzer m Magnitude Versus Frequency You can choose to display data in dB or linear mode You may display the real or imaginary parts of the spectral magnitude only Ref level offset and reference level controls give complete control over the vertical position and offset of the spectrum The log zero dB ref level may be dialed in manually or set to dBm with a single button touch m Phase Versus Frequency You can display phase data as a function of frequency in radians or degrees You can zero the noise phase for magnitudes below a threshold level Finally you can select Phase unwrap and d0 do group delay m Spectral Averaging You can turn on averaging in the frequency domain for phase and magnitude waveforms CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Multiple analyzer control locks Up to four spectral analyzers may be used
174. ame slice of time into waveform records See Figure 3 5 gt O Ch3 record Sy Common horizontal position and delay Ch4 record Common record start point and record length Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate for all channels Setting Acquisition Controls This section presents overviews of the instrument acquisition features those that start and stop acquisitions and those that control how the instrument processes the data as it is acquired just sampled or averaged or enveloped Special features keys to using and operation controls are covered CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 23 Acquiring Waveforms 3 24 Using the Acquisition Controls Acquisition mode Q Acquisition system Horizontal Record scale length Roll mode gives a strip chart recorder like display for low frequency signals Roll mode lets you see acquired data points without waiting for the acquisition of a complete waveform record For example in normal acquisition mode when the Horizontal Scale is 1 second per division 10 seconds are required to fill the waveform record Without roll mode you must wait 10 seconds to see that the position control is set wrong With roll mode you can start seeing results almost immediately The following table indicates which acquisition features and modes are incompatible with other features or modes
175. ameter of 9 um Alternate types can be coupled by use of UCI universal connector interface series adapters Refer to a current Tektronix catalog for details Attach the fiber optic cable with a suitable connector or a UCI Interface adapter to the optical input receptacle as follows 1 Firmly press the cable connector or adapter over the interface ferrule until it reaches the stop 2 Rotate the cable connector or the adapter body until the antirotation pin engages 3 Firmly tighten the cable connector or the adapter shell Tighten with finger pressure only 4 To remove unscrew the cable connector or adapter shell To keep the optical input power to an appropriate level it may be necessary to attenuate the optical signal CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 55 Acquiring Waveforms A CAUTION To avoid damaging the optical input to maintain the levels within performance range and to avoid clipping attenuate optical signals to less than that listed in Absolute maximum nondestructive optical input on page A 23 and Maximum nonsaturating linear response to transient input on page A 23 Front Panel Connectors Optical Input Connector 3 56 Output Connectors CSA7000B Series The O E converter connectors are shown in Figure 3 18 RECOVERED RECOVERED OPTICALIN ELECTRICAL CLOCK DATA UCI optical input OUT connector Figure 3 18 Optical to Electrical converter and recovered clock
176. and time 3 254 to set up the page 3 251 to use an exported waveform 3 244 using auto increment filename 3 222 view 3 251 Data Source A Trigger control window 3 100 Date and time display 3 133 C 10 displaying 3 254 on hardcopies 3 254 setting 3 133 3 254 dB 3 209 Glossary 4 dBm Glossary 4 DC coupling Glossary 4 DC offset with math waveforms 3 174 Decibel Glossary 4 Default setup how to execute 3 16 Define inputs A Trigger control window 3 96 3 98 3 100 3 101 3 103 Define pattern type A Trigger control window 3 96 3 98 3 103 Defining and displaying waveforms 3 121 Degree 3 210 DELAY button 3 68 Delay C 12 measurement Glossary 4 mode on C 6 time Glossary 4 Delay time A Trigger control window 3 110 Delayed runs after time 3 68 Delayed trigger 3 68 how to set up 3 110 Delayed triggerable on events 3 68 Delete all refs C 1 Derivative math waveform 3 172 applications 3 172 derivation of 3 172 procedure for measuring 3 173 3 181 record length of 3 172 Description key features 1 1 product 1 1 Deskew 3 162 C 4 Glossary 3 channels 3 162 vertical controls window 3 162 Diagnostics C 15 Differentiation of a derivative 3 172 waveform 3 171 Digitizing Glossary 4 process defined 3 35 Display customizing 3 131 3 132 date and time C 10 elements 3 120 format 3 133 C 9 persistence 3 132 C 9 settings 3 132 setup 3 135 C 9 style 3 132 C 9 styles 3 135
177. andard deviations of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram that are within 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 3 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 2 Comm measurements and their definition Name ee Ext Ratio i rif Extinction Ratio bee Extinction Ratio dB rel Eye Height x Ee Eye Width Definition The ratio of eye top to base Ext Ratio PT0pPmean PBasS mean The ratio of eye base to top in Ext Ratio 100 PBaS mean PTOPmean The ratio of eye top to base in dB Ext Ratio dB 10 Log PToPmean PBasemean The eye height in watts or volts Eye Height PTOPmean 3 PTOPsigma PBaS mean 3 PBasesigma The eye width in seconds Eye Width TCross2nean 3 TCross2sigma TCroSSImean 3 T Cross sigma oe Crossing Pi Eye Top Eye Base A Jitter Pk Pk Jitter RMS Tr The eye crossing point as a percentage of eye height Crossing 100 PCroSStmean PBaS mean PTOPmean PBaS mean The top of the eye The base of the eye The peak to peak value for the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter PP TCrosstpp The RMS value of the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter RMS TCross1igma Jitter 60 6 x Jitter RMS Noise Pk Pk The peak to peak value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Noise Pk Pk PTOPok
178. ant bits with Hi res mode The instrument uses 16 bit memory This is allocated as 15 bits 1 sign bit Round off errors and internal noise limit the effective bits for Hi Res mode and signal averaging to about 13 bits You can calculate the theoretical number of bits of enhancement using the following formula where Nd is the number of points acquired during a sample interval Bits of enhancement 0 5 log Nd Table 3 1 Additional resolution bits Theoretical en Resulting effective Sample Rate S s Nd extra samples hancement bits bits 5 00E 00 13 00 1 00E 01 13 00 2 50E 01 13 00 5 00E 01 13 00 1 00E 02 13 00 2 50E 02 13 00 5 00E 02 13 00 1 00E 03 13 00 2 50E 03 13 00 5 00E 03 13 00 1 00E 04 13 00 2 50E 04 13 00 5 00E 04 13 00 1 00E 05 12 80 2 50E 05 5 006403 e14 1214 5 00E 05 11 64 1 00E 06 11 14 2 50E 06 10 48 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 25 Acquiring Waveforms Table 3 1 Additional resolution bits Cont Theoretical en Resulting effective Sample Rate S s Nd extra samples hancement bits bits m Envelope Continuously as subsequent waveforms are acquired the instrument retains the running minimum Min and maximum Max values in adjacent sample intervals creating an envelope of the number of waveforms that you specify Once the specified number of waveforms is reached the data is cleared and the process starts over This is similar to the Peak Detect
179. anual 3 19 Acquiring Waveforms 3 20 m Applying a negative offset moves the vertical range down relative to the DC level of the input signal Likewise applying a positive offset moves the vertical range up See Figure 3 3 Vertical Window 100 mV 8 divs X 10 mV div 1 divs of position Acquisition window shifts ii Ai Ha a positive to capture overshoot ear waveform top leve Offset 0 0 V At waveform ground reference Acquisition window shifts Offset 300 mV Waveform bottom level negative to capture preshoot Figure 3 3 Varying offset moves the vertical acquisition window on the waveform Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations The instrument lets you define the horizontal acquisition window that is set several parameters that determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record when acquired For background read Waveform Record on page 3 36 These common parameters specify a horizontal acquisition window that is applied to all channels in parallel See Independent vs Shared Window on page 3 23 These parameters are m The trigger condition that you set up determines the point on the waveform that triggers the instrument m Horizontal position also det
180. armonics decreasing in frequency when they should be increasing or vice versa Using averaging in either the time or frequency domain will make these frequency shifts more sluggish To Take Cursor Measurements of a Spectral Math Waveform Once you have displayed a spectral math waveform use cursors to measure the frequency amplitude or phase angle See Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 151 To Take Automated Measurements of a Spectral Math Waveform You can use automated measurements to measure spectral math waveforms Use the procedure To Take Automated Measurements on page 3 144 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 205 Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Select a Predefined Swept Sine Wave Analysis Many applications of the spectral analyzer require swept sine wave input The following equation determines the maximum sweep speed of the sine wave generator for a given span and resolution bandwidth _ freq span K r RBW T minimum time to sweep the sine over the requested span freq span frequency span of interest RBW resolution bandwidth K 2 dB BW in bins for the window function in use as shown in Table 3 13 on page 3 194 K 2 for a Gaussian window Use the procedure that follows to select a predefined spectral math waveform Related control elements and resources Spectral Math Waveform Remember a channel source must be acquiring or have acquired data This source does not h
181. at 3 GHz TDS7254B lt 1 div at 2 5 GHz TDS7154B lt 1 div at 1 5 GHz lt 0 5 div from DC to 50 MHz CSA7404B TDS7704B TDS7404B lt 1 5 div at 3 GHz TDS7254B lt 1 div at 2 5 GHz TDS7154B lt 1 div at 1 5 GHz lt 150 mV from DC to 50 MHz increas ing to 500 mV at 2 5 GHz typical between 2 and 2 5 GHz mV div and lt 1 V div Sensitivity lt 0 5 div from DC to 50 MHz lt 1 div at 1 25 GHz 3 x the DC coupled limits Same as DC coupled limits for frequen cies gt 100 Hz attenuates signals lt 100 Hz Same as DC coupled limits for frequen cies lt 20 kHz attenuates signals gt 20 kHz Same as DC coupled limits for frequen cies gt 200 kHz attenuates signals lt 200 kHz A 15 Appendix A Specifications Table A 4 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Edge trigger sensitivity 4 GHz typical CSA7404B TDS7704B TDS7404B Edge trigger sensitivity not DC coupled typical Auxiliary trigger input characteristics typical Description CH1 CH4 Trigger coupling Sensitivity Main trigger DC coupled 2 7 divisions at 4 GHz All sources for vertical scale settings 10 mV div and lt 1 V div Trigger coupling Sensitivity NOISE REJ 3 x the DC coupled limits AC Same as DC coupled limits for frequen cies gt 100 Hz attenuates signals lt 100 Hz HF REJ Same as DC coupled limits for frequen cies lt 20 kHz attenuates signals gt 20 kHz LF REJ Same as DC coupled limi
182. at DC In terms of frequency voltage and resistance the bandwidth is expressed as 3dB toe ape where V f is the RMS of the voltage swing response at the bandwidth frequency and V DC is the RMS voltage swing response at a frequency approaching DC Further math yields V t 0 707 x V DC The expression is simplified by cancelling the R and moving the squared term inside the log expression to a multiple outside the log expression otoe per 2x 10 0e vf 20 tog vp R VC VC CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms In CSA7000B Series instruments the vertical units displayed for an optical module are not in voltage but watts this is a unit of power The optical to elec trical converter inside the instrument outputs a voltage whose amplitude is linearly dependent on the incoming optical power in this condition the voltage applied at the electrical input already represents optical power in its linear form as opposed to having to square the voltage and divide by R For the optical input then the bandwidth where the displayed optical power is one half that approaching DC is 0 5 dB 10log gt 3dB ox at DC The V f is the frequency at which the vertical swing is one half 0 5 the V DC not 0 707 The optical bandwidth therefore corresponds to the traditional electrical bandwidth of 6 dB During testing of optical systems by im
183. at shown at the right Note This procedure assumes MS Excel 97 You can 7 X 5 likely specify titles customize the treatment and labeling of the x and y axes and so forth in your data analysis ae a P F x 10 1 50E 08 application either as you create the chart or afterward E aa Use the help for your data analysis application to B ew determine if it has these capabilities and for instructions EO aoe in using them k Secu 17 33 49 a 61 97 113 45 161 177 193 209 225 241 Seriest a 1 00E 08 F z 1 50E 08 2 2 50E 08 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 245 Data Input Output Overview To use exported waveforms Cont Control elements and resources For further 9 For more help on exporting waveforms touch the assistance Help button in the window to access contextual online help See page 3 263 to learn about accessing online help To Copy Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to copy a waveform to the clipboard Overview To save a waveform Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Make sure the waveform image or measurement to be copied exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform an active reference and so forth m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 m See page 3 29 for acquisition setup m See page 3 63 for trigger setup Select for copy 2 From the menu bar select Edit and then
184. at the instrument is powered off Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear panel is facing you See Figure 1 3 on page 1 12 Note if you have option FHD installed on your instrument the front panel should be facing you instead of the rear panel Loosen the thumb screws that secure the hard drive to the drive tray Grasp the hard disk drive assembly by the thumb screws and pull until the handle is exposed Grasp the handle and pull the hard drive assembly straight out of the instrument CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 11 Installation Loosen thumb screws gt lt x Remove the hard disk drive Figure 1 3 Removing the hard drive Reinstalling the Removable Hard Drive To reinstall the hard drive follow these steps See Figure 1 4 on page 1 13 1 Verify that the instrument is powered off 2 Leaving the cover handle extended push the hard drive assembly into place until it stops ensuring that it is straight Push the hard drive assembly firmly to ensure that the connector is seated properly 3 Slide the cover handle in until it stops It will be almost flush with the back panel 4 Finger tighten the two thumb screws to ensure that the removeable hard drive is properly seated 1 12 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation Ele Tighten the thumbscrews Push the hard disk drive straight in Figure 1 4
185. ave to be displayed to be used Overview To select a predefined spectral math waveform Prerequisites 1 Display the 2 math control window Select a 3 predefined spectral analysis math waveform 3 206 All channel and reference Waveforms and automatic measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on From the toolbar touch the Math button to display the Define Math control window Touch Mag or Phase to select a predefined magnitude or phase spectral analysis waveform Selecting a predefined spectral waveform turns on display of the waveform See page page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Define a Spectral Math Use the procedure that follows when defining a spectral math waveform Waveform Remember to ensure that the sources you use exist Channel sources must be acquiring or have acquired data These sources do not have to be displayed to be used Overview To define a spectral math waveform Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the 2 math control window Select spectral 3 analysis setup Select a 4 spectral waveform All channel and reference Waveforms and automatic measurement scalars that you will use in
186. aveform measurement Ta 5ocmy p 10 0usfdiv IM 201MWs 100p 25 0MSis _40 008 ot BE 7 7 0mv ran PiePe 5 BMVis Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access context sensitive help on math waveforms or see Measuring Waveforms on page 3 139 See Accessing Online Help on page 3 263 for overview of the online help system 3 181 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Defining Spectral Math Waveforms 3 182 The math capabilities of the instrument include spectrum analysis of a wave form This section describes a spectral analyzer that allows you to control the analysis intuitively with time domain and frequency domain controls These controls merge the time domain controls with the frequency domain controls to provide a complete spectral analyzer Signals may be represented by their characteristics in both the time and the frequency domain By combining and transforming source waveforms into spectral math waveforms you can simultaneously view signal characteristics in both domains This spectral analyzer provides a complete set of controls and features that allow you to make time and frequency domain measurements without the need to learn extensive details about FFT algorithms m Frequency Domain Controls You can operate the spectral analyzer using traditional spectrum analyzer controls You can set the center frequency span and resolution bandwidth directly Time Domain Controls The spectral an
187. aveform record Frame count is the number of acquisitions to store in the acquisition memory of the channel If the product of the record length and the frame count exceeds the available memory the instrument will reduce the record length or frame count in size such that the product will fit the amount of memory available 6 Inthe Frame Viewing controls touch Source and select the source of the frame you want to view 7 Inthe Frame Viewing control touch Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the specific frame you want to view The frame that you select appears on the display 8 In the Frame Viewing controls touch Multiple Frames to toggle it to On 9 Inthe Frame Viewing control touch Start Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the starting frame you want to view Touch of Frames and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of frames you want to view The number of frames that you select to view will appear overlaid on the display 10 The frames within the selected range are displayed superimposed over each other in the color of the Source channel The Selected Frame is also superimposed on the display of frames but in a dark blue color The blue line is drawn in normal or monochrome color selections no persistence and when no Refs are displayed You may find it difficult to distinguish the dark blue Selected Frame if the selected color pal
188. b or keypad to set the time only paar aces purp yp ae tom Trig Delay 7 Position a os ak B Trig Level 4 To set the B trigger level touch B Trig Level and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the level iniiely or B Fvent ater A 5 If using any other trigger type see To set up B triggering on page 3 115 To trigger on 1 To set the time base to trigger after an A trigger and a Tri B events specified number of B trigger events from the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq tab of the Trigger control window 2 Touch A Then B Trig on nth Event 3 To set the number of B trigger events touch Trig Event and use the multipurpose knob keypad or up and down arrows to set the number of events 4 To set the B trigger level touch B Trig Level and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the level 5 If using any other trigger type see To set up B triggering on page 3 115 3 110 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont To reset 1 To reset sequential triggers select the Trigger Reset sequential Type triggers None to sequential trigger without using Trigger Reset Timeout to reset sequential triggers if the time you set occurs before the B trigger Transition to reset sequential triggers if the transition event you specify occurs before the B trigger State to reset sequent
189. ca tions Signal Analyzers and the TDS7000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscillo scopes All specifications are guaranteed unless labeled typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed Specifications that are marked with the symbol are checked in chapter four Performance Verification of the service manual All specifications apply to all models unless noted otherwise To meet specifica tions the following conditions must be met The instrument must have been calibrated in an ambient temperature between 20 C and 30 C 68 F and 86 F The instrument must be operating within the environmental limits listed in Table A 12 on page A 27 The instrument must be powered from a source that meets the specifications listed in Table A 10 on page A 25 The instrument must have been operating continuously for at least 20 min utes within the specified operating temperature range You must perform the Signal Path Compensation procedure after the 20 minute warm up period and if the ambient temperature changes more than 5 C 41 F repeat the procedure See Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 160 for instructions to perform this procedure CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 1 Appendix A Specifications Product and Feature Description A 2 Acquisition Features Your instrument is shown in Table A 1 Table A 1 Instrument models Number of Maxim
190. ce 3 156 To set the cursor sources Cont 6 10 11 12 To change the cursor tracking mode from the Cursor controls window select Setup Touch Track Mode Indep or Tracking m Indep Makes each cursor positionable without regard to the position of the other cursor m Tracking Makes both cursors move in unison and maintain a fixed horizontal or vertical distance between each other To return to the Cursor controls window touch the Controls button To toggle the display of cursors on or off touch the Cursor button Note All adjustments that you can make in the Cursor controls window can also be made in this window To change the waveform and screen cursor marker style from the Cursor controls window select Setup Touch Style and select Lines Line amp X or X Touch the Help button in the Cursor setup control window or the Cursor controls window to access the online assistance Related control elements and resources m Track Mode See page 3 263 to learn about using online help CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Taking Histograms The instrument can display histograms constructed from the selected waveform data You can display both vertical voltage and horizontal time histograms but only one at a time Use histogram measurements to get statistical measure ment data for a section of a waveform along one axis Horizontal hi
191. ce holdoff mode and so on This section covers the following topics m Triggering Concepts which describes some basic principles of triggering and the following trigger elements type source coupling holdoff mode and so on m Triggering from the Front Panel which describes how to use the front panel triggering controls each of which is common to most of the trigger types the instrument provides Additional Trigger Parameters which describes how to access common trigger functions in the Trigger control window m Advanced Triggering which describes trigger types that you can use to isolate specific signal phenomena m Sequential Triggering which describes how to combine the A Main and B Delayed trigger systems to capture unique events Comm Triggering optional on TDS7000B Series which describes triggering on communications signals m Serial Pattern Triggering optional on TDS7000B Series which describes N N triggering on serial data patterns Acquisition system Display Wim transform system Horizontal timebase CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 63 Triggering Triggering Concepts Triggers determine when the instrument stops acquiring and displays a wave form They help create meaningful waveforms from unstable jumbles or blank screens See Figure 3 21 The instrument has simple edge triggers as well as a variety of advanced triggers you can use
192. ce Bus An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple instruments in a network under the control of a controller Also known as IEEE 488 bus It transfers data with eight parallel data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Graticule A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes You can use it to visually measure waveform parameters CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Ground GND coupling Coupling option that disconnects the input signal from the vertical system Hardcopy An electronic copy of the display in a format useable by a printer or plotter Hi Res acquisition mode An acquisition mode in which the instrument averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point That average results in a higher resolution lower bandwidth waveform This mode only works with real time non interpolated sampling High The value used as 100 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure ments May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the maximum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found above the mid point Holdoff trigger The time after a trigger signal that elapses before
193. cies as opposed to a lower aliased frequency value Also complex signal shapes that have many harmonics in them such as a triangle or square wave can appear to be OK in the time domain when in fact many of the harmonics in that signal are aliased One way to check for aliasing is to increase the sample rate and observe whether any of the harmonics unwrap to different frequency locations CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Higher order harmonics usually have decreasing magnitudes compared to lower order harmonics Thus if you see a series of increasing harmonic magnitude values as frequency increases then you can suspect that they may be aliased In the spectral math waveform the actual higher frequency components are undersampled and therefore they appear as lower frequency aliases that fold back around the Nyquist point See Figure 3 63 You can test by increasing the sample rate and observing if aliases unwrap to different frequency positions Nyquist frequency 0 Hz 2 sample rate gY Frequency y c j T Z Aliased frequencies Actual frequencies ae Figure 3 63 How aliased frequencies appear in a spectral waveform Another way to observe aliasing if you have a variable frequency signal source is to adjust the frequency slowly while watching the spectral display If some of the harmonics are aliased you will see the h
194. compare different waveforms Math is available on each frame CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Sa Sel Real time he ae A FastFrame Figure 3 16 FastFrame FastFrame is not compatible with these features or modes Equivalent Time Histograms Fast Acquisitions Average Envelope Waveform Database Using FastFrame Consider the following operating characteristics when using FastFrame Acquisitions 5 You can push RUN STOP to terminate a FastFrame sequence If any frames were acquired they are displayed If no frames were acquired the previous FastFrame waveform is displayed Because FastFrame introduces additional processing time into the operation cycle of acquire process and display it is best to use Single Sequence Acquisition see Acquire menu Stop After menu With Single Sequence selected you will see the current acquisition sequence otherwise the display lags the current sequence by one sequence You can also see the current sequence by pushing the RUN STOP button to stop the acquisition CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 49 Acquiring Waveforms m FastFrame reduces the time required before the trigger is rearmed while preserving the individual subrecords a detail lost in Fast Acquisitions which writes all acquired records to a single pixel map To Set FastFrame Mode Overview To set FastFra
195. confirm that there is a signal present for the instrument to acquire Once that is established you can determine how to trigger on it push PUSH TO SET 50 check trigger source setting and so on The instrument recognizes and acts on Force Trigger even when you touch it before the end of pretrigger holdoff However the button has no effect if the acquisition system is stopped Control elements and resources UICE Help Buttons Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date GPIB Configuration LAN Server Status External Signals Instrument Calibration Instrument Diagnostics Multipurpose Knobs User Preferences k Option Installation b Keypd Label TTL Keypd Label ECL Trig Level 14V Trig Level AW Keypd Label JSER Trig Level ooy TRIGGER NS EDGE _ BEvent Atoga Acquire Source Edge Trigger thi Y Sura i B Trig Level L 128 0mV 4 4 Set 50 Ea Coupling Alig V Force Trigger CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview Additional trigger parameters Cont To single trigger Advanced Triggering To trigger on the next valid trigger event and then stop push the SINGLE front panel button Push the SINGLE button each time you want to initiate the single sequence of acquisitions 2 To leave Single Trigger mode push the front panel RUN STOP button The ex
196. ct E Res Envelope EJ Objects Persistence Intensity AutoBright Record View R 75 0 FastAcq WfmDB 75 0 Waveform Display Controls Infinite Variable Off Resel 3 45 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To adjust the 8 intensity 10 11 To select the 12 color palette 13 3 46 To turn Fast Acquisitions on and off Cont Rotate the INTENSITY knob to adjust the intensity of displayed waveforms or touch Intensity and enter the intensity value with the keypad or the multipurpose knob Or Touch the DISP button and select the Appearance tab Touch Waveform AutoBright to toggle between On and Off On automatically sets the intensity maximum to the value of the most frequent event Off lets the displayed brightness depend on the trigger rate creating a display like an analog instrument To change the intensity setting for fast acquisition and waveform database waveforms touch FastAcq WfmDB and enter the intensity value with the keypad or the multipurpose knob Touch the DISP button and select the Colors tab Normal Green and Gray give the appearance of an intensity graded display similar to an analog instrument Spectral and Temp use hue to indicate the frequency of occurrence and to highlight events User and User Palette let you create a custom color palette Choose the Spectral color palette In Fast Acquisition mode Temp and Spectral show more detail than the other
197. cy Suppression threshold Phase vs frequency Figure 3 52 Example of the effects of setting the phase suppression threshold m Group Delay When the phase spectrum is a continuous function of frequency group delay may be computed This is true of impulse response testing where an impulse is fed into the system and the spectrum of the response of the system output is computed Group delay measures how well a system passes a signal in terms of phase distortion Group delay is the negative derivative of the phase with respect to frequency This feature is not useful for analysis of harmonic content of signals where the phase response is not continuous m Impulse Response Testing When performing impulse response testing of a system place the impulse at the zero phase reference position of the acquisition This produces a correct phase display Because the Tek Exponential window has its zero phase reference position at the 20 point more of the impulse response is captured All other window functions have their phase reference position at the 50 position in the gated region There are several ways to adjust the position of the zero phase reference point with respect to your input signal m Adjust the spectral analyzer gate position CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 191 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 192 m Perform fine adjustment using the front panel trigger level control m Adjust th
198. d as in fall time and rise time measure ments May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the minimum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found below the mid point Maximum Amplitude voltage measurement of the maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Mean Amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform Measurement An automated numeric readout that the instrument provides directly from the displayed trace in real time without operator intervention Measurement Parameter One of several controls that the instrument operator can exercise over the automated measurement process Measurement Statistics The accumulation of a history of individual measurement readouts showing the mean and standard deviation of a selected number of samples CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 9 Glossary Glossary 10 Measurement Tracking The process of automatically adjusting the measurement parameters to reflect changes in the trace Mesial The middle point of a range of points The middle measurement point between proximal and distal points for timing measurements and the intermediate height between baseline and topline for amplitude measure ments Minimum Amplitude voltage measurement of the minim
199. d resources To set the 6 Touch the DISP button and select the Objects tab display gt Touch Display Date Time to toggle between On and Off readout On displays the date and time rte Display Date Time options 8 Touch Display Trigger T to toggle between On and Off Display Trigger T On displays the trigger T at the trigger location ea For further 9 Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access a assistance context sensitive overview of the display controls and their setup See Accessing Online Help on page 3 263 for overview of the online help system 3 138 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual a Measuring Waveforms The instrument comes equipped with cursors and automatic measurements to assist you in analyzing your waveforms This section describes these tools and how you use them m Taking Automatic Measurements on page 3 140 describes how you can setup the instrument to automatically measure and display a variety of waveform parameters See Figure 3 34 m Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 151 describes using cursors to make measurements on waveforms See Figure 3 34 m Taking Histograms on page 3 157 describes how to take histograms to view the horizontal or vertical distribution of data on your waveforms Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 160 tells you how to run compensation routines and how to deskew channels to optimize the accuracy of your mea
200. data and To set the transition levels that the clock and data must cross To trigger on setup hold time violations Cont To select the channel that is to contain the data signal touch Data Source and select the source from the list Note Do not select the same channel for both the data and clock sources To select the channel that is to contain the clock signal and the edge to use to clock touch Clock Source and select the source from the list Do not select the same channel for both the data and clock sources To select the edge to use to clock select either Pos or Neg from the Clock Edge window clock levels to be recognized by the instrument 6 3 100 Touch Data Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the data level Touch Clock Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the clock level Note You can set the levels to a value appropriate to either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch either the Data Level or Clock Level and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL The instrument uses the clock level that you set to determine when a clock edge occurs The instrument uses the point the clock crosses the clock level as the reference point from which it measures setup and hold time settings CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources B Event Data Source Chi Y gger Type Trigger Levels shana Y coc eve
201. de gt 5 divisions reference level set at 50 interpolation set to sin x x with risetime gt 1 4 x T and lt 4 x Ts or 150 ps whichever is greater and acquired 10 mV Div where T is the sample period RMS specification is typical Conditions Accuracy Single shot signal Sample acquisition 0 06 sample rate 2 5 ppm x mode Full bandwidth reading RMS 0 3 sample rate 2 5 ppm x reading peak Average acquisition mode gt 100 aver 4 ps 2 5 ppm x reading peak ages Full bandwidth CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 4 Trigger specifications Characteristic Trigger jitter typical TDS7704B CSA7404B amp TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B Edge Trigger Sensitivity Edge Trigger Sensitivity either slope DC coupled typical Description 1 2 ps rms for low frequency fast rise time signal 1 5 ps rms for low frequency fast rise time signal 2 ps rms for low frequency fast rise time signal All sources for vertical scale settings 10 mV div and lt 1 V div Trigger Source Main trigger DC coupled Delayed trigger DC coupled Auxiliary input DC coupled All sources for vertical scale settings 10 Trigger coupling DC NOISE REJ AC HF REJ LF REJ CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Sensitivity lt 0 5 div from DC to 50 MHz CSA7404B TDS7704B TDS7404B lt 1 5 div
202. de on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 You can time qualify a pattern logic trigger That is you Pattern specify a time that the boolean logic function AND NAND More Than OR or NOR must be TRUE To specify the time limit as well A as the type of time qualification More Than or Less Than the Lhu time limit specified for a pattern trigger do the following step Logic function AND becomes TRUE 9 Select Pattern More Than and set the time using the multipurpose knob or keypad Logic function becomes FALSE and triggers When you select TRUE for Less Than and specify a acquisition time the input conditions that you specify must drive the logic function high TRUE for less than the time you ese specify Conversely the TRUE for More Than item requires the boolean function to be TRUE for longer than the time that you specify Note the position of the trigger indicator Triggering occurs at the point that the instrument determines that the logic function that you specify is TRUE within the time that you specify The instrument determines the trigger point in the following manner A iom a IBA 500m Q m t waits for the logic condition to become TRUE jdi fom ee 2 0usidiv Z5 CMS s 40 0ns pt HHXX AND L m t starts timing and waits for t
203. ded Diagnostics Checking the Underlying 1 32 System Optional Extended diagnostics and self calibration perform a more detailed functionality check than the incoming inspection and Power on diagnostics NOTE Allow a 20 minute warm up before running the self calibration Disconnect any attached probes from the instrument Then select the Utilities menu Run the self calibration followed by the extended diagnostics by first selecting the Instrument Calibration see page 3 160 for additional information on signal path compensation and then the Instrument Diagnostics tabs Results of the tests display on their property pages To check the hardware and Windows software underlying the instrument UI user interface run the CheckIt Utilities from the Windows Start menu 1 Minimize the instrument application before running the external diagnostics From the File menu select Minimize 2 Touch Start then touch Programs in the Start Menu Finally touch CheckIt Utilities 3 From the Go To menu select and run the tests you want to perform 4 Check test results All tests except the Modem and CD ROM tests should pass The CD ROM test requires data from the CheckIt Utilities CD 5 Dismiss the CheckIt Utilities Select Exit in the File menu 6 Restart your instrument UI software On the Quick Launch bar touch TekScope CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Accessories amp Options This sect
204. dow Edit Control window f MyscopelVertie Select a control 2 Select the control window that you want to edit and x window then click Open Look in ja MyScope e amp img Es Bill s Window tow Filename Signa Qualty Test Set E Files of type MyScope files tow x Cancel Help Quick Tips m Some controls function differently in a MyScope control window than they do in the standard control window For details see the online help m You can copy MyScope control windows tcw files to other CSA TDS7O000B Series instruments CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 261 MyScope 3 262 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual EEE a Accessing Online Help This manual represents only part of the user assistance available to you the online help system integrated as part of the instrument user interface provides quick to access support for operating this instrument This section describes the help system and how to access it This instrument provides the following help resources online m Help Topics m Programmers Guide Much of the information you need to operate this instrument and use it effec tively is found online where you can quickly access it and display it on your instrument screen You need to access the online documentation for most operating information A few keys to remember when using online help follow m Use online help when you want
205. dow considerations 3 20 acquisition window illustrated 3 21 bar cursors Glossary 7 cursors 3 151 delay 3 108 position 3 67 3 122 3 123 record length 3 122 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 9 Index reference 3 120 3 123 scale 3 21 3 122 zoom 3 130 Horizontal menu FastFrame setup 3 50 3 54 frame count 3 51 frame length 3 50 frame 3 51 3 53 multiple frames 3 51 Horizontal offset overview 3 20 Horizontal reference point Glossary 7 Horizontal scale and offset setting up overview 3 20 Horizontal scale vs record length vs sample interval vs resolution 3 21 Horizontal acquisition setup C 5 Horizontal scale readout 3 120 Image printing 3 251 Impulse response testing 3 191 Incoming inspection test equipment 1 21 Incoming inspection procedure 1 21 1 32 Independent C 11 trigger level 3 69 Independent vs shared Window 3 23 Index reference 3 2 Infinite persistence 3 135 3 136 C 9 display control window 3 134 Initialize Glossary 8 Input 3 221 connector 3 56 Input conditioning background 3 17 Input coupling 3 13 AC 3 13 DC 3 13 GND 3 13 install hard drive 1 12 Installation 1 5 1 20 incoming inspection procedure 1 21 option C 15 software installation 1 13 1 15 Instrument diagnostics C 15 id C 16 setup C 1 Integral math waveform 3 174 applications 3 174 derivation of 3 174 record length of 3 174 Integration waveform 3
206. e Overview Prerequisites 1 2 Set vertical 3 display parameters Set horizontal 5 display parameters 3 124 you can make To display waveforms in the main graticule The instrument must be installed and operating The acquisition system should be set to run continuously Push a channel button to select the waveform it displays A channel button lights when its channel is on Note For information on math waveforms see To Define a Math Waveform on page 3 175 For information on reference waveforms see Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 227 Use the Vertical knobs to achieve a good display of each waveform that you select To make sure the main graticule is selected push the MultiView Zoom button to toggle it off Use the horizontal knobs to scale and position the waveform on screen and to set sample resolution Scaled Horizontally Positioned Horizontally fa PR The Resolution knob sets the record length See discussion of record length on page 3 21 Push PUSH TO SET TO 50 if required to stabilize display Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments Related control elements and resources See page page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup VERTICAL POSITION cH1 POSITION CB POSITION CH
207. e 3 135 select the display style 3 135 select zoom 3 127 set date and time 3 133 set display styles 3 135 set horizontal display parameters 3 124 set up MultiView zoom 3 129 set up zoom 3 129 set vertical display parameters 3 124 setting MultiView zoom controls 3 125 setting zoom controls 3 125 sin x x interpolation 3 134 sine x x 3 135 to display waveforms in the main graticule 3 124 to zoom waveforms 3 126 touch screen 3 120 3 123 trigger level marker 3 133 trigger T 3 133 using display controls 3 132 using the display 3 121 using the waveform display 3 119 using zoom with waveforms 3 126 variable persistence 3 134 3 135 3 136 vectors 3 132 3 135 vertical offset 3 122 vertical position 3 122 vertical scale 3 122 vertical zoom 3 130 waveform display 3 121 3 133 waveform intensity 3 133 waveform interpolation 3 133 waveforms 3 137 xy 3 133 xyz 3 133 yt 3 133 zoom 3 121 3 122 3 125 zoom a waveform 3 128 zoom position 3 130 zoom reset 3 130 3 131 zoom scale 3 130 Dots 3 132 3 134 3 135 C 9 display control window 3 134 DPO Glossary 5 Dragging Glossary 5 Dual display setup 1 17 Dual graticule Glossary 5 Duration 3 183 Duty cycle Glossary 10 Glossary 12 distortion B 5 E ECL 3 84 3 90 3 95 3 100 A Trigger level 3 75 3 76 Edge setup C 8 trigger 3 65 C 7 Glossary 5 Edit menu copy C 3 copy setup C 3 full screen C 3 graticule C 3 measuremen
208. e Cont 9 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types Control elements and resources p p000 See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the the trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 When you select the type Width the instrument will trigger on a pulse narrower or wider than some specified range of time defined by the upper limit and lower limit To set up for width triggering do the following procedures Trigger based on pulse width h o gt From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch Width To specify which channel becomes the trigger source touch Source and select the source from the list To specify the polarity of the pulse touch Pos positive or Neg negative from the window m Pos looks at positive going pulses Neg looks at negative going pulses CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A Eveni A gt B Sec Trigger ype thi Wh Y Level Select 320 0mV Control elements and resources B Event Mode AWidth gt Acquira Source Pulse Width chi v Pulse Width Inside W Level 320 0mV Upper Limit 500 0ps Lower Limit 500 0ps Polarity A ka AWidih Acquire Pulse Width Pulse Width Inside A
209. e from AND to NAND or NOR to OR 7 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see the descriptions Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 To Trigger on Setup When you select the type Setup Hold the instrument uses one channel as a data Hold Time Violations channel the factory default setting is Ch1 another channel as a clock channel Overview Select setup hold triggering default is Ch2 and triggers if the data transitions within the setup or hold time of the clock Setup Hold Trigger on page 3 80 describes how setup hold triggers work To use setup and hold triggering do the following procedures To trigger on setup hold time violations Control elements and resources 1 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri the Trigger control window and touch Select B Event Mode ASetupHold gt Acquire 2 Touch Setup Hold Data Source Setup Hold Trigger Setup Time gger Type Ea E a r SetupHold Y Data Level ok AE wv Hold Time Soloct Me WC 500 0ps Clock Source Trigger Levels ey Clock Edge Shared Y Clock Level iW CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 99 Triggering Overview Define the data 3 source Define the clock 4 source and edge Set the
210. e Save button under Save settings to file in the control window This displays a familiar Windows dialog box for choosing a destination directory naming the file In the Save Instrument Setup As dialog box select the 31 2 Floppy A icon in the Save in drop down list to set the save destination to the floppy disk Note the default file name and then touch the Save button to save the setup to the default file name 9 Change the settings again Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 ps div 10 Verify the file system works a b Touch the Recall Setups tab in the control window Touch the Recall button under Recall settings from file in the control window This displays a familiar Windows dialog box for locating the settings file that you want to recall In the Recall Instrument Setup dialog box select the 31 2 Floppy A icon in the Look in drop down list Locate and double touch in the dialog box on the setup file that you previously stored Verify that the instrument retrieved the saved setup from the disk Do this by noticing the horizontal SCALE is again 1 ms and the waveform shows ten cycles just as it did when you saved the setup 11 Remove the test hookup a b Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the probe compensation output Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 31 Incoming Inspection Perform the Exten
211. e a runt pulse the instrument will trigger Emmm m Eas Eel when on Trigger Type Source Runt Trigger Runt Chi Vv T Occurs W 5 Touch Runt and select from the list a a ui H Lower Level m Occurs triggers on all runt pulses regardless of ene ai eae width stand m Wider triggers only on runt pulses that exceed the gyseressa re ern RUM Acne width you set Enter the width using the multipur Tigger Type Seuss ay pose knob or keypad B ua E kosina nim i 6 To specify the minimum width of the runt pulse touch Lower Level Width and set the value using the multipurpose knob or UaiiumNaamNNN coum peas keypad sev CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 85 Triggering Overview To trigger on a runt pulse Cont Set the 7 To set the two threshold levels used in detecting a runt thresholds pulse touch Upper Limit or Lower Limit and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the values for the upper and lower thresholds Note To use the trigger bar to set the threshold levels touch the Disp button select the Objects tab and then touch Long to display the long trigger bar Note the position of the trigger indicator Triggering occurs at the point the pulse returns over the first lower threshold going negative without crossing the second threshold level upper The polarity selected in the Polarity window determines the order that the threshold must be crossed for a runt
212. e details that can help prevent false steps in setting up to trigger on your waveforms Glitch Trigger A glitch trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse narrower or wider than some specified time It can trigger on glitches of either polarity Or you can set the glitch trigger to reject glitches of either polarity Runt Trigger A runt trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a short pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first You can set the instrument to detect any positive or negative runt pulse or only those wider than a specified minimum width Width Trigger A width trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse that is inside or optionally outside some specified time range defined by the upper limit and lower limit The instrument can trigger on positive or negative width pulses 3 78 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Transition Trigger A transition slew rate trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse edge that transitions slews between two amplitude levels at a rate faster or slower than you specify The instrument can trigger on positive or negative transitions You can also think of transition triggering as triggering based on the slope change in voltage change in time of a pulse edge Window Trigger A window trigger occurs when the trigger source passes into or out of a window de
213. e front panel HORIZONTAL POSITION control Using windows to filter There are eight different spectral analyzer windows Rectangular Hamming Hanning Kaiser Bessel Gaussian Blackman Harris Flattop2 TekExponential In the time domain a window is a bell shaped function equal in length to the gate duration For most windows this function tapers to zero at both ends of the gate region Before computation of the spectral transform the window is multiplied sample by sample times the input data in the gate region The window function affects the shape of the spectral analyzer response in the frequency domain The window functions affect the ability to resolve frequency in the output spectrum and can affect the accuracy of the magnitude and phase measurements Figure 3 53 shows how the time domain record is processed CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Source waveform Waveform data points Point by point multiply ae Window function J L Hanning nN Waveform after 7 Zero fill windowing With windowing Figure 3 53 Windowing the time domain record Accurate magnitude measurements require that the input source waveform be stationary within the gate region This means that waveform parameters such as frequency and amplitude do not change significantly as a function of time within the gate region that is input to the spectral analyzer Also the
214. e gies E hare eel ed gies 3 57 Cleaning Optical Connectors sasine eee cece eee 3 57 Optical Dark Compensation si sa phena a 00 c eee eee eee eee 3 58 COMPCNSAtlOM weer wkie Aue es gee Apcinc ese Dare sede pie gies ore ile gat eel engenders 3 59 Wavelength Filter and Bandwidth Selection 0000s eee 3 59 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Table of Contents Optical Bandwidth gic scsna eee she asta hee ope eth wees gud get bre Since siet aoaie ne 3 60 Bandwidth for Unfiltered Settings 0 0 cece eee eee ee eee 3 61 Bandwidth for Reference Receiver settings 200 eee eee 3 61 Triggering oii cb Sac so Gs Rie Sea cds ed EBEE eee ee cee Saou ds 3 63 Triggering Concepts 2 0 kee eee teen ene E 3 64 The Trigger Event aur iore troei n Recs oth ee aes es ae ea 3 64 Tripper SOULCES o ori raS Saeed cata i eee E SEO AREO Seer eae Canale 3 64 Teer FY POS cri sites assem encode ecto oh cee fo eas Cages eee Gane 3 65 Trig er Modes sys opa cps oaa wi eee SR ae ges ee eae Cee 3 65 Trigger HOMOGE orriei e arae i eee a Cg ee ee Gale 3 66 Trigger Coupling 0 eee ccc cee eee ees 3 67 Horizontal Position icici nike pea ae ee ee Oe ee ek 3 67 Slope And Level a 224s cere a dead wo ead LS era eda Ses WL Peale 3 67 Delayed Trigger System 0 cece eect eee ee 3 68 Triggering from the Front Panel 0 0 cece eee cee eee 3 68 Access Procedures 2 3 cite rei e eh ae
215. e graticule amp waveforms 3 137 customizing the display 3 131 date and time 3 133 defining and displaying waveforms 3 121 display and acquisition controls 3 123 display control 3 120 display elements 3 120 display format 3 133 display persistence 3 132 display settings 3 132 display style 3 132 dots 3 132 3 135 explore the zoom controls 3 125 graticule 3 120 3 137 graticule area 3 120 graticule style 3 132 graticules 3 122 horizontal position 3 122 3 123 horizontal position and the horizontal reference 3 123 horizontal record length 3 122 horizontal reference 3 120 3 123 horizontal scale 3 122 horizontal zoom 3 130 horizontal scale readout 3 120 infinite persistence 3 134 3 135 3 136 intensified samples 3 132 3 135 intensity 3 133 interpolation 3 133 3 134 linear 3 135 linear interpolation 3 134 math colors 3 133 mouse 3 123 mouse and touch screen operation 3 123 normal and persistence displays 3 134 operations on the timebase 3 122 operations on waveforms 3 122 operations performed based on the waveform type 3 122 persistence 3 136 persistence displays 3 134 quick adjust the timebase zoom 3 125 record length 3 122 reference colors 3 132 reset zoom 3 130 3 131 scale 3 122 screen text 3 132 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index select a persistence mode 3 136 select the display persistenc
216. e it Display to on 8 Read the results in the measurements readout lem Ampi 1 96V 3 180 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Take cursor measurements For further assistance CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual To use math waveforms Cont You can also use cursors to measure math waveforms Use the same procedures found under Taking Cursor Measure Related control elements and resources Cursors ments on page 3 151 9 10 11 12 13 _ 4 From the toolbar touch the Cursor button to display the cursors and the cursor control window E Channel 2 a Cursor Type H Bars Waveform Cursor Source Select the Math tab and touch the numbered button for the math waveform that you want to measure Select the cursor type by touching either the H Bars V Bars Waveform or Screen buttons for more information see Taking Cursor Measurements starting on page 3 151 V Bars Sereen Turn the multipurpose knobs to position each cursor on the math waveform to measure the feature that interests you Read the results in the cursor readout The cursor readout is displayed under the multipurpose readouts or in the upper right corner of the graticule area Note Amplitude measurements on a derivative waveform are in volts per second and volt seconds for an integral w
217. e math waveforms produced To Normalize a waveform Source waveform 1 1 6 V Channeli 0 8 V Enter this math expression Ch1 Meas1 Meas2 where Ch1 is the waveform shown at left Meas1 Low of Ch1 Meas2 Amplitude of Ch1 and get this math waveform Normalized math waveform 1 00 V 0 00 V Simulate ac coupling ac component removed before integration Source waveform a 50V Channel 1 1 0 V as Sources Math Waveforms can incorporate the following sources Intg Ch1 Meast ac integration math waveform where Ch1 is the waveform shown at left Meas1 Mean or Cycle Mean of Ch1 m Channel waveforms m Reference waveforms m Measurements automated measurements that measure channel reference histogram or math waveforms m Math waveforms Source Dependencies Math waveforms that include sources as operands are affected by updates to those sources m Shifts in amplitude or DC level of input sources that cause the source to clip also clips the waveform data supplied to the math waveform m Changes to the vertical offset setting for a channel source that clips its data also clips the waveform data supplied to the math waveform m Changes to the acquisition mode globally affects all input channel sources thereby modifying any math waveforms using them For example with the acquisition mode set to Envelope a Chl Ch2 math waveform will receive enveloped channel 1 and chann
218. e position of the gate on the acquired waveform The data in the gate region is input to the spectral analyzer The gate position is the time from the trigger to the zero phase reference position in the gate Gate Duration sets the width of the gate in seconds and it is inversely proportional to the resolution bandwidth For narrow band frequency resolution use a wide gate Gate Length displays the number of samples over the specified gate duration Resolution BW sets the bandwidth in hertz of the filters used in the spectral analysis Resolution BW is inversely proportional to the gate duration Touch Center Freq and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the frequency span to 125 kHz and the center frequency to 62 5 kHz if necessary reduce the sample rate CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources Center Freq 62 5kHz Je Freq Span e 3 217 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Spectral math example cont Set up the 10 From the toolbar touch Cursors cursors f 11 To assign the cursors to the spectral analysis math waveform touch the Cursor Source Math tab and touch the Math 1 button 12 Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the Curs1 Pos to 0 0 Hz and the Curs2 Pos to 125 kHz The cursor readout now indicates the frequency span set in step 9 13 Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the Curs2 Po
219. e the graticule size CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources MultiView Zoom Zoom 10n Zoom 2n Zoom 30n Zoom 40n Histogram Vertical Histogram Horizontal Measurement Gating Zoom Off Cancel B00psipt omy 02 Jul 03 17 00 25 Position 52 2 Hem 500 v 2 HERI 250V 100s 00ns div S s 400psipt s 400 BE 40 0mv 3 127 Displaying Waveforms Overview Zoom a 3 waveform 3 128 To zoom waveforms Cont To zoom a waveform start by using one of two methods to select the axis that you want to adjust m Push the HORIZ button or the VERT button to select the axis that you want to adjust in the zoom graticule m Touch the HORIZ button or the VERT button in the control window to select which axis is controlled by the multipurpose knobs Use the multipurpose knobs to adjust the zoom factor and position of the magnified waveform Note As you change the zoom factor or move the unmagnified waveform relative to the box the instrument alters the magnified display accordingly to include only the waveform portion within the box As you change the zoom factor or move the magnified waveform the instrument scales or moves the box relative to the unmagnified waveform so that the box encloses only the magnified portion of the waveform If multiple waveforms are di
220. ea measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Voltage over time measurement The area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region in volt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Timing measurement The duration of a burst Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Timing measurement The time between the MidRef crossings of two different traces or the gated region of the traces Timing measurement Time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a High Ref value default 90 to a Low Ref value default 10 of its final value Timing measurement for the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second The value used as 100 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements Calculated using either the min max or the histogram method The min max method uses the maximum value found The histogram method uses the most common value found above the mid point Measured over the entire waveform or gated region
221. ecall Wim Displays the Reference Setup window that you use to recall and control reference waveforms Delete All Refs Deletes all reference waveforms Instrument Setup Displays the Instrument Setup window that you use to save instrument setups to nonvolatile memory or to a file recall saved setups or delete saved setups Recall Default Setup Recalls the factory default instrument setup CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 1 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 1 File menu commands Cont Menu Page Setup Print Preview Print Export Setup Select for Export Export 1 Recent Setup File 1 Minimize Shutdown Function Displays the Page Setup dialog box that you use to define the page before sending data to a printer Shows you a preview of the page before you print the page Displays the Print dialog box that you use to send data to your printer Displays the Export Setup window that you use to set up and export images waveforms and measurements Images Select the Palette Color GrayScale or Black amp White View Full Screen or Graticules Only Image Normal or InkSaver Mode or Data Format used when exporting images Waveforms Select the Data Destination channel Source data range Waveform Detail and Data Ordering used when exporting waveforms Measurements Select the Data Format and type of Measurements used when exporting measurements Full Screen bitmap Select from t
222. ecords acquire Persistence style is only available for live waveforms waveforms with data that is being updated reference waveforms are static and do not use persistence Math waveforms use persistence if their sources are live waveforms Interpolation When due to preview zoom or Real Time mode with limited samples the available sample density falls to less than 1 sample per display column the instrument calculates intermediate points by either the linear or sine algorithms and uses them to produce points There are two options for interpola tion m Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired The curve fit assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve Sin x x interpolation is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves It is also appropriate for general use although it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times m Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit The straight line fit assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains Interpolation is used whenever the displayed sample density falls below 1 sample per column If the acquired record length is 500 points zoom of 2x requires interpolation If instead the record
223. ect a control and then click Delete Just the selected control is deleted Click and drag the control to the upper half of the screen off your MyScope control window 12 Click Save and then enter a name for your MyScope control window or use the default name CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources vow Tab_ Rename Tab Taba Tab 1 User Pref Tab 1 New Tab Rename Tab User Pref Delete Save MyScope Fileas O O O O O O O O O n MyScope File As xj Save in A MyScope e cf EA Save wi mit test tew Saye As 2 measure tow a Measurement tow a Mycontrols tew MyScopel tew test tcw test2 tew a Vertical tow File name ns0830 121549 Save as type MyScope Files tew Cancel IT Autoincrement file name Help MyScope Using MyScope Control Windows To Open a MyScope The following section describes how to use MyScope control windows after you have created them Control Window Overview To open a MyScope control window Select from 1 menu Select a control 2 window 3 260 Use the following procedure to open an existing MyScope control window Control elements and resources Select MyScope gt Open Control Window or one of math MyScope Utilities Help the five most recently used MyScope windows Current New Control Window Open Control Window Edit Cont
224. ed histogram on and off Select Linear to display histogram data linearly Bin counts smaller than the maximum counts are scaled linearly by dividing the bin count by the maximum bin count Histogram Linear Log Select Log to display histogram data logarithmically Bin counts smaller than the maximum counts are scaled logarithmically Logarithmic scaling provides better visual details for bins with low counts CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 159 Measuring Waveforms Overview Set histogram limit controls Histogram To start and reset histogram counting Cont o Touch Adjust Histogram Box Limits and use the Top Limit Bottom Limit Left Limit and Right Limit controls to set the size of the histogram box The histogram box selects the section of the waveform used for histograms 10 Touch Adjust Histogram Box Location and use the X Location and Y Location controls to set the location of the histogram box Measurements and a brief description of each Optimizing Measurement Accuracy To Compensate the Instrument Overview Prerequisites 1 3 160 To compensate the instrument Related control elements and resources Bottom Lim 20 164 Leit Limit 80 0ps Adjust His Right Limit 8 Histogram Sealing 5 a x Location 80 0ps Histo Size Table B 1 on page B 1 includes a list of the available histogram measurements The proced
225. edure Export a setup for sharing with a second instrument The Save Setup and the Recall Setup control windows provide for including and viewing comments with your saved setups You can store information readable upon recall that describes each setup you save and its intended application If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name setup files The Save and Recall Setup windows include the Virtual Keyboard When you touch or click a setup name the instrument displays a keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the setup path name setup file name and comment The instrument excludes the following items when saving setups m Waveforms in Ch1 to Ch4 and references Refl Ref4 Control settings scale position and so on are saved but not the waveform data Upon recall of the setup the settings are applied but the data is not restored CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 221 Data Input Output m Waveforms in Math Waveforms Math1 Math4 Control settings and the math expression are retained but not the waveform data Upon setup recall however the recalled math waveform expressions will be applied but math waveform data is not restored m User Options that are stored in the Windows Registry These include all options accessed by first selecting Utilities menu bar and then User Preferences Utilities menu You cannot
226. ees Waveform Data Range 12 In the Waveform data range window select the data to include in the exported files C Samples P to ft Save Samples between Cursors Samples to enter the data range of the data to Paes E include in the exported files All g Number of Samples 5000 Save Samples between Cursors to include data A FastFrame Data Range between the cursors in the exported files C Frems R oh All Frames Save Samples in Zoom Area to include data in zoom area 1 2 3 or 4 in the exported files All to include all data in the exported files 3 248 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont 13 If using FastFrame select the frame range to include in the copied files All Frames to include all frames in the copied files m Frames to enter a range of frames to include in the copied files Setup to copy 14 Select the Measurements tab to display the Measure measurements ments control window 15 Select Displayed Measurements to copy measurements that are displayed on screen select Measurements Snapshot to copy a snapshot of all measurements or select Histogram Data to copy histogram data in comma separated values format 16 Touch Data Format and select the data format text or numeric from the list Copy your file 17 Touch OK to accept your changes and copy the file to the clipboa
227. eform scale factors Data Ordering To first x B ottom first Top first rotate 90 degrees Bottom first rotate 90 degrees 3 239 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources 15 Inthe Waveform data range window select the data to Waveform Data Range include in the exported files Samples to enter the data range of the data to Save Samples between Cursors include in the exported files x oe SamplesinZoom Aiea T z m Save Samples between Cursors to include data Number of Samples 5000 between the cursors in the exported files Save Samples in Zoom Area to include data in zoom area 1 2 3 or 4 in the exported files All to include all data in the exported files 16 If using FastFrame select the frame range to include in an la k 1 o the exported files G Tie All Frames to include all frames in the exported files m Frames to enter a range of frames to include in the exported files 3 240 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Setup to export 17 Select the Measurements tab to display the Measure measurements ments control window 18 Touch Data Format and select the data format text or numeric from the list 19 Select the Measurements that you want to export Displayed Measurements exports measurements that are di
228. eforms Overview Set the magnitude scale To define a spectral math waveform Cont 9 10 11 12 Select the Mag tab To select the vertical scale factor touch dB dBm or Linear The units will be dB W A V or whatever units are attached to the spectral analyzer input waveform dB Magnitude is displayed using log scale expressed in dB relative to the reference level offset m Linear Magnitude is displayed using units equal to the source units dBm Reference level offset is set to predefined values for dBm see next step Note You can adjust the scale and position by first touching the waveform handle and then using the multipurpose knobs to adjust the scale and position To set the reference level touch Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the reference level Note Reference level is the value at the top of the display screen It only applies to magnitude waveforms Adjusting the reference level positions the waveform with respect to the top of the display but does not change the position of the waveform with respect to its ground reference To set the reference level offset touch Level Offset and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the offset Note Offset determines where zero dB is in the output waveform Changing offset moves the waveform with respect to its ground reference When the input is equal to the offset it will display as zero dB i
229. eforms Application Commands Table C 11 lists the commands available from the applications menu Table C 11 Application menu commands Menu Restore Application Installed application 1 Installed application 2 Function Restores the minimized window of the currently running application Starts an installed application CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Utilities Commands Table C 12 lists the commands available from the Utilities menu Table C 12 Utilities menu commands Menu Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date GPIB Configuration LAN Server Status External Signals Instrument Calibration Instrument Diagnostics Multipurpose Knobs User Preferences Option Installation Submenu Deassign Multipurpose Knobs Momentary Readouts Always Show Readouts Never Show Readouts Readout Setup Function Erases all setup and reference memory Displays a menu that you use to set the instrument date and time Displays a control window that you use to set the GPIB talk listen mode and the bus address Displays the server status window that allows you to turn the server on and off Choose the source and polarity of the AUX OUT signal Choose the internal or an external clock reference Whenever you change the reference you must perform a signal path compensation see page 3 160 Displays a window that you use to perform signal path compensatio
230. el 2 data and therefore will also be an envelope waveform 3 170 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Clearing the data in a waveform source causes a baseline ground to be delivered to any math waveform that includes that source until the source receives new data Expression Syntax You build math waveforms using the Define Edit Expression control window To help you create valid math waveforms this window blocks most illegal entries by disabling any window element that would create an invalid entry in the math waveform expression The syntax that follows describes valid math expressions which can be quite complex in excess of 100 characters long lt MathWaveform gt lt Expression gt lt Expression gt lt UnaryExpression gt lt BinaryExpression gt lt UnaryExpression gt lt UnaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt UnaryOperator gt lt Expression gt lt BinaryExpression gt lt Term gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt Scalar gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt Term gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Scalar gt lt Term gt lt Waveform gt lt Expression gt lt Scalar gt lt Integer gt lt Float gt lt Meas Result gt lt Variable gt lt Waveform gt lt ChannelWaveform gt lt Reference Waveform gt lt MathWaveform gt lt ChannelWaveform gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 lt Reference Waveform gt
231. elationships between these horizontal elements for 10 division waveforms follow 1 Time Duration seconds 10 divs window size x Horizontal scale sec div CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 21 Acquiring Waveforms 3 22 2 Time Duration seconds Sample Interval seconds sample x Record Length samples where Time Duration is the horizontal acquisition window time duration and Sample Interval sec sample Resolution sec sample 1 Sample Rate samples sec In 2 above note that it is Sample Interval that varies to accommodate the window time duration and its scale setting and the Record Length setting as these latter two elements can be set by you These elements behave as follows m If Record Length or Time Duration vary Sample Interval varies to accom modate up to highest sample rate lowest sample interval highest resolution m If Sample Interval reaches its lower limit Record Length must decrease if Time Duration decreases you set faster scale settings or Time Duration must increase forcing slower scale settings if Record Length increases you set longer record lengths The equation becomes Maximum Record Length Time Duration Min Sample Interval For example at 200 ps div and 10 divisions the record length must be 500 points Max Rec Length 10 divs x 200 ps div 4 ps sample Max Rec Length 500 samples NOTE As implied from the operation
232. ence time Display the persistence control window Display Style Choose Dots to display each waveform as a series of dots Choose Vectors to display vectors or lines between the dots Appearance Choose Intensified Samples to display actual samples as bright dots Screen Text Enter text that you can display and position on screen Also see Screen Text Label The Waveform on page 3 229 Colors Choose Normal to use system colors for best viewing Choose Green to display variable persistence waveforms in shades of green Choose Gray to display variable persistence waveforms in shades of gray Choose Temp temperature to display variable persistence waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in Colors warmer colors reds Choose Spectral to display variable persistence waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in blue shades Choose User to use custom palette colors for the selected source Choose User Palette Edit to display the window in which you can set custom hue lightness and saturation for the selected source Colors Choose Default to use the default system color white for reference waveforms Colors Choose Inherit to use the same color for the reference waveform as the original waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms Table 3 8 Customizable display elements Cont Display attribute Access Menu name Entry Mat
233. ent would occur before the next Ch2 event 3 112 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont Control elements and resources File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons fevrme PP End of trigger delay Ba Aig ETNA ey ee eee B event oystav i 50 S 2 0ns pt Reset event eee Ons p A gt B Sequence Horizontal Event Ref Pt pcgeunese ae Type Transition A Only POENA S s o Transition Pos v AE t Source Threshold es ah Cha Y V rig After Time n Trig Delay Position Reset A gt B sequence if Ic 1 Ops 50 0 is True B Trig Level 208 0m To reset 4 If the State Type of Trigger Reset is selected touch Trigger Reset sequential Source and select the source of the state from the list aed ew triggers Cont Source Threshold 0 0V lequence if logic state Touch State and select the True level of the event from the list Trigger Reset Type State State V Source Chi Y Reset A gt B sequence if Ic is True Touch Threshold and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the threshold that the source must be in to reset the triggers Trigger Reset Type State State V ef Source chi v Reset A gt B sequence if Ic is True In the example the runt trigger A event occurs on the falling edge of the pulse on Ch1 The trigger delay expires
234. ent to a network to enable printing file sharing internet access and other communications functions Before you make the connection do the following steps to enable the default network access to the instrument Front panel Rear panel Tektronix J L Jo a Sceoc g ee ol lt a ea oO oO 3s 2 5o 9 85 S ole 1222 o eles 233a 1 P 3 Power 5 down O CJ 2 Connect a keyboard and mouse fa fo fae E Q Ojo olo e S B232 eB o 5 ool o ejs 3 2 309A Power O on Figure 1 5 Enabling your LAN and connecting to a network 4 As the instrument begins to boot press the F2 key on the keyboard repeatedly until the message Entering SETUP Loading SETUP on some instruments appears 5 Inthe BIOS Setup Utility use the right arrow key on the keyboard to highlight the Advanced menu at the top of the screen 6 Use the arrow down key to highlight Peripheral Configuration in the Advanced screen and then press Enter 1 16 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation 7 Use the arrow down key to highlight Onboard LAN in the Peripheral Configuration screen and then press Enter 8 Use the arrow up or down key to highlight E
235. ents User Manual 3 37 Acquiring Waveforms Table 3 2 Sampling mode selection Channels on Time base gt 10ns gt 20ns 5ns 2 5 ns lt 1 25 ns Real time sampling Real time sampling Real time sampling Equivalent Time or Interpolated Sampling Real time sampling Real time sampling Equivalent Time or Interpolated Sampling Equivalent Time or Interpolated Sampling 3or4 Real time sampling Equivalent Time or Interpolated Sampling Equivalent Time or Interpolated Sampling Equivalent Time or Interpolated Sampling 1 This table assumes a 500 point record length Longer record lengths cause the switch to equivalent time to occur at slower time per division settings 2 gt means slower than lt means faster than 3 38 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms ne PF ea VN 1st Acquisition cycle SL JL LL 3rd Acquisition cycle ee ee nth Acquisition cycle Figure 3 12 Equivalent time sampling 2nd Acquisition cycle The type of equivalent time sampling the instrument uses is called random equivalent time sampling Although it takes the samples sequentially in time it takes them randomly with respect to the trigger Random sampling occurs because the instrument sample clock runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The instrument takes samples independently of the trigg
236. ents and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed and operating Acquisition system should be set to Run and the J vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropri aa ately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 23 for acquisition setup To select the 2 Push the EDGE button to select edge type triggering TRIGGER gt trigger type i L Sven Push ADVANCED to bring up the Trigger control window povare where you can select and set up other trigger types SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE cut POS onz Cac Cens HF REJ CARM D Ga C HEADY REJECT wa CE A Gee HET a Ww CO KD To select the 3 Push the TRIGGER SLOPE button to toggle between TRIGGER gt trigger slope POS and NEG a i isi iti i SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE POS triggers on a rising edge positive going signal m NEG triggers on a falling edge negative going CH Gr CJ EADY signal You can also set the slope in the Trigger setup window w rks m Either triggers on both the rising edge and falling w Oo O edge of the signal select Either in the setup window To set level 4 To manually change the trigger level when edge TRIGGER gt triggering or certain threshold levels when logic or pulse triggering turn the trigger LEVEL knob SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE You can also set the level in the Trigger setup window Using the Trigger Setup window you can make trigger C
237. er Manual XV Preface Related Manuals and Online Documents This manual is part of a document set of standard accessory manuals and online documentation this manual mainly focuses on installation background and user information needed to use the product features See the following list for other documents supporting instrument operation and service Manual part numbers are listed in Accessories amp Options on page 1 33 Document name Description Online Help An online help system integrated with the User Interface application that ships with this product The help is preinstalled in the instrument Reference A quick reference to major features of the instrument and how they operate Programmer Online Guide An alphabetical listing of the programming commands and other information related to controlling the instrument over the GPIB This document is available as both an online help program and as a PDF manual Service Manual Describes how to service the instrument to the module level This optional manual must be ordered separately Option SM Serial Mask Testing Describes how to use serial mask testing and serial pattern triggers Option ST Serial Pattern Trigger User Manual 1 Located on the Product Software CD See CD instructions for installation instructions For more information on how the product documentation relates to the instru ment operating interfaces and features see Documentation Map on page 2 2 xvi CSA7
238. er levels trigger modes or different acquisition modes Acquisition preview waveforms cannot be saved as data Using the Display Read the following topics they provide the details that can help you set up the instrument display so that it best supports your data analysis tasks Waveform Display In general the method of displaying a waveform is to define the waveform if necessary math and reference waveforms and then turn it on Table 3 6 summarizes this process as it applies to the different waveforms Table 3 6 Defining and displaying waveforms Waveform To define Channel Chi Ch4 Channels are predefined Reference Refi Ref4 Define an active reference waveform by m Saving a channel reference or math waveform to one of locations Ref1 Ref4 Recalling a waveform previously saved to a file into one of locations Ref1 Ref4 Both of these operations can be performed from the File menu Math Mathi Math4 Define a math waveform by creating a math waveform using existing sources channel math and reference waveforms and measurements This operation can be performed by touching the Math button and then selecting Define Edit Expression CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual To turn on Push the Vertical CH button to toggle the channel on or off From the Refs setup control window touch Display to toggle display of the selected reference on or off When defining a
239. er position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Interpolation Your instrument can interpolate between the samples it acquires In equivalent time sampling it interpolates only when it does not have all the real samples it needs to fill its displayed waveform When setting ZOOM to progressively larger amounts of expansion the instrument then interpolates to create the intervening points in the displayed waveform If the time per division is set fast enough to require equivalent time but equivalent time is disabled the instrument interpo lates points There are two options for interpolation linear or sin x x The instrument can also equivalent time sample to acquire more samples see Equivalent Time Sampling on page 3 37 Linear interpolation Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains Sin x x interpolation Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve Sin x x is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves Actually it is appropriate for general use although it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals
240. erences and setups use Tek Secure To clear references The instrument must be powered up You must have access to a waveform saved by the instrument Control elements and resources m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 From the toolbar touch Refs and select the tab Ref 1 to Ref 4 of the reference that you want to delete Touch Delete to delete the reference waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Save Wim to Refl af 2 Ref3 Ref4 A Recall Refl fron Display Position f CCN Scale Label toy Lv ff a Horz Pos 50 0 Ref1 3 233 Data Input Output Overview To clear references Cont Control elements and resources Delete a 4 To display the Delete Reference Waveform window Recall Reft from File reference from the Delete Wfm File window touch Delete ae u waveform file Delete Wim File Slim Cios The Delete Reference Waveform window allows Delete Reference Waveform X navigation to directories lists waveform files in the Lookin O Wavetorms zl c mv j j j j 040427 _063412_Chi wf directory and provides for selection of a waveform file alee sere tee BI PHX_REF1 WFM E TekScope000_Ch1 wfm 8 TekScope000_Ch2 wfm S TekScope001 wfm 5 TekScope wfm File name Delete Files of type Waveform Files wim Cancel Help Find the file 5 Use the Look in d
241. ering on a Setup Hold time violation Triggering with Horizontal Delay off Triggering with Horizontal Delay on Reset trigger limitation ccc eee cece ees Trigger and Horizontal Delay summary Display elements 0 cece cece cece cn cncees Horizontal Position includes time to Horizontal Reference si iidiciee vis cede eed eae ee bbe ee kee ee aes Figure 3 34 Graticule Cursor and Automatic measurements Figure 3 35 Annotated display ccc ecececereceees Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 values Figure 3 40 data Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 High Low tracking methods 0eeeees Reference level calculation methods Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes Components determining Time cursor readout Pass Fail mask testing 0 cece cece wee cnees Spectral analysis of an impulse 06 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform Derivative math waveform eeceeeeees Peak peak amplitude measurement of a derivative waveform 856658 od id 4d oe eo soodes wea ee eee eee eee ees Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 control Duration and resolution control effects Definition of gate parameters 000 econ Effects of frequency doma
242. ermines the number of pretrigger and posttrigger samples samples before the reference point are pretrigger samples and those after the reference are posttrigger samples CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m The Horizontal Delay that you set determines the time from the trigger point to the Horizontal Reference m The horizontal scale and waveform record length number of samples that you set determines the horizontal size of the window relative to any waveform allowing you to scale it to contain a waveform edge a cycle or several cycles Sample interval First sampled and digitized point in record Trigger point _ acquisition Horizontal delay gt Horizontal window Horizontal reference Horizontal position Figure 3 4 Horizontal Acquisition window definition Horizontal Scale Versus Record Length Versus Sample Interval Versus Resolution These parameters all relate to each other and specify the horizontal acquisition window Because the horizontal acquisition window must fit in the 10 horizontal division display for most cases you just set the duration of the horizontal acquisition window 10 divs x the scale setting as described in 1 below By also setting a record length in samples you indirectly set the resolution sample interval sample rate for the horizontal acquisition window waveform record The r
243. es a Copy Setup Xx images Waveforms Measurements Palette Image Color C Normal C Black amp White InkSaver Mode Enhanced rare Data Format Eull Screen Graticule s Only Bitmap Readouts Below Graticule Copy Cancel Help a Copy Setup x Images Waveforms Measurements Waveform Data Range Data Destination lz i C Samples 1 to f Spreadsheet C Save Samples between Cursors C Save SamplesinZoomArea 1 Source al Channel 1 E Number of Samples 5000 FastFrame Data Range c Waveform Detail Data Ordering Include waveform scale factors Copy OK Cancel Help 3 247 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Setup to copy 9 Touch Source Waveform and select the source of the Source waveform waveforms waveform a channel math or reference waveform to Cont copy from the list Channel 1 Channel 2 Shannel 3 Shannel 4 Math 1 Math 2 waveform Detail 10 If you want waveform scale factors included in your T Include waveform Mathcad files touch Include waveform scale factors scale factors 11 Touch Data Ordering and select the data order top Data Ordering first bottom first top first rotate 90 degrees or bottom first rotate 90 degrees from the list Top first Bottom first Top first rotate 90 degrees Bottom first rotate 90 degr
244. es required to complete a single acquisition sequence and the minimum number of samples required to complete a mask test If not using display persistence samples sets the minimum number of samples that is required to release the waveform to the display Similar to FastFrame selecting RunStop will cause the waveform to be displayed with what has been acquired so far The actual number of samples acquired is determined by the Samples setting the selected Record Length and if in equivalent time acquisitions the actual number of samples acquired in an acquisition For example in real time acquisition mode with the entire trace displayed if the Record Length is set to 5000 points and Samples is set to 5001 points then two acquisitions are required and 10000 points are acquired If Samples is set to 5000 points one acquisition is required and 5000 points are acquired If Samples is set to 4999 points one acquisition is required and 5000 points are acquired For Single Sequence and Mask Pass Fail Testing a sample is only counted if the sample would be displayed in the graticule area In Single Sequence all eligible samples in an acquisition are counted In Mask Test with infinite persistence on all acquisitions acquired in a batch are counted In nondisplay persistence the minimum number of samples for the waveform may include multiple batches of acquisitions In ET mode fewer samples are acquired per acquisition but more acquisi tions
245. escription 5 years 3 5 in floppy disk drive 1 44 MB capacity Removeable hard disk drive 20 GB capacity CD RW drive 1 GB Description lt 600 Watts 900 VA 100 to 240 V 10 50 Hz to 60 Hz 115 V 10 400 Hz CAT II Either one of the following sizes can be used each size requires a different fuse cap Both fuses must be the same type Line and Neutral are fused UL198G and CSA C22 2 No 59 fast acting 8 A 250 V Tektronix part number 159 0046 00 Bussman ABC 8 Littelfuse 314008 IEC 127 sheet 1 fast acting F high breaking capacity 6 3 A 250 V Tektronix part number 159 0381 00 Bussman GDA 6 3 Littelfuse 21606 3 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 25 Appendix A Specifications Table A 11 Mechanical specifications Characteristic Weight Benchtop configuration Rackmount kit Dimensions Benchtop configuration Rackmount configuration Option 1R Cooling Required clearances Construction material A 26 Description 17 7 kg 39 lbs instrument only 19 1 kg 42 lbs with fully accessorized pouch 38 8 kg 85 5 Ibs when packaged for domestic shipment 18 6 kg 41 lbs rackmounted instrument 5 6 kg 12 5 lbs kit packaged for domestic shipment With front cover 278 mm 10 95 in height 330 mm 13 in with feet extended 455 mm 17 9 in width 435 mm 17 13 in depth With rack handles 267 mm 10 5 in height 502 mm 19 75 in w
246. et the Automatic setup of the acquisition 3 15 Instrument triggering systems and input channels To Reset the Instrument Resetting the instrument 3 16 To Get More Help Accessing the online help 3 16 Input Conditioning Background information on input signal 3 17 Background conditioning Setting Acquisition Background and setup of acquisition Controls controls and roll mode To Set Acquisition Modes Set up of the acquisition system 3 29 To Start and Stop Starting and stopping acquisitions 3 32 Acquisition To Set Roll Mode Setting up roll mode 3 33 Acquisition Control Background information on acquisition 3 34 Background controls Using Fast Acquisition Overview and setup of Fast Acquisition 3 40 Mode mode To Turn Fast Acquisitions Turning fast acquisitions on and off 3 44 On and Off Using FastFrame Overview and setup of FastFrame 3 48 To Set FastFrame Mode Setting up FastFrame mode 3 50 Time Stamping Frames Setting up FastFrame time stamps 3 52 O E Converter Overview and reference to documentation 3 55 CSA7000B Series only on using optical signals and the O E Converter Front Panel Connectors Overview of O E Converter front panel 3 56 CSA7000B Series only connectors Wavelength Filter and Overview of optical controls Bandwidth Selection CSA7000B Series only Optical bandwidth Overview of optical bandwidth 3 60 CSA7000B Series only CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Overview
247. ette is Spectral or Temp CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources Frame Viewing Selected Frame Source Chi V Live Frame Tracking FastFrame Frame 2 Multiple Frames ame Viewing m Frame Tracking On c Live Rec Length La FastFrame Frame Count Frame Viewing FastFrame Selected Frame Source o chi Live Rec Length Rianne au 5000 tart Frame q Frame Tracking Frame Count Time Stamps Reference Frame Source ENEE Frame Time Stamns Reference Frame Source Chi Y Frame 1 Readouts Time Stamns Reference Frame Source Chi V Frame 1 Readouts i Readouts Selection Controls HoriztAcq SetUp Selection Controls HoriztAcy Selection Controls Horiztacq 3 51 Acquiring Waveforms Time Stamping Frames Overview Prerequisites 1 Turn readouts 3 3 52 on or off Use Time Stamps to display the absolute trigger time for a specific frame and the relative time between triggers of two specified frames To start FastFrame Time Stamps do the following steps Time stamping frames Control elements and resources 2 FastFrame mode should be set up as described in the previous example Turn on FastFrame as described on page 3 50 Frame Viewing pp Time Stamos ejection In the Time Stamps controls touch Readouts to toggle Selected Frame Frame Reference Frame
248. f 3 66 trigger location and level from display 3 73 trigger modes 3 65 trigger on a pattern 3 95 Trigger on a window 3 92 trigger sources 3 64 3 104 trigger status from acquisition readout 3 72 trigger status from trigger status lights 3 72 trigger types 3 65 3 104 triggering concepts 3 64 triggering from the front panel 3 68 triggering with horizontal delay off 3 104 triggering with horizontal delay on 3 106 3 107 using sequential triggering 3 104 width 3 78 window trigger 3 79 Triggering from the front panel 3 68 True for less than main trigger menu 3 97 True for more than main trigger menu 3 97 TRUE A Trigger control window 3 96 3 99 TTL 3 84 3 90 3 95 3 100 A Trigger level 3 76 trigger level 3 75 c ndershoot Glossary 10 ndo autoset C 3 C 5 npacking 1 5 pdate software 1 3 pgrade software 1 3 ser files backing up 1 11 ser palette C 10 ser preferences C 15 SER A Trigger level 3 75 3 76 sing the acquisition controls 3 24 sing the waveform display 3 119 tilities menu AUX Out configuration C 15 external signals C 15 GPIB configuration C 15 instrument calibration C 15 instrument diagnostics C 15 multipurpose knobs C 15 option installation C 15 reference selection C 15 set time and date C 15 Tek Secure C 15 SERE PRSS ERRES user preferences C 15 V Value count C 12 Value mean C 12 Variable persistence 3 135 3 136 C 9 display control window
249. f low power signals can be enhanced by combining serial trigger and signal averaging to reduce random noise You can specify patterns with up to 64 bits including don t care bits The serial trigger system can be clocked from an external source or from internal clock recovery Serial pattern trigger operates on NRZ encoded signals at data rates up to 1 25 Gb s For detailed information on using serial pattern triggering to trigger on your serial pattern data signals see the CSA7000B amp TDS7000B Series Options SM Serial Mask Testing and Option ST Serial Triggering User Manual NOTE The instrument will attempt to acquire lock once If the input data is disrupted removed or heavily distorted the instrument may not acquire lock or may lose lock If the recovered clock is not locked to the incoming data the waveform display will not be stable Once the input data is available press the PUSH SET TO 50 knob to force the instrument to reacquire lock CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 117 Triggering 3 118 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual y Displaying Waveforms This instrument includes a flexible customizable display that you can control to display the waveforms that you acquire This section presents the following topics m Using the Waveform Display m Setting MultiView Zoom Controls m Customizing the Display Acquisition system Display Wave
250. f the magnitude is less than the threshold then its phase is set to zero for an example see Figure 3 52 on page 3 191 Threshold emma The Suppression Threshold bullet on page 3 190 provides additional information on phase suppression 3 210 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Set time and frequency domain control tracking Select the window type To define a spectral math waveform Cont 17 Touch the Control tab 18 To allow changing time and frequency domain controls for one math waveform to change the same controls for another math waveform touch the Track Time Freq Domain Controls buttons to toggle them on or off 19 To select the window type touch Window Type and select from the list See Using Windows to Filter on page 3 192 for a description of the available FFT windows Rectangular Best type of window for resolving frequencies that are very close to the same value Best type for measuring the frequency spectrum of nonrepetitive signals and measuring frequency components near DC Hamming Hanning Blackman Harris Kaiser Bessel and Flattop2 These window are based on cosine series Each has a different RBW and spectral leakage characteristics Use the window which best highlights the features you want to observe in the spectrum Gaussian Best localization in both time and frequency Tek Exponential
251. f the waveform that was first differentiated The math waveform derived from the sampled waveform is computed based on the following equation Y Kuen Xa e Where X is the source waveform Y is the derivative math waveform T is the time between samples Since the resultant math waveform is a derivative waveform See Figure 3 45 its vertical scale is in volts second its horizontal scale is in seconds The source signal is differentiated over its entire record length therefore the math waveform record length equals that of the source waveform HS 50 0mV Q 10 0us div HMM 221MV s 10 Cus 25 0MS s 40 0ns pt 7 0mv Figure 3 45 Derivative math waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Cursor Measurements You can also use cursors to measure derivative wave forms Use the same procedure as is found under Take cursor measurements on page 3 181 When using that procedure note that the amplitude measurements on a derivative waveform will be in volts per second rather than in volt seconds as is indicated for the integral waveform measured in the procedure SLA S S S A S S A S E E O E E E S D U Ae a a ee ann Math Position 20div 7 Math Scale Z 0083MV 5 mi PEENE ES E E E E E N EN PE EE OE E E E E SANE A E ED ENE Ia 50 0mV 2 IMD 2 01Mvs 10 0 IM PEPR 5 8MV s Figure 3 46 Peak peak amplitude measurement of a derivative
252. ff 3 84 To trigger on a glitch Cont To specify whether to trigger on glitches narrower or greater than the width you specify touch Glitch Width and select from the list m Trig if Width Less Than will trigger only on pulses narrower than the width you specified m Trig if Width Greater Than will trigger only on pulses wider than the specified width To set the Level that the glitch must cross to be recognized by the instrument touch Glitch Trigger Level and use the multipurpose knobs keypad or front panel LEVEL knob to set the glitch trigger level Note You can set the level to a value appropriate to either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch Level and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger on page 3 102 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 Control elements and resources Glitch Width Less Than Greater Than Source Glitch Width Accept Y Glitch Trigger T A l n S Level 2 J a ic Width 3 pri 2 0ns H Trigger if Logic Y Pattern See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 CSA7000B Series am
253. fined by two thresholds The trigger can be time or logic qualified Timeout Trigger A timeout trigger occurs when the trigger source does not detect an expected pulse transition If the pulse transition occurs prior to a specified timeout time the expected case then no trigger results Pattern Trigger A pattern trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function that you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option FALSE When you use a pattern trigger you define m The precondition for each logic input logic high low or do not care the logic inputs are channels 1 2 3 and 4 m The Boolean logic function select from AND NAND OR and NOR m The condition for triggering whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean function becomes TRUE logic high or FALSE logic low and whether the TRUE condition is time qualified The pattern and state logic choices are summarized in Table 3 5 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 79 Triggering Table 3 5 Pattern and state logic AND Clocked AND If all the preconditions selected for the Z logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers NAND qt Clocked NAND If not all of the preconditions selected m for the logic inputs3 are TRUE then the instrument triggers T OR 3H L Clocked OR If any of the preconditions selected for 29 the logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers 3 gt N
254. form transform system Horizontal timebase Using the Waveform Display The waveform shown below is displayed as part of the User Interface UT application The UI application takes up the entire screen of the instrument and the graticule takes up most of the UI application Some terms that are useful in discussing the display follow CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 119 Displaying Waveforms 3 120 4 Horizontal reference 2 Graticule ee 47 3 1 Display lt P IETT a y a a ran Area 3 Horizontal scale readout File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons Tek Run Sample 02 Jul 03 16 28 56 Position Factor E Assign Knobs Zoomi Display On Zoom Source Aq Y Me 500mV 2 I 250mV 1000ns 2 0us div 250MS s_ 4 Ons pt 7 40 0mVv Figure 3 32 Display elements 1 Display area The area where the waveforms appear The display comprises the timebase and graticules the waveforms histograms and some readouts 2 Graticule A grid marking the display area When MultiView Zoom is on the upper graticule displays unmagnified waveforms and the lower graticule displays magnified waveforms 3 Horizontal scale readout Displays the scale or magnified and unmagnified waveforms 4 Horizontal reference A control that you can position to set the point around whic
255. forms in shades of gray Choose Temp temperature to display fast acquisition and waveform database waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in warmer colors reds Choose Spectral to display fast acquisition and waveform database waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in blue shades Choose User to display a control window to design your own colors Displays a window that you use to set hue lightness and saturation for the selected object The Reset button allows you to reset the palette to factory defaults The Setup button displays the Color Setup window Toggle on and off the display of a T at the trigger point Toggle on and off the waveform display Toggle on and off the display of the system date and time Toggle on and off remote display support VNC or pcAnywhere must be installed on the instrument and on the remote PC When Display Remote is enabled display updates control window accessing and menu items are slow CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Cursors Commands Table C 7 lists the commands available from the Cursors menu Table C 7 Cursor menu commands Menu Cursor Controls Cursors On Cursor Type Cursor Mode Cursor Position Cursor Setup Submenu H bars V bars Wave form Screen Independent Track Measure Commands Function Displays the Cursor Controls window that you use to set up and cont
256. ft Windows software platform the instrument application program starts automatically when you apply power to the instrument You can minimize the instrument application and take full advantage of the built in PC to run other applications Moving waveform images and data into other applications is as simple as a copy paste operation Dedicated Front Panel Controls The front panel contains knobs and buttons to provide immediate access to the most common instrument controls Separate vertical controls are provided for each channel The same functions are also available through the screen interface Data Storage and I O The instrument has a removeable hard disk drive a CD RW and a floppy disk drive that can be used for storage and retrieval of data The instrument has GPIB USB Centronics and Ethernet ports for input and output to other devices Online Help The instrument has a complete online help system that covers all features The help system is context sensitive help for the displayed control window is automatically shown if you touch the help button Graphical aids in the help windows assist you in getting to the information you need You can also access the help topics through a table of contents or index Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Characteristic Input channels Input coupling Input impedance DC coupled VSWR typical Description Four Channel input is disconnected from input termination when
257. g a new Access to virtual keyboard name replacing the default file name Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields Recall your Touch the Recall button to recall the setup file To cancel setup without recalling a setup touch the Cancel button Cancel Help o For further 9 For more help on recalling setups touch the Help assistance button in the toolbar to display contextual help on screen See page 3 263 to learn about using online help Saving and Recalling Waveforms This instrument can save any number of waveforms limited only by the space you have to store them By saving a waveform you can recall it at a later time for comparison evalua tion and documentation This capability is helpful when you want to m Recall a waveform for further evaluation or comparison with other wave forms CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 227 Data Input Output m Extend the waveform carrying capacity of the instrument The instrument supports four reference four channel and four math waveforms If you want more than four references you can save the additional reference to disk for recall later The Reference Waveform control window contains a Label field for including comments with you
258. g and 3 227 Waveforms recalling waveforms To Recall Your Waveform Recalling a saved waveform 3 231 To Clear References Setup to clear references 3 233 Exporting and Copying Background and setup for exporting 3 235 Waveforms waveforms and using exported waveforms To Export Your Waveform Exporting a waveform to a file 3 236 To Use an Exported Using an exported waveform in Excel 3 244 Waveform To Copy Your Waveform Copying a waveform to the clipboard 3 246 Printing Waveforms Background and setup for printing 3 250 waveforms To Date Time Stamp Background and setup to display the date 3 254 Hardcopies and time Remote Communication Information on programming the 3 255 instrument over the GPIB MyScope Information on creating using and editing 3 257 MyScope control windows Accessing Online Help Information on accessing the information 3 263 in the online help How to Use Online Help Using the online help 3 263 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual ES Acquiring Waveforms Before you can do anything display print measure analyze or otherwise process to a waveform you must acquire the signal This instrument comes equipped with the features that you need for capturing your waveforms before further processing them according to your requirements The following topics cover capturing signals and digitizing them into waveform records Acquisition Channel O Display inputs system Signal Co
259. g menu on the menu bar Table C 5 Trig menu commands Menu Submenu Function aa Main Trigger Displays the Trigger Setup window you use to set up the A Event triggers Quick Select Edge Glitch Width Sets up the selected trigger type Runt Window Timeout Transition Setup Hold Logic Pattern Logic State Comm Serial Pattern CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 7 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 5 Trig menu commands Cont Menu Edge Setup Glitch Setup Width Setup Runt Setup Window Setup Timeout Setup Transition Setup Setup Hold Setup Logic Pattern Setup Logic State Setup Comm Setup optional on TDS7000B Series Serial Pattern Setup optional on TDS7000B Series A B Trigger Sequence B Event Delayed Trig ger Setup Holdoff Mode Run Stop C 8 Function Displays the Trigger Setup window and sets up the selected trigger type Displays the trigger Holdoff control window you use to set trigger holdoff Displays the Trigger Mode control window you can use to select the trigger mode force a trigger and set the trigger level to 50 Displays the Run Stop control window you can use to start and stop acquisi tions control a single sequence of acquisitions and display the acquisition status CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Display Commands Table C 6 lists the commands available from the
260. ge and High Res acquisition modes The result of averaging the time domain acquisition using either average mode or Hi Res acquisition mode affects the frequency response of the instrument This is due to the one sample of jitter in the acquisition system Both High Res and average acquisition modes have the same affect on the frequency response These modes cause the response to roll off from a magnitude value of one at DC to a magnitude value of 0 63 at Nyquist which is the frequency equal to one half of the sample rate This is true regardless of the real time sample rate setting m Frequency Domain Averaging You may turn on average for a math waveform by editing the math expression Sometimes it is more desirable to average in the spectrum than in the time domain For example consider a signal that has time domain components that are asynchronous to the trigger If you turn on averaging in the time domain these components may go to zero or produce strange non deterministic effects on the resultant waveform Thus these signal components may end up not appearing in the spectrum However if averaging is done in the frequency domain instead then these components will be present An example is Math1 AVG SpectralMag Ch1 Aliasing occurs when the input frequency of a signal is greater than one half of the sampling frequency the sample rate Set the sample rate high enough so that the signals in the spectrum appear at the correct frequen
261. ger Modes on page 3 65 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 66 Trigger on a Pattern When you select the type Pattern the instrument will trigger when the inputs to Overview Prerequisites Trigger on a pattern h the logic function that you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option FALSE To setup pattern trigger do the following procedures Control elements and resources The instrument must be installed and operating The acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 23 for acquisition setup CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 95 Triggering Overview Trigger on a pattern Cont Control elements and resources To Trigger ona 2 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri pattern the Trigger control window and touch Select B Event Mode APattem Acquire Touch Pattern Ce T Tri T rigger Type Pattern Type Threshold E Input Threshold Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 ECL ay Pew pee por Trigger Levels Shared BE S B5 To define 4 To set the logic state for each of the input channels a _ pattern inputs Ch1 Ch2 touch each Input Threshold and select Seti See a either High H Low L or don t care X from the Ea El menu Input Threshold maa 12V ae MN To set 5 To set the logic threshold for each channel select
262. ges and measurements in several formats You can also copy waveform data to the clipboard for use with other applications By exporting a waveform you can use it with other analysis tools such as spreadsheets or math analysis applications Waveforms export as a series of comma separated values CSV which are amplitudes without units There is no timing information but data is placed in the file in sequence from the first sample in the waveform record to the last Because the waveforms are exported as CSV without timing and scaling information the instrument does not import these waveforms directly If you intend to recall a waveform later save it see the procedure To Save Your Waveform on page 3 228 instead of exporting it You may also choose to copy a waveform and paste it directly into an application such as Microsoft Word or Excel If so select your waveform and then select Copy in the Edit menu File Formats To make exported files more useful you may select a file format usable by your analysis tools m Numeric creates files txt in a numeric format usable by text and word processors m Text creates files txt in a text format usable by text and word processors m Bitmap creates files bmp in a bitmap file format usable by many graphic programs CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 235 Data Input Output JPEG creates files jpg in a compressed image format usable by many gra
263. gger modes include edge logic pulse may be logic qualified serial CSA7000B Series optional on TDS7000B Series communication CSA7000B Series and optional on TDS7000B Series and sequence at up to 4 GHz bandwidth depending on the model Window trigger mode triggers as the trigger source passes into or out of a defined window Triggers can be logic qualified Setup and hold trigger mode triggers when a logic input changes state inside of the setup and hold times relative to the clock Trigger jitter is as low as 1 ps RMS You can trigger on a glitch or runt of less than 250 ps Powerful built in measurement capability including histograms automatic measurements eye pattern measurements CSA7000B Series and optional on TDS7000B Series and measurement statistics A large 10 4 inch 264 2 mm high resolution XGA color display that supports color grading of waveform data to show sample density MultiView Zoom to view and compare up to four zoom areas at a time Lock and manually or automatically scroll up to four zoom areas An intuitive graphical user interface UI with online help that is built in and available on screen Internal removable disk storage CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Product Description Product Software Software Upgrade Wide array of probing solutions The instrument includes the following software System Software Includes a specially configured version of Windows X
264. ginary spectrum into a reference memory You can export the waveforms directly into Mathcad Matlab and Excel documents and update in real time CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 189 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 190 To turn on a real or imaginary spectrum touch the Math button the Define Edit Expression Editor button and then select the Freq tab Touch either the Real or the Imag menu items to enter an expression Then touch the Ch tab and one of the channel buttons Touch apply Using the Phase Controls You can set the vertical units to degrees radians or seconds of group delay You select these choices by touching the Math button the Spectral Analysis Setup button and then selecting the Phase tab Select the desired scale type from Degrees Radians or Group Delay Phase Reference Position Phase is a relative measurement that must have a time domain reference point The phase value is specified with respect to this phase reference position For the spectral analyzer the phase reference position is the 50 position of the gate that is the middle of the gate interval of the data that is input to the spectral analyzer This is true for all window functions except for the Tek Exponential window This window has the reference point at the 20 position of the gate Phase Unwrap The spectral analyzer produces phase values from z to m radians or 180 to 180 degrees However when you perf
265. gnal state you select occurs before the B trigger event occurs To Trigger ona Sequence Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger on a sequence For more information display online help while performing the procedure Overview To trigger on a sequence Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with a signal connected to an input channel Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 23 for acquisition setup To trigger on 1 From the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq Tri a main only tab of the Trigger control window Aldge Acquire 2 Touch A Only to turn off sequential triggering CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 109 Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont Control elements and resources To trigger on 1 To set the time base to run after an A trigger a trigger Tri B after time delay and a B trigger from the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq tab of the Trigger control window 2 Touch Trig After Time q BEvert f Vode Horizontal 4 Eent Delay Mode a AoA Athen B prem rig Aftor Trig Delay Position Stns 50 0 B Trig Level 3 To set the trigger delay touch Trig Delay and use the PAESE Asie Tieri T Horizontal Event vata multipurpose kno
266. h Colors Display Colors Disp Colors Waveform Display Appearance Interpolation Disp Appearance Waveform Intensity Display Appearance Disp Appearance Display format Display Appearance Display format Display Appearance Waveform Display Disp Appearance Trigger Level Marker Disp Objects Trigger T Display Display Trigger T Disp Objects Date and Time Display Display Date and Time Disp Objects Set Date and Time Utilities Set Date and Time Data Clear Options Choose Default to use the default system color red for math waveforms Choose Inherit to use the same color for the math waveform as the waveform the math function is based on Choose from Sin x x or Linear interpolation Toggle AutoBright On to set the brightness maximum to the value of the most frequent event Toggle AutoBright Off to let the brightness depend on the trigger rate creating a display like an analog instrument Touch Record View or FastAcq WfmDB and use the keypad or multipurpose knobs to adjust the intensity of waveforms Choose YT XY or XYZ display formats For additional information see To Set Display Format on page 3 47 Choose YT XY or XYZ display formats For additional information see To Set Display Format on page 3 47 Toggle the waveform display on and off Some processes are faster if waveforms are not displayed Choose a Short level marker at the right side of the graticule a Long level marker the width of the graticule or
267. h channel waveforms expand and contract horizontally on screen as you change the Horizontal Scale control or push the MultiView Zoom button The reference is also the trigger point when the horizontal delay is 0 Touch Screen not shown A feature that lets you touch on screen controls or touch and drag screen objects to operate the instrument Some features of the display follow m Flexible Display Control Front panel knobs and buttons support quick access to the most often used adjustments those that display position and scale waveforms Mouse keyboard and touch screen interfaces support CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms complete setup of all the display parameters Anything you can do with the mouse you can do with the touch screen m Fast Access to MultiView Zoom Waveform inspection has never been easier Just touch and drag a box around the feature of interest and select zoom from the choices offered and the feature of interest displays zoomed in the magnified graticule Both vertical and horizontal zoom functions are available Zoomed waveforms can be aligned locked and automatically scrolled m Acquisition Preview When the next acquisition is delayed due to slow triggers or long acquisition duration acquisition preview attempts to show what the next acquisition will look like Acquisition preview does not recalculate math waveforms or represent changes in trigg
268. h waveforms follow Circular Math on Math Measurements in Math and Measurements on Math You cannot use circular definitions of math waveforms For example if you define Math2 Ch1 Math1 and then define a second math waveform as Math3 Ch2 Math2 you cannot define a third math waveform as Math1 Math2 Ch3 If you do the Math1 definition is rejected with an error because a circular definition is not allowed Measurements Meas1 Meas8 are allowed in a math definition but not measurement functions such as rise Ch1 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series m Fast Acquisition Math is not allowed in Fast Acquisition mode m Roll Mode Math is updated when acquisition is stopped Using Math The following topics provide details that can help you create the math waveform that best supports your data analysis tasks How to Create You create math waveforms when you create a math expression You do so by applying numerical constants math operators and functions to operands which can be channel waveforms reference waveforms math waveforms or measurements scalars You can display and manipulate these derived math waveforms much like you can the channel and reference wave forms see Operations on Math Waveforms on page 3 177 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 169 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Some examples of typical math waveforms follow Table 3 11 Math expressions and th
269. he Spectral Analysis Setup button Then select the Mag tab Then select the desired scale type from Linear dB or dBm 3 188 Linear When the spectrum is linear magnitude the vertical units are the same as the source waveform Usually this is volts However it may also be watts or amperes The vertical axix is the linear RMS When the sin wave has 2 Vp p Vmax is 1 V and Vmin is 1 V and is done in FFT the peak value of linear RMS is displayed as 0 707 V dB This sets the vertical scale of the magnitude spectrum to dB Use the Reference Level Offset to set what vertical position in the magnitude spectrum will be zero dB The following equation applies dB 20 toe 4 Ref If the input units are watts the the following equation applies dB 1010e 4 Ref Where X is a complex data point in the spectrum and Ref is the Reference Level Offset value dBm This selects dB as described in the above equation but it also sets the Reference Level Offset to a value that is equivalent to 1 mW of power into 50 Q Therefore if the input units are volts then the value is set to 223 6 mV If the input units are amperes then the value is set to 40 uA If the input units are watts then the value is set to 1 mW Reference Level This sets the vertical position of the displayed spectrum Its value is the magnitude at the top of the display screen When this control is adjusted the spectral waveform along with its zero reference
270. he toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq tab of the Trigger control window Set the Trigger Reset Type in the pulldown menu The controls that are appropriate to your selection appear Note Selections for Reset vary with the B trigger type you select Set the time or specify the state or transition that forces reset To not reset set to None Touch the Help button in the Trigger control window to access the online assistance specific to triggering commands equence Control elements and resources ASB Saq US Evert Moda Ati Mima Beis oad p Trigger Reset Type Time Timod Y AB B Evert Timeout Horizontal Trig Delay Position dans 500 See page 3 263 for information on online assistance CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Comm Triggering The instrument can trigger on communication signals optional on TDS7000B Series For detailed information on using comm triggering to trigger on your communications signals see the CSA7000B amp TDS7000B Series Options SM Serial Mask Testing and Option ST Serial Triggering User Manual Serial Pattern Triggering In applications that involve signals with serial data patterns you may be able to use serial pattern triggering optional on TDS7000B Series to capture more complex events Serial trigger provides a direct means to analyze pattern dependent issues even on a single shot basis Acquisition o
271. he Recall Reference Waveform window allows navigation to directories lists waveform files in the directory and provides for selection of a waveform file Use the Look in drop down list and buttons to navigate to the directory which contains a waveform that you want to recall If not selected select wfm in the Files of type field to force the file listing to only include these types Use wim for waveforms Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set to wfm Choose your waveform file by either Clicking an existing name in the file list Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields Control elements and resources Save wim to Refi Fi Recall Refl from NNA Position O 0div aay N Recall Delete Wim Filq Scale Label 4 0 Horz Pos Ref Recall Reference Waveform a ct Ev Look in Waveforms K IE 040427_063412_Ch1 wfm 040427 _063412_Ch2 wfm EPHX_REF1 WFM E TekScope000_Chi wirn B TekScope000_Ch2 wfm E TekScope001 wfm B TekScope wfm Recall Cancel File name 040427 _063412_Ch Ee Wavetom Files wim Files of ty
272. he Vert or Horiz button Touch the HELP button in the toolbar Continue with 9 To finish acquisition setup you must set the acquisition acquisition mode and start the acquisition setup See To Set Acquisition Modes on page 3 29 3 14 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Autoset the Instrument Autoset automatically sets up the instrument controls acquisition display horizontal trigger and vertical based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup When the input signal is connected do an autoset to automatically set up the instru ment Overview To autoset the instrument Control elements and resources sch Prerequisites Signals must be connected to channels A triggering source must be provided See page 3 63 in this manual for trigger setup information Execute 2 Push the Autoset button to execute an Autoset DEFAULT If you use Autoset when one or more channels are CNE j ese a Co Casaca displayed the instrument selects the lowest numbered G N a aoe AASER Ea nD channel for horizontal scaling and triggering All EY channels in use are individually vertically scaled SOURCE COUPLNG SLOPE If you use Autoset when no channels are displayed the instrument turns on channel one CH 1 and scales it ad Execute The Autoset Undo control window opens auto
273. he entire display for the zoomed graticule Note The instrument displays the box enclosed area on the waveform magnified in the graticule If two graticules are shown the magnified waveform is shown in the bottom graticule Zoom Source 8 To select the source of your zoomed waveform area touch Zoom Source and select the source from the drop down list You can select the live acquisitions or one of the four zoom areas CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 129 Displaying Waveforms Overview Checking the zoom factor and position Reset zoom 3 130 To zoom waveforms Cont Control elements and resources 9 To quickly determine the zoom factor and position ofa Emm zoomed waveform check the readouts Zoom Display Zoom Source a Y m The Zoom setup window displays the horizontal and vertical position and zoom factor of the selected zoom area m From the Zoom Setup window touch the Vertical or Horizontal Position or Factor controls to assign the multipurpose knobs to the factor and position controls m Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to change the zoom position and factor The knob readout also displays the zoom position and factor You can also use the up and down arrows to change the zoom factor 10 To reset all Horizontal zoom factors to their defaults from the Zoom control window touch Setup 11 Touch Reset to reset the zoom factor and position CSA70
274. he line cord to power off the instrument NOTE If you do not use the On Standby switch to shut down the instrument before powering off the instrument the instrument will be in the factory Default Setup when powered on the next time To completely remove power to the instrument perform the shutdown just described set the power switch on the rear panel to off and then remove the power cord from the instrument CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation Backing Up User Files You should always back up your user files on a regular basis Use the Back Up tool to back up files stored on the hard disk The Back Up tool is located in the System Tools folder in the Accessories folder 1 Minimize the instrument application by selecting Minimize in the File menu Touch the Windows Start button Select Programs Accessories System Tools Backup in the Start menu Use the backup tool that displays to select your backup media and to select the files and folders that you want to back up Use the Windows online help for information on using the Backup tool You can back up to the floppy drive or to a third party storage device over the printer port rear panel Removing the Removable Hard Drive The removable hard drive is preinstalled at the factory You can secure data separate from the instrument with the removeable hard drive To remove the hard drive follow these steps 1 2 Verify th
275. he list what you want to export to a file or use with other Graticule bitmap applications Waveform data Measurements data Exports the full screen graticule waveform or measurement to a file or other application Recalls loads a recent setup file menu name is replace by the names of setup files Minimizes the instrument application displaying the Windows desktop Shutdowns the instrument CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Edit Commands Table C 2 lists the commands available from the Edit menu on the menu bar Table C 2 Edit menu commands Menu Submenu Undo Last Autoset Copy Select for Copy Full Screen bitmap Graticule bitmap Waveform data Measurement data Copy Setup Function Undoes the last autoset Copies the full screen graticule waveform or measurement to the clipboard for use with other applications Select from the list what you want to copy to the clipboard Displays the Copy Setup window that you use to set up and copy images waveforms and measurements Images Select the Palette Color GrayScale or Black amp White View Full Screen or Graticules Only Image Normal or InkSaver Mode or Data Format used when copying images Waveforms Select the Data Destination channel Source data range Waveform Detail and Data Ordering used when copying waveforms Measurements Select the Data Format and type of
276. he logic function to become FALSE m t compares the times and if the time TRUE is longer for TRUE for more than or shorter for TRUE for less than then it triggers a waveform display at the point the logic condition became FALSE This time can be and usually is different from the time set Time logic function is TRUE Time Logic Function Must be TRUE 2 us In the figure the delay between the vertical bar cursors is the time the logic function is TRUE Since this time is more 5 2 us than that set in the TRUE for More Than item 2 us the instrument issues the trigger at that point not at the point at which it has been TRUE for 2 us 3 97 Triggering To Trigger on a State Overview triggering Define inputs 3 Set thresholds 4 Define logic 5 3 98 When you select the type State the instrument uses channel 4 as a clock and triggers on a logic circuit made from the rest of the channels page 3 80 describes how state triggers work To use state triggering do the following procedures From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch State To set the logic state for each of the input channels Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 touch each Input Threshold and select either High H Low L or don t care X from the menu The choices for Ch4 are rising POS edge and falling NEG edge To set the logic threshold for each
277. i m rs his ch2 Define Edit Expression Spectral Analysis a Editor Avgs Setup Bono Predefined Phase r Define Edit Expression Editor Avgs Predefined Expression a EA 3 175 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources To define edit 5 Use the control window at right to define a math amath expression See Table 3 11 on page 3 170 for expression expression examples some guidelines for creating your expression follow m Sources Ch1 Ch4 Ref1 Ref4 and Meas1 Meas8 should be set up before you use them channels acquired or acquisitions running references and automated measurement scalars defined m Math definitions are not implemented if sources or other elements of the definition are not valid m Use the backspace button to remove the last entry use the clear key to remove the entire expression and start over m Use parentheses to group terms in the expression to control execution order for example 5 Ch1 Ch2 Select a 6 Select the Time Freq Meas or Var tabs to display the function available functions 7 Touch a function button to enter the function in the math expression Select an operand for the function to operate on 8 Use the Home and arrow buttons to move within the math expression Use the Bksp backspace button to delete portions of the expression 9 Touch Apply to apply you
278. ial triggers if the state event you specify occurs before the specified number of B trigger events Triggers remain reset as long as the state is true To reset 2 If the Timeout Type of Trigger Reset is selected touch sequential Time and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set triggers Cont the reset time The reset time is the time from the A trigger that you want to reset the sequential triggers if the B trigger has not occurred If the reset occurs the instrument does not trigger If the reset occurs the instrument starts over looking for the A trigger In the example the edge trigger A event occurs on the rising edge of the pulse on Ch1 The trigger delay expires 1 us after the rising edge of the pulse on Ch1 Ch2 provides the B events The reset event window starts with the A event and ends 3 us later If the trigger reset timeout were reduced to 2 us the instrument would not trigger because the timeout would occur before the next B event on Ch2 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources Trigger Reset Type Time Timeout _ 8 2408ps None e Transition Ee Ana expires before B Event Trigger Reset Type Time ie Timeout A s 245sus pee Reset A gt B sequence if timer expires before B Event 3 111 Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont Control elements and resources File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors
279. ical acquisition window for each channel to capture part or all of the vertical amplitude of the input signal When vertical scaling is set to capture only a fraction of the input signal range for increased detail the vertical offset control may be used to determine which portion of the input signal is captured by the vertical acquisition window m Set horizontal scale to control the size of the horizontal acquisition window to capture as much as you want of the input signal s Set the horizontal position to delay the window relative to a trigger and to control where in the input signal data stream that the horizontal acquisition window acquires For more background on acquisition window concepts see Input Conditioning Background on page 3 17 The instrument can automatically obtain and display a stable waveform of usable size Pushing the Autoset button automatically sets up the instrument controls based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup The instrument can also be reset to its factory default settings Usage of some input conditioning controls or features may be limited when other control settings are in effect Voltage offset is incompatible with reference waveforms because offset is an acquisition control Connecting and Read the following topics related to waveform acquisition they provide details Conditioning Your Signals that can make it easier to
280. ickly take a measurement based on the default settings for High Low and for reference levels Related control elements and resources See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Related control elements and resources Select the 2 From the toolbar touch Meas to display the Measure waveform ment setup control window 3 To select the source waveform that you want to measure select the Ch Math or Ref Source tab and then touch the Channel Math or Reference button for the waveform The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform Take 4 From the Measurement setup control window select the automatic Ampl Time More Histog or Comm optional on measurements TDS7000B Series tab that contains the measurement that you want to take 5 Touch the button for the measurement that you want to take For a list of the measurements this instrument can take see Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported 9 cr E Moas Cs E man e Rots J Avo J Hei J Mons 07 Jul 03 15 52 34 The readout for the measurement is automatically displayed and the measurement is added to the measurement list in the setup window Measurements are displayed below the graticule area as a shown here If the area is occupied or there are too many measurements to fit
281. ide of the external monitor and finally to the bottom of the external monitor ts start a TekScope URE eh 12 24 AM Click here to drag task bar Figure 1 7 Drag area for Windows task bar 2 Release the mouse when the task bar is where you want it to be Internal monitor External monitor Tektronix De Select all Figure 1 8 Moving Windows desktop icons to the external monitor CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 19 Installation 4 If you use the instrument help system you can drag the help windows to the external monitor so that you can read them while you operate the instrument 5 When you open any Windows application drag the windows from the application to the external monitor 1 20 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual SS eee Incoming Inspection Assemble Equipment This chapter contains instructions for performing the Incoming Inspection Procedure This procedure verifies that the instrument is operating correctly after shipment but does not check product specifications This procedure contains the following parts m Self Tests on page 1 22 provides instructions for performing the internal self tests m Functional Tests on page 1 23 measures the time and amplitude reference signals at the PROBE COMPENSATION connector m Perform
282. idth 486 mm 19 13 in depth Fan forced air circulation with no air filter Top Bottom Left side Right side Front Rear Without front cover 277 mm 10 9 in height 330 mm 13 in with feet extended 455 mm 17 9 in width 426 mm 16 75 in depth Without rack handles 267 mm 10 5 in height 482 mm 19 in width 435 mm 17 13 in depth 0 mm 0 in 19 mm 0 75 in minimum or 0 mm 0 in when standing on feet flip stands down 76 mm 3 in 76 mm 3 in 0 mm 0 in 0 mm 0 in on rear feet Chassis parts are constructed of aluminum alloy front panel is constructed of plastic laminate circuit boards are constructed of glass laminate and the outer shell is molded and textured from a polycarbonate ABS blend CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 12 Environmental specifications Characteristic Description Temperature operating 5 C to 50 C 41 F to 122 F excluding floppy disk and compact disk drives 10 C to 45 C 50 F to 113 F including floppy disk and compact disk drives Nonoperating 22 C to 60 C 71 F to 140 F Humidity operating 20 to 90 relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C 84 F at or below 50 C 122 F noncondensing Upper limit derates to 25 relative humidity at 50 C 122 F Nonoperating With no diskette in floppy disk drive 20 to 90 relative humidity with
283. idth typical Auxiliary Output levels Description Front panel BNC connector requires Probe Cal Deskew Fixture for probe attachment Note During probe calibration only a relay switches a DC calibration voltage to this output in place of the 1 kHz square wave This voltage varies from 10 V to 10 V with a source impedance less than 1 Q and short circuit current as high as 300 mA Output voltage Frequency 500 mV from base to top 20 intoa50 Q 1 kHz 5 load Vol 500 mV Voh 0 V typical 1 V from base to top 20 into a 1 MQ load Vol 1 0 V Voh 0 V typical BNC connector provides a buffered version of the signal that is attached to the channel 3 input when channel 3 is the trigger source 20 mV div 20 into a 1 MQ load 10 mV div 20 into a 50 Q load Offset between 100 mV and 170 mV into 50 Q 1 8 GHz into a 50 Q load BNC connector provides a TTL compatible pulse polarity selectable for each A or B trigger selectable Vout high Vout low true 22 5 V into open circuit lt 0 7 V with lt 4 ma sink 21 0 V into 50 Q load lt 0 25 V into 50 Q load CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 21 Appendix A Specifications Table A 7 Input output port specifications Cont Characteristic Description Auxiliary Output pulse width typical Pulse width varies 1 us minimum External reference Run SPC whenever the external reference is more than 2000 ppm different than
284. idth from active edge to inactive edge 500 ps hold time setting for times 0 1 5 ns hold time setting for times lt 0 Limits 340 pstois 340 pstois 340 ps to 10s 340 ps to 1 s 340 ps to 1 s 340 ps to 1 s 340 ps to 1 s Setup and Hold timers Setup time time from data transition to clock edge Hold time time from clock edge to data transition Setup time Hold time algebraic sum of the two settings Minimum event duration 100 ps Runt width 150 ps Runt width 330 ps 190 ps 330 ps 190 ps CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 225 ps 450 ps 500 ps Minimum clock pulse width from inactive edge to active edge 500 ps Limits 100 ns to 100 ns 1 ns to 102 ns 500 ps Setup time Hold time 40 ps 60 ps 160 ps 16 ps 160 ps 175 ps 40 ps 175 ps 225 ps 175 ps 20 ps 0 ps Appendix A Specifications Table A 4 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Time qualified trigger timer accuracy Trigger level or threshold range Trigger level or threshold accuracy typical B Event Delayed trigger Range Minimum pulse width typical Minimum time between events typical Trigger position error typical Trigger holdoff range A 18 Description For Glitch Timeout or Width types Time range 340 ps to 1 5 us 360 ps to 1 8 ns typical Accuracy 5 of setting 1 5 usto 1s 91 ns Trigger Source Sensitivity Any channel 12 divisions
285. idth of a channel Displays the Probe Cal control window you use to check a probe status and compensate the entire signal path from the probe tip to digitized signal Displays the Deskew control window you use to compensate for propagation delays of input channels Displays the Attenuation control window you use to inform the instrument of the external attenuation or gain between the signal and the input channels CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 3 Vertical menu commands Cont Menu Submenu Function Zoom Setup Displays the Zoom Setup window you use to set up the horizontal and vertical zoom controls Zoom Graticule Size 50 50 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 50 50 80 20 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 80 20 100 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 100 Size Displays the Zoom control window you use to select the zoom graticule size Horizontal and Acquisition Commands Table C 4 lists the commands available from the Horiz Acq menu Table C 4 Horiz Acq menu commands Menu Submenu Function Horizontal Acquisition Displays the Horizontal and Acquisition Setup window you use to set up the Setup Horizontal and Vertical subsystems Horizontal You can set the record length scale resolution sample rate duration delay reference point and zoom Acquisition You can set the acquisition mode enable fast acquisitions roll mode equivalent time
286. igger control window 3 96 3 98 3 103 Orientation printing 3 251 Output 3 221 Outputs 3 56 Index 14 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index Overshoot Glossary 12 P Page preview 3 252 Page setup C 2 Palette printing 3 251 Paper printing 3 251 Pattern trigger 3 79 3 95 how to setup 3 96 pcAnywhere C 10 Peak detect 3 25 3 30 Peak detect acquisition mode Glossary 11 Peak hits B 3 C 12 Peak to peak B 2 C 11 C 12 Glossary 11 Performance verification 1 14 of functions 1 23 self tests 1 22 Period B 2 C 12 Glossary 11 Peripheral connecting 1 7 Persistence 3 134 Persistence controls C 9 Phase B 2 C 12 Glossary 12 Phase spectrum C 14 Phase suppression 3 190 Phase verses frequency 3 182 Pixel Glossary 12 Pk pk B 3 Plug amp play software 1 13 1 20 PNG file format 3 236 Polarity and width A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 87 Polarity main trigger menu 3 85 3 87 Pos duty cycle C 12 Pos overshoot C 11 Position vertical 3 173 3 174 C 4 Position scale C 1 C 4 C 6 C 13 C 14 Positive duty cycle B 2 Positive overshoot B 3 Positive width B 3 C 12 Positive A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 Posttrigger 3 64 Glossary 12 Powering off 1 10 Powering on 1 9 Preferences C 15 Pretrigger 3 64 Glossary 12 Principal power switch Glossary 12 Print C 2 Print preview 3 253 C 2 Printing 3 250 waveforms 3 250 Probe
287. igh H Low L or don t care X from the menu The instrument checks the logic state of up to two other available channels and triggers only if their conditions are met Each channel can have a value of high H low L or don t care X A value is considered high if the channel input voltage is greater than the specified threshold voltage a value is considered low if the channel input voltage is less than the specified threshold voltage Use the don t care selection for any channels that will not be used as part of the pattern To set the logic threshold for each channel select the channel threshold and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set each threshold To choose the logic pattern type you want applied to the input channels touch an available type from the Pattern type window See Table 3 5 on page 3 80 for definitions of the logic functions Touch the Help button while in the Trigger setup window to access a context sensitive overview of the Logic controls and their set up Sequential Triggering Control elements and resources Trigger if Glitch Trigger if Glitch Logic V Trigger if Glitch Pattern Ch3 ETE Ch4 XY NAND XY OR 1N NOR 1N See page 3 263 for information on online assistance In applications that involve two or more signals you may be able to use sequential triggering to capture more complex events Sequential triggering uses the A Main trigger to arm the trigge
288. ighlight one for display Touch the Display button to open the topic in a help window 3 265 Accessing Online Help Overview To use online help Cont Control elements and resources To enable 7 If you cannot find the information in the Contents or Utilities Help Buttons full text Index tabs of the online finder you may want to enable Help on Window F1 search full text search From the application menu bar select Contents andindes Help and then select Contents and Index 8 From the online help finder see below choose the Specifications Find tab Technical Suppor Customer Feedback About TekScope Contents Index Find Find Setup Wizard Find enables you to search for specific words and phrases in help topics instead of searching for information by category Betore you can use Find Windows mustfirst create a list or database which contains every word from your help file s To create this list now click Next ize database size recommended C Maximize search capabilities Customize search capabilities 9 Choose the method for word list generation and select next or finish Once the word list generation finishes touching the Find tab will access a pane for searching with full text search 3 266 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual a ee Appendix A Specifications This chapter contains the specifications for the CSA7000B Series Communi
289. in control adjustments Effects of adjusting the reference level Effects of adjusting the reference level offset 3 56 3 57 3 59 3 64 3 66 3 67 3 68 3 78 3 82 3 102 3 105 3 106 3 107 3 108 3 120 3 123 3 140 3 141 3 143 3 144 3 152 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 52 Example of the effects of setting the phase suppression threshold oreina occa soe Bisa a EENE A TE EE 3 191 Figure 3 53 Windowing the time domain record 3 193 Figure 3 54 Example of scallop loss for a Hanning window without zero fill 65 35 62S e eed ENS SATA RS wT OS CORO eS 3 195 Figure 3 55 Time and frequency graphs for the Gaussian WING OW eens bo 555 6 FAs oO OE ST ee TORS ERT RES s 3 196 Figure 3 56 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Rectangular window ccc ccc cc ccc ccc ce eee eeccees 3 197 Figure 3 57 Time and frequency graphs of the Hamming WING OW eesse oe als Shee ose ROT OES ee eO ESE Ce TOES SS 3 198 Figure 3 58 Time and frequency graphs for the Hanning WIN OW 225 555 60 us 85S 55 S55 9G a TRAST OTS TSO EOS SES SaaS OS 3 199 Figure 3 59 Time and frequency graphs for the Kaiser Bessel WIN OW 6655 65 Ws 6 aS os FRO eo Vs RNS Oa SOMES Ns SRT Oe aes 3 200 Figure 3 60 Time and frequency graphs of the Blackman Harris WIN OW eerta nt Enana EEA TREES BETS EOS CUETO 3 201 Figure 3 61 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Flatt
290. in that area measurements are displayed in the lower graticule area In Roll mode measurements are not available until after ae ey ee an you stop acquisitions Ha a 29 e tt Remove 6 To remove the measurement touch Clear and the last measurements measurement selected is removed 7 To remove any measurement in the measurement list Source Measurements touch the measurement prior to touching the Clear button More than one measurement can be selected Touch the first measurement that you want to remove drag across all of the measurements that you want to select and then touch the Clear button 8 You can also toggle the display of measurements on and off by touching the Display button CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 145 Measuring Waveforms Overview Display measurement statistics Annotate measurements 3 146 To take automatic measurements Cont 9 From the Measurements setup control window touch Setup Statistics 10 From the Statistics control window select Off Mean or All Off Turns off measurement statistics Mean Displays the mean of measurements All Displays the Mean Min Max and Standard Deviation of measurements 11 To set the number of measurements included in the measurement statistics touch Weight n and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the weighting Measurement annotation graphically shows the position on the
291. interpolated real time equivalent time and FastFrame on instruments with these features Zoom Controls Displays the Zoom control window you use to set the position and scale of zoomed waveforms Autoset Automatically sets up the front panel controls based on the characteristics of the input signal and default selections Undo Last Autoset Undoes the last autoset Fast Acquisitions Toggles Fast Acquisitions mode on and off on instruments with this feature CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 5 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 4 Horiz Acq menu commands Cont Menu Run Stop Delay Mode On Roll Mode Auto Sampling Modes Position Scale Resolution Acquisition Mode FastFrame Setup FastFrame Controls Zoom Setup Function Displays the Run Stop control window that you can use to start and stop acquisitions control a single sequence of acquisitions and display the acquisition status Toggles horizontal delay mode on and off Toggles roll mode on and off on instruments with this feature When on the instrument automatically enters roll mode at slower horizontal scale settings Real Time Only Sets the sampling mode to real time Interpolated Real Time Sets the sampling mode to real time The instrument automatically uses interpolated real time sampling when the sample rate is too fast to acquire enough samples using real time sampling Equivalent Time The instrument automatically u
292. into a waveform record The waveform record is stored in memory The trigger marks time zero in that process Acquisition interval The time duration of the waveform record divided by the record length Except in equivalent time the instrument acquires one data point for every acquisition interval Aliasing A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high frequencies or fast transitions A condition that occurs when an instrument digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal The waveform displayed on the instrument may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Amplitude The High waveform value less the Low waveform value AND A logic Boolean function in which the output is true when and only when all the inputs are true On the instrument a trigger logic pattern and state function Analog to Digital Converter A device that converts an analog signal to a digital signal CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Area Measurement of the waveform area taken over the entire waveform or the gated region Expressed in mixed amplitude and time units such as volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Attenuation The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an attenuating device such as a probe or attenuator That is the ratio of the input meas
293. inues at step 3 according to what it finds hr ae eee User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Menu Bar Access to data I O printing online help system and instrument functions here Status Bar Display of 8 i z acquisition status mode and number of acquisitions trigger status warnings date and time Display Live reference amp math gt waveforms display here along with cursors Waveform Handle Touch and drag gt a to change vertical position of waveform Touch the handle and change the position and scale using the multipurpose knobs Math App Utiities Hep Buttons e Masks m 500mV Q Ie Vi T OmV t1 800 Ons 200ns div IA 200mv 2 Hell V2 40 0mV t2 800 Ons 5GS s 460psipt Controls Status Quick reference to gt DN ate 1 Gus A 10 0mV vertical horizontal and trigger selections scale and parameters If a setup menu is displayed these Right click Right click Right click readouts move to the graticule area For a shortcut menu right click File Tek Edit Acquisition mode Graticule Trigger level vertica e se 34 Trig Display Cursors Masks Math My lt ope Utilities Help Buttons Menu Touch to toggle between toolbar and menu bar modes Multipurpose Knob Readouts Adjust parameters controlled by multipurpose knobs Readouts Display cursor readouts and measurement readouts in this area selectable fr
294. ion 3 255 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index retaining current settings 3 222 save all waveforms to files 3 230 save the file 3 243 save the setup 3 224 save the waveform to a file 3 230 save the waveform to a reference 3 229 save your setup 3 225 save your waveform 3 231 saving and recalling a setup 3 221 saving and recalling waveforms 3 227 select a destination 3 230 3 242 select directory and name file 3 230 select for copy 3 246 select for export 3 237 select setup for copy 3 246 select setup for export 3 237 select the waveform to save 3 228 select your setup 3 227 select your waveform 3 232 setup to copy images 3 247 setup to copy measurements 3 249 setup to copy waveforms 3 247 3 248 setup to export histograms 3 241 setup to export images 3 238 setup to export measurements 3 241 setup to export waveforms 3 239 specify a line graph chart 3 245 spreadsheet file format 3 236 text file format 3 235 to clear references 3 233 to copy your waveform 3 246 to date time stamp hardcopies 3 254 to display the date and time 3 254 to export your waveform 3 236 to get the current time 3 254 to preview the page 3 252 to print from front panel 3 250 to print from menu bar 3 250 to recall your setup 3 226 to recall your waveform 3 231 to save to a file 3 224 to save your setup 3 223 to save your waveform 3 228 to set the date
295. ion The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to rise from a Low Ref value default 10 to a High Ref value default 90 of its final value Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the entire waveform or gated region The average of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than and half are greater than this value The standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Displays the number of points in the histogram box or on the box boundary Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram Displays the peak to peak value of the histogram Vertical histograms display the voltage of the highest nonzero bin minus the voltage of the lowest nonzero bin Horizontal histograms display the time of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the time of the leftmost nonzero bin Max Min Displays the maximum voltage or time Displays the minimum voltage or time The percentage of points in the histogram that are within 1 standard deviation of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram that are within 2 st
296. ion lists the standard and optional accessories available for the instrument as well as the product options Options The following options can be ordered for the instrument Table 1 4 Options 4 Oo n N o ow Option Description 1K K4000 Instrument Cart 1R Rack Mount Kit includes hardware and instructions for converting to rackmount configura tion X FHD Front panel removable hard disk drive Floppy disk drive is on the rear panel Acquisition memory 2M Long record length 2 Ms per channel 8 Ms maximum 3M Long record length 4 Ms per channel 16 Ms maximum 4M Long record length 8 M per channel 32 Ms maximum YI XTX VIX PX YX VIX PX LX 5M Long record length 16 M per channel 64 Ms maximum Power cords A0 Ai_ Universel Euopean 200 Sozo OOOO a2 a a3 iv A5 2 a6 iv M10 No power cod o O J A99 No power cord Software applications DVI TDSDVI DVI compliance test application DVD TDSDVD Optical storage analysis application ET3 TDSET3 Ethernet compliance test application X J X J2 TDSDDM2 Disk Drive Measurements application CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual abporZvSo YX X X VIX PX PR PLP AYN YX av0rZSal jK4o00 Instrument Cat eT X X X VIX TYP LEX PX EXPN VIX TXT LEQ PX EXPY VIX TYP REX PX EXPN X X X NIAAA avSeZSal X X X YI XIX YX YI XIX YN VIX PX YX avSlZSaL a ae 1 33
297. isplay Holdoff is adjustable from 250 ns minimum holdoff available to 12 seconds maximum holdoff available To see how to set holdoff see To set holdoff on page 3 74 You can also set an auto holdoff Auto holdoff varies with the horizontal scale and is equal to 5 divisions times the current time division setting Random holdoff selects a new random holdoff time for each acquisition cycle Rather than helping the instrument synchronize on a particular feature of a pulse train random holdoff prevents synchronization helping to reveal features of some pulse trains CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff THULE UL ULI Indicates trigger points Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Trigger lev TH i i i At the longer holdoff time for the top waveform unstable triggering occurs With a shorter holdoff set for the bottom waveform triggers all occur on the first pulse in the burst to remedy the unstable trigger Figure 3 23 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers Trigger Coupling Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger circuit Edge triggering can use all available coupling types AC DC Low Frequency Rejection High Frequency Rejection and Noise Rejection All the advanced trigger types use only DC coupling See To set the trigger coupling on page 3 71 for a description of each coupling type Hor
298. ix If the instrument malfunctions after you install software you should uninstall the software and then reinstall the instrument application to restore proper operation Exiting the Instrument Application Before installing other desktop applications you should exit the instrument application Follow these steps to exit the instrument application NOTE If you are not using a USB keyboard and mouse you must power on the instrument after attaching your keyboard and mouse Connect a keyboard and mouse to the instrument While holding down the CTRL and ALT keys press the DELETE key Select Task Manager PE ee D a In the Applications tab select TekScope exe and then select End Process to stop the instrument application The instrument application will restart after you restart the entire system following the installation of the desktop application software Options Some options contain software that must be installed and or enabled To do the installation follow the specific instructions that come with the option Tektronix provides a key that you must enter one time to enable all the options that you have purchased for your instrument To enter the key select Option Installation in the Utilities menu and then follow the on screen instructions CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 15 Installation Enabling or Disabling Your LAN and Connecting to a Network You can connect the instrum
299. ixed at 12 divisions from the center At 100 mV the next smaller setting after 200 mV the trigger range is 1 2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL 1 4 V or ECL 1 3 V level CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources TRIGGER ILD Glitch Width ransit Runt ya Timeout Patten Y State SetupHold Transition Comm EOCEEN Window EA BS RH Sharad Y 3 75 Triggering Overview To define new 1 trigger level presets 3 To force a 1 trigger 3 76 Additional trigger parameters Cont If the Menu Bar is not displayed touch the Menu button to display the Menu Bar Touch Utilities and select User Preferences to display the User Preferences control window Select the Keypad Defaults tab Select a Trigger Level and adjust the Trigger Level preset using the multipur pose knob or keypad Select a Keypad Label and change the label of the preset using the keypad Push the ADVANCED front panel button to display the trigger control window Select the A Event or B Event tab and select the Edge trigger type To force the instrument to immediately acquire one waveform record even without a trigger event touch the Force Trigger button Forcing a trigger is useful when in normal trigger mode and the input signal is not supplying a valid trigger By touching Force Trigger you can quickly
300. izontal Position Horizontal position is adjustable and defines where on the waveform record the trigger occurs It lets you choose how much the instrument acquires before and after the trigger event The part of the record that occurs before the trigger is the pretrigger portion The part that occurs after the trigger is the posttrigger portion When horizontal delay is off the reference marker shows the trigger position in the waveform Displaying pretrigger information can be valuable when troubleshooting For example if you are trying to find the cause of an unwanted glitch in your test circuit you can trigger on the glitch and make the pretrigger period large enough to capture data before the glitch By analyzing what happened before the glitch you may uncover clues about its source Slope and Level The slope control determines whether the instrument finds the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal See Figure 3 24 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 67 Triggering Delayed Trigger System You set trigger slope by pushing the SLOPE button on the front panel to toggle between the positive going and negative going edge The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs See Figure 3 24 You can set the trigger level with the LEVEL knob on the front panel Push the LEVEL knob to automatically set the trigger level to the 50 amplitude point of the signal
301. izontal position It can be positioned horizontally off screen to the left when horizontal delay is on The trigger level indicator shows only the trigger level It remains on screen regardless of the horizontal position as long as the channel providing the trigger source is displayed You can choose between two types of trigger level indicators a horizontal bar or an arrow at the right side of the graticule Trigger level indicator shows the trigger level on the waveform record You can drag the indicator to set the trigger level Additional Trigger Parameters Some additional trigger parameters are accessible only through the Trigger control window m Holdoff m Trigger level presets m Force trigger m Single sequence Use the procedures that follow to set up these additional trigger parameters For more information display online help while performing the procedure CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 73 Triggering Overview Additional trigger parameters Control elements and resources To set holdoff You can change the holdoff time to help stabilize triggering See Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff beginning on page 3 65 for a description of trigger holdoff To set holdoff do the following steps 1 Push the ADVANCED button and select the Mode tab a 2 Select Auto Time or Random AcEdge Acquire The Auto holdoff varies with the horizontal scale and is equal to 5 divi
302. je aoaaa O 5 Poweron Figure 1 6 Setting up a dual display 6 The instrument should detect that the new monitor was connected Follow the instructions if any on the instrument display to install new drivers for the monitor 7 Type a Control M to minimize the instrument application 8 In the Windows desktop right click the mouse and then select Properties to display the Display Properties dialog box 9 Select the Settings tab Click on the grayed out external monitor 2 in the display box and drag it to the left of monitor 1 10 Select Yes when you are prompted to enable the new monitor CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation CAUTION Do not change the resolution or color settings for the internal LCD monitor The internal resolution must be 1024 x 768 and the color setting must be True Color 24 bit 11 Select OK to apply the settings Select Yes to restart your instrument After the instrument restarts the new monitor will display additional desktop area To make the best use of the new display area do these additional steps to move the Windows controls to the external monitor 1 Click and hold on the Windows task bar in the area shown in Figure 1 7 and then drag it upwards and toward the external monitor The task bar will first go to the side of the internal monitor then to the s
303. just described resolution and the equiva lent elements sample interval and sample rate see equation 2 above cannot be set directly but are derived You can however check the resolution at anytime in the resolution readout Also note that the Resolution control actually adjusts the record length to increase sample density The above discussion also assumes that horizontal scale is held constant You can however choose to hold the sample rate constant instead by selecting Hold Sample Rate Constant in the Utilities User Preferences menu CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Independent vs Shared Window The instrument applies the same horizontal acquisition window to all channels from which it acquires data Unlike the vertical acquisition window that you size and offset independently for each channel the same time div resolution record length and horizontal position from the same trigger point apply to all channels simultaneously One trigger from a single trigger source will locate a common horizontal acquisition window for all active channels which you can shift in parallel by setting the horizontal position control The horizontal acquisition window determines the waveform records extracted from all signals present at all active channels You can think of the horizontal acquisition window as cutting across any input signals present in the input channels to extract the s
304. just the offset Dragging the waveform handle also positions the waveform CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Position Termination 0 0div Coupling a amp Display Scale GND 500 0mV Vertical Zoom r c VERTICAL POSITION cH POSITION CHD POSITION CH3 POSITION A PN can as zZ v7 7 zZ SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE Chan 1 f Chanz Chan3 Chan4 Position Display 0 0div Scale omy Vertical Zoom r S Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set up signal input Cont Related control elements and resources Set horizontal 7 Use horizontal knobs to scale and position the waveform R HORIZONTA m A acquisition on screen and to set record length window Dragging the reference icon also positions the waveform SOW 4 ES MORE SAMPLES 4 SCALE gt i Scaled horizontally Positioned horizontally The Resolution knob sets the record length See discussion on page 3 21 If required to stabilize the display push LEVEL to set the trigger level to 50 For help 8 For more information on the controls described in this procedure push t
305. kes samples continuously independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Although the samples are taken sequentially in time they are random with respect to the trigger CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Fall Time A measurement of the time it takes for the trailing edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef value typically 90 to a LowRef value typically 10 of its amplitude Fiber Optics A method of transmitting information in which light is modulated and transmitted over high purity filaments of glass The bandwidth of fiber optic cable is much greater than that of copper wire Frequency A timing measurement that is the reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second Gated Measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using the vertical cursors Glitch positive trigger Triggering occurs if the instrument detects positive spike widths less than the specified glitch time Glitch negative trigger Triggering occurs if the instrument detects negative spike widths less than the specified glitch time Glitch either trigger Triggering occurs if the instrument detects either positive or negative spike widths less than the specified glitch time GPIB General Purpose Interfa
306. l 1 14 Area B 1 C 12 Glossary 2 Attenuating optical signals 3 55 Attenuation Glossary 2 Attenuation input C 4 Auto increment file name 3 222 3 225 3 230 3 243 AutoBright 3 133 Automated measurements 3 140 of FFT math waveforms 3 205 Automatic measurements 3 140 high and low levels defined B 6 levels used in taking B 5 B 6 reference levels defined B 6 reference levels defined eye pattern optical B 7 Automatic trigger mode 3 65 3 71 Glossary 2 Autoset 3 17 C 5 Glossary 2 how to execute 3 15 Index 2 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index undoing 3 15 undo C 5 Autoset Undo 3 15 Autoset undo C 3 AUX Out configuration C 15 Auxiliary trigger 3 64 3 70 Average 3 26 3 30 3 49 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 Average acquisition mode Glossary 2 Averaging Glossary 2 spectral math 3 204 B event delayed trigger setup C 8 B Trig Level A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 110 B trigger level A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 110 Backing up user files 1 11 Bandwidth C 4 Glossary 2 optical 3 60 selection 3 59 Bitmap file format 3 235 Blackman Harris 3 192 3 194 3 199 3 211 Burst width B 1 C 12 Button DELAY 3 68 FORCE TRIG 3 76 SET LEVEL TO 50 3 70 SINGLE TRIG 3 77 ZOOM 3 125 3 127 C Calibrate probes 3 162 Calibrate the oscilloscope 3 161 Calibration instructions 3 161 Calibration status 3 161 CD ROMs option
307. l Window Open Control Window Edit Control window fe MyScope Setup Untitled Choose From These Controls H File a wte H Edit Rename Tab a TENIEN H Horizontal aen H Trigger User Pref H Display H Cursors H Measure Delete H Mask es z 3 257 MyScope Overview Make control selections Create a control window 3 258 To create a new MyScope control window Cont 3 6 Click a control to preview it Double click the control or click the to expand the control list If there is no then the control cannot be customized further Clear the check boxes to remove any components that you do not want included in the control Click and drag the control to your MyScope control window The control will snap to the nearest grid location when you release the mouse You can change the placement of the control in your MyScope control window by clicking and dragging To reconfigure a control click and drag it back to the preview window Then select or clear the check boxes to include or remove components in the control Control elements and resources Choose From These Controls New Tab i E Label Rename Tab 1 oi Source bo Units gt chi Offset User Pref l Termination Position Invert Coupling Delete Bandwidth Probe Cal a Click And Drag Controls onto the Tab Below Vertical Display Vertical Vert Vertical Source thi Yv
308. l operating blocks and operating cycle of the instrument User Interface Map on page 2 6 describes the elements of the User Interface UI application which provides complete control of the instru ment Front Panel Map on page 2 7 describes the elements of the instrument front panel and cross references information relevant to each element Display Map on page 2 8 describes elements and operation of single grati cule and multiple graticule displays Front Panel I O Map on page 2 9 describes inputs outputs and peripherals Rear Panel I O Map on page 2 10 describes input output ports and peripherals Tutorial How to procedures are available online as part of the online help For information on configuring and installing your instrument refer to Chap ter 1 Getting Started CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 2 1 Documentation Map This instrument ships with documents individually tailored to address different aspects or parts of the product features and interface The table below cross references each document to the instrument features and interfaces it supports To read about Installation Specification amp Operation overviews boy a eS 7 Aron s MAAA MAAT m Vey y y iV GPIB Commands E Analysis and Connectivity Tools Refer to these documents User Manual Reference Manual Online Help
309. l position and scale adjustments The light over one of the channel selector buttons indicates the current selected waveform Single Mode Cable An optical cable with a very small core diameter usually in the range of 2 10 microns Such cables are normally used only with laser sources due to their very small acceptance cone Since the cone diameter approaches the wavelength of the source only a single mode is propagated Slew Rate trigger A mode in which the instrument triggers based on how fast a pulse edge traverses slews between an upper and lower threshold The edge of the pulse may be positive negative or either The instrument can trigger on slew rates faster or slower than a user specified rate Slope The direction at a point on a waveform You can calculate the direction by computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity Y to the change in the horizontal quantity The two values are rising and falling Statistical Measurement An automated measurement that is derived from color graded waveform data and is based on histograms computed at the crossing levels A statistical measurement can be selected only in color graded display mode Tek Secure This feature erases all waveform and setup memory locations setup memories are replaced with the factory setup Then it checks each location to verify erasure This feature finds use where this instrument is used to gather security sensitive data such as is done for
310. l the setup 3 Touch the number of the setup that you want to recall BH B zi The current instrument setup is overwritten go B E Fecal Recall setup 4 To display the Recall Instrument Setup dialog from the Recall Instrument Setup X from a file Recall Setup control window touch Recall Lookin Seups z agm 040427 _062843000 set The Recall Instrument Setup dialog allows navigation to directories lists setup files in the directory and provides for selection of a setup file Recall Files of type Setup Files set Ei Cancel File name Help Find the 5 Use the Look in drop down list and buttons to navigate Recall Instrument Setup K source to the directory which contains a setup that you want to PE Seur ERTES directory recall 3 226 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To recall your setup Cont Control elements and resources Select your 6 If not selected select set in the Save as type of file to setup include in the file listing Setup files are always type set Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at set File name 030703 _101546 se Files of type Setup Files set 7 Choose your setup file by either Clicking an existing name in the file list m Clicking in the File name field and typin
311. length of the acquisition is 100K horizontal zoom of 200x produces 1 sample per column 100 000 500 200 therefore you will see interpolated samples starting at the next scale setting CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms Set Display Styles Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments that you can make Overview Set display styles Related control elements and resources Prerequisites Access the display setup dialog box Select the display style and persistence and waveform interpolation mode CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 The instrument must be powered up with any waveform you want to display on screen See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup 2 From the toolbar touch Disp and then select the Appearance tab See right Text Objects Colors Persistence Intensity AutoBright Record View 75 0 FastAcq WfmDB 75 0 Infinite Variable Time 500 0ms Persistence 3 From display Persistence choose a persistence mode Infinite Variable Off displays Waveforms with new data replacing the data from previous waveform acquisitions no persistence Ott Time 500 0ms m Infinite persistence continuously accumulates record points until you change an acquisition setting m Variable persistence accumulates record points for a specified
312. lf of the available display for the acquisition window The 80 20 selection allocates 80 of the available display for the zoomed graticule and 20 for the acquisition window Touch 100 to use the entire display for the zoomed graticule Figure 3 32 on page 3 120 shows the elements of the graticules the elements are the same for each graticule displayed Operations on the Timebase In general the method of adjusting horizontally scaling setting resolution record length positioning and so on is from the front panel adjust the timebase using the Horizontal Scale Resolution and Position knobs Only channel waveforms can be set directly Table 3 7 shows how horizontal operations relate to the waveform types the key points follow m The instrument displays a reference waveform with horizontal settings in effect at the time it was saved You cannot adjust these settings See Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 227 for more information on reference waveforms 3 122 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms m The instrument displays a math waveform with the horizontal settings derived from the math expression that creates it You cannot change these directly See Creating and Using Math Waveforms on page 3 167 for more information on math waveforms m All waveforms are displayed fit to screen that is within the horizontal divisions that the graticule provides However some waveforms
313. lgorithm 3 190 dejitter 3 190 phase verses frequency 3 182 radian 3 210 real and imaginary magnitudes 3 189 recognizing aliasing 3 204 record length 3 183 3 213 Rectangular window 3 192 3 194 3 197 3 211 reducing noise 3 210 reference level offset 3 189 resolution 3 183 3 213 resolution bandwidth 3 186 3 212 3 213 sample rate 3 212 3 213 scale factor 3 209 3 210 scallop Loss 3 194 scallop loss 3 194 select a predefined spectral analysis math waveform 3 206 select a spectral waveform 3 207 select spectral analysis setup 3 207 select the window type 3 211 set the frequency domain controls 3 212 set the magnitude scale 3 209 set the phase scale 3 210 set the time domain controls 3 213 set time and frequency domain control tracking 3 211 setup C 14 span 3 185 spectral analyzer controls 3 183 spectral averaging 3 182 suppression threshold 3 190 swept sine wave analysis 3 206 take cursor measurements 3 214 Tek Exponential window 3 192 3 194 3 203 3 211 Tek Exponential window in the time and the frequency domains illustration 3 203 time and frequency domain graphs for the Flattop2 window illustration 3 202 time and frequency domain graphs for the Rectangu lar window illustration 3 197 time and frequency graphs for the Gaussian Window illustration 3 196 time and frequency graphs for the Hanning window illustration 3 199 time and frequency graphs for
314. llowing fuse sizes can be used each size requires a different fuse cap Both fuses must be the same type See Table 1 2 and Figure 1 2 Table 1 2 Line fuses Line voltage 100 V to 250 V operation Part number Tektronix 159 0046 00 Bussman ABC 8 Littelfuse 314008 Tektronix 159 0381 00 Bussman GDA 6 3 Littelfuse 21606 3 Description UL198G and CSA C22 2 No 59 fast acting 8 A 250 V IEC127 sheet 1 fast acting F high breaking capacity 6 3 A 250 V power to the product CAUTION Connect the keyboard mouse and other accessories before applying CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 9 Installation Rear panel Front panel o Jo o E lo Tektronix J Zn oH OO oO SES 0 oo 2 o gjo o 2 Oo HEBEEEEEE ofge ZES S old Olsss o ome po po o Le OO o a T Q 0000 o i f ke 2 4 Turnon Check the Connect the If needed push the On Standby the power fuses power cord switch to power on the instrument Figure 1 2 Powering on the instrument Shutting Down the Instrument When you push the front panel On Standby switch the instrument starts a shutdown process including a Windows shutdown to preserve settings and then removes power from most circuitry in the instrument Avoid using the rear panel power switch or disconnecting t
315. ls 0 cee eee eee eee 3 125 Using with Waveforms vii deaan iiin tee eg ae Pare kes 3 126 To Zoom Waveform Sa iii r E iia Apia eet ie Ais iat OMe 3 126 Customizing the Display 0 eee eee eee eee 3 131 Using Display Controls saareke ae Orana cc eee eee 3 132 Set Display Styles Accctin dick oh eh ae hang Pato Pare hehe 3 135 Customize Graticule and Waveforms 0 0 00 cece eee 3 137 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual iii Table of Contents Measuring Waveforms c ccc ce cee ee ccc ee eevee ceces 3 139 Taking Automatic Measurements 00 0 c eee eee ee eee 3 140 Using Automatic Measurements 00 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 142 To Take Automatic Measurements 00 0000 e cee eee 3 144 To Localize a Measurement siset iriran ersa cece cc eee eee 3 149 Taking Cursor Measurements 0 ccc rikoki NE cee eens 3 151 Using Cursors arain Laces Sh Sa ie od pets Dak al eR ed pee 3 152 To Set the Cursor Sources 0 eee cee eee ee ees 3 155 Faking Histograms a irin sce ies vost pats Wok al NS eee gt 3 157 Using Histograms icc A 8 Se ee el gs e al oR a el 3 158 To Start and Reset Histogram Counting 0008 3 158 Histogram Measurements 0 0 00 eee cc cee eee eee 3 160 Optimizing Measurement Accuracy 0 0 c cee ec eee eee 3 160 To Compensate the Instrument 00 00 02 cece eee eee 3 160 To C
316. ltiView Zoom expands all waveforms at the same time When zooming horizontally or vertically MultiView Zoom expands or contracts the waveform by the zoom scale factor To Zoom Waveforms Use the procedure that follows to zoom a waveform For more information display online help when performing the procedure Overview To zoom waveforms Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed and operating Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls and triggering set up See page 3 63 for trigger setup 3 126 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To zoom waveforms Cont Select zoom 2 You can select zoom in two ways m To zoom a waveform touch and drag across the segment of the waveform that you want to see in greater detail Then select Zoom 1 On Zoom 2 On Zoom 3 On or Zoom 4 On to magnify the highlighted waveform segment in one of the 4 zoom areas Note The instrument displays the box enclosed area on the waveform magnified in the graticule If two graticules are shown the magnified waveform is shown in the bottom graticule m Push the MultiView Zoom button to split the screen and add a zoom graticule If the instrument creates two graticules the magnified waveform s is displayed in the lower graticule and the unmagnified waveform s in the upper graticule Use the Zoom Setup menu to chang
317. lution is the inverse of Sample rate Adjust resolution to adjust sample rate Resolution will also cause a change in record length such that the duration is kept constant at the value selected by the Duration control 24 To adjust the number of seconds over the duration of the acquired waveform record length touch Duration and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to adjust the duration Note Changing duration also changes the record length 25 To set the gate position touch Gate Pos and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to adjust the gate position Gate position is the position of the phase reference point in the gate with respect to the trigger in seconds The gate position and gate duration must be within the acquisition 26 To set the gate duration touch Gate Dur and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to adjust the gate duration Gate duration and resolution bandwidth both control gate duration gate duration is displayed in seconds and resolution bandwidth in hertz CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Rec Length E s Sample Rate 125 08 Duration E 2 0us f Resolution Rec Length E c bh Sample Rate 125 08 Duration E bos Resolution Window Type Gaussian F Du aoo oms 1 Gate Length 101 Window Type Gaussian Y Gate Pos Gate Length 101 3 213 Creating and Using Math
318. ly overlays subsequent acquisitions and then decays them to simulate the writing and decay of the phosphor in an analog instrument CRT The feature results in an intensity graded or color graded waveform display that shows the information in the intensity modulation Fit to Screen The Digital Phosphor technology performs the compression required to represent all record points on the screen even at the maximum record length settings MultiView Zoom To take advantage of the full resolution of the instrument you can zoom in on a waveform to see the fine details Both vertical and horizontal zoom functions are available Zoomed waveforms can be aligned locked and automatically scrolled Measurement Features Cursors Use cursors to take simple voltage time and frequency measurements CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 3 Appendix A Specifications A 4 Trigger Features Convenience Features Automatic Measurements Choose from a large palette of amplitude time and histogram measurements You can customize the measurements by changing reference levels or by adding measurement gating Mask Testing Optional on TDS7000B Series Provides mask testing for verifying compliance to optical CSA7000B Series only and electrical standards Optical mask testing uses integrated reference receivers Simple and Advanced Trigger Types Choose simple edge trigger or choose from eight advanced trigger types to help
319. m The channel containing the logic input the data source and the channel containing the clock the clock source 3 80 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering m The direction of the clock edge to use m The clocking level and data level that the instrument uses to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred m The setup and hold times that together define a time range relative to the clock Data that changes state within the setup hold violation zone triggers the instrument Figure 3 26 shows how the setup and hold times that you choose positions this zone relative to the clock Setup hold triggering uses the setup hold violation zone to detect when data is unstable too near the time it is clocked Each time trigger holdoff ends the instrument monitors the data and clock sources When a clock edge occurs the instrument checks the data stream it is processing from the data source for transitions occurring within the setup hold violation zone If any occur the instrument triggers with the trigger point located at the clock edge Positive settings for both setup and hold times the most common application locate the setup hold violation zone so it spans the clocking edge See the top waveform in Figure 3 26 The instrument detects and triggers on data that does not become stable long enough before the clock setup time violation or that does not stay stable long enough after the clock hold
320. marker move vertically on the screen see Figure 3 50 This control does not change the spectral data CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms 20 dB 15 dB 10 dB t A iS je Figure 3 50 Effects of adjusting the reference level m Reference Level Offset This changes the value of Ref in the equation for dB shown above Unlike the Reference Level control this control actually changes the output data values in the spectrum Zero dB is shown on the display screen by the marker associated with the spectral waveform Adjusting the reference level offset causes the spectral waveform to move vertically with respect to the waveform reference marker This moves the waveform without changing the Reference Level control setting Sometimes it is beneficial to adjust this control so that the peak of a fundamental is at zero dB Then you can measure other harmonics in terms of how many dB they are down from the fundamental Touch the dBm button to preset this level to the equivalent of 1 mW into 50 Q 20 dB 20 dB 20 dB 0 dB Figure 3 51 Effects of adjusting the reference level offset control m Real and Imaginary Magnitudes You may set the spectral analyzer to display the linear magnitude of the real data or the imaginary data in the spectrum This is useful if you process the spectrum off line and transform it back into a time domain trace You could save the real and the ima
321. math waveform you turn it on in the Math setup control window 3 121 Displaying Waveforms Operations on Waveforms In general the method of adjusting vertically scaling offsetting positioning and so on is from the front panel adjust a waveform using its Vertical Scale and Position knobs Table 3 7 summarizes operations you can perform for the three waveform types Table 3 7 Operations performed based on the waveform type Control function Waveform supports Operating notes Ch Ref Math Vertical Scale Math and reference waveforms are scaled and positioned from their Vertical Position Yes Yes Yes setup control windows Vertical Offset Yes No No Horizontal Scale Yes Yes Yes Waveforms are adjusted according to the Zoom Lock setting Horizontal Position Horizontal Record Length Quick Horizontal and Vertical Yes Yes Yes Dragging a box around a portion of the selected waveform adjusts Scale Adjust Zoom horizontal scale to fill the zoom graticule with the boxed portion see Setting MultiView Zoom Controls on page 3 125 1 Pixel map reference waveforms those saved while in fast acquisitions mode or waveform database mode cannot be repositioned or rescaled Graticules Select a graticule size from the Graticule Size drop down list in the Zoom Setup window to change the size of the acquisition waveform and zoomed waveform windows The 50 50 selection allocates half of the available display for the zoomed graticule and ha
322. matically Autoset Undo after an Autoset operation Touch Undo if you want to Sunca undo the last Autoset Only the parameters that were set by the last Autoset are undone Parameters that you changed that are not controlled by Autoset retain their settings If you don t want this window to appear set the Utilities User Preferences Autoset Undo button to Off You can still do an Autoset Undo using the Horiz Acq menu Prompt 4 Select User Preferences in the Utilities menu to display mmm the Prompt Before Action window Touch Autoset to Ne seen AI IEA toggle between ON and OFF Default Recall Overwrite Delete Autoset Setup Setup Del Ref Wim Autoset Undo OFF to set up for performing an autoset when the E AUTOSET button is pushed m ON to set up for displaying a prompt before performing an autoset when the AUTOSET button is pushed Done Touch Close to save your prompt selection CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 15 Acquiring Waveforms To Reset the Instrument NOTE Autoset may change the vertical position to position the waveform appropriately It sets vertical offset to 0 V unless an offsetable probe is attached If you are not using an offsetable probe and your signal contains offset such as the probe compensation signal you may need to adjust the Vertical Offset and SCALE to display the signal You may want to revert to the factory default setup if so reset the instru
323. may be wider or narrower than the full graticule due to acquisition rate time scale combinations and acquisition preview Display and Acquisition Controls For channel waveforms the vertical and horizontal controls that you set also adjust the instrument acquisition parameters See the following descriptions for more information m Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 18 m Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 20 Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference The time values that you set for horizontal position are from the trigger point to the horizontal reference point This is not the time from the trigger point to the start of the waveform record unless you set the horizontal reference to 0 See Figure 3 33 Trigger point lt Waveform record lt Horizontal position gt Vv Time of first point Horizontal Time of last point reference point Figure 3 33 Horizontal Position includes time to Horizontal Reference Mouse and Touch Screen Operation In general anything that you can do with the mouse you can do by touching the screen if the touch screen is on You can select or change all menus and buttons that are displayed on screen by mouse clicks or touching the on screen control while the touch screen is on CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 123 Displaying Waveforms To Display Waveforms in the Main Graticul
324. may be acquired in a batch Samples divided by the Record Length roughly indicates the number of waveforms in a batch of acquisitions Batch processing minimizes the overhead of displaying and processing other features such as measurements and histograms The higher the number of samples the greater the acquisition throughput and the potential for less frequent display updates Also consider how you want to control acquisition you have two main options settable from the Run Stop control window select Run Stop from the Horiz Acq menu m Run Stop Button Only Sets the instrument to start and stop the acquisition only when you push the Run Stop button available on the front panel or in the Run Stop control window If toggled to Run acquisition will start if a valid trigger occurs If toggled to Stop acquisition stops immediately CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 27 Acquiring Waveforms m Single Sequence In addition to the Run Stop Button which can always stop an acquisition the SINGLE button or Single Sequence control will automatically stop acquisition when one complete acquisition sequence is completed See step 4 Set the stop mode on page 3 30 or access the online help from the Run Stop control window for more information Untriggered Roll Untriggered roll mode displays newly acquired data points at the right edge of the waveform record while moving older waveform data points to the left
325. me mode The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up Triggering should also be set up Prerequisites 1 To set 2 Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from FastFrame the Horiz Acq control window Touch FastFrame Setup mode to display the FastFrame Setup control window 3 Touch FastFrame to toggle FastFrame to On Set frame 4 Touch Rec Length and set the number of samples per length frame Record length is the number of samples in each acquisition 3 50 Use the procedure that follows to set up FastFrame mode acquisitions Control elements and resources See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup Frame Viewing Selected Frame Frame Source TR 2 Multiple Frames Frame Count Frame Viewing Selected Frame Frame Source thi Rec Length Frame s000 Multiple Frames Time Stamns Reference Frame Tracking Frame Paw Source cna Frame Readouts Time Stamns Reference Frame Tracking Source thi Y Frame i Readouts astFram Setup Selection Setup Selection Controls Horiz Acq SetUp CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview Set frame count Select the frame to view To view multiple frames To set FastFrame mode Cont 5 Touch Frame Count and enter the number of frames to acquire per w
326. ment Overview To reset the instrument Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument is powered up and running See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 Execute 2 Push the DEFAULT SETUP button To Get More Help Overview To get more help Prerequisites 1 Instrument powered up and running FINE auroser DEFAULT Prnt cursors FastAca c HORIZONTAL i TRIGGER POSITION nD ey ras SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE You can get help on the vertical and acquisition controls by accessing online help Control elements and resources See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Control elements and resources App Utilities Heip Buttons s Help on Window F1 Overview To get more help Cont Access 2 Touch the Help button in toolbar mode or select Help on vertical set up Window from the Help menu in menu bar mode help 3 You can also select topics related to the vertical controls from the online help Contents Index Find window select Contents and Index in the Help menu as shown at right Contents and Index Specifications Technical Support Customer Feedback About TekScope Input Conditioning This section contains background information that can help you more effectively Background set up the acquisition window of each channel
327. ment clear of obstructions for proper cooling CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation Operating Requirements The Specifications in Appendix A list the operating requirements for the instrument Power source temperature humidity and altitude are listed Connecting Peripherals The peripheral connections are the same as those you would make on a personal computer The connection points are shown in Figure 1 1 See Table 1 1 on page 1 9 for additional connection information instrument in Standby power mode before installing any accessories except a USB mouse or keyboard to the instrument connectors You can connect and disconnect USB devices with the power on See Shutting Down the Instrument on page 1 10 N CAUTION To avoid product damage either power off the instrument or place the CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 7 Installation Description Icon Label Mouse VY Keyboard RS 232 Printer aaao LPT XVGA Out PC only for dual display Locations operation VIDEO OO Compact disk drive disc USB ccersseseseseeess lt lt MIC A iiien iiy ate A Audio line out A Audio line in AN Removable hard drive or floppy
328. ments User Manual 3 141 Measuring Waveforms Using Automatic Measurements 3 142 Take Measurements on a Frame In FastFrame measurements are taken only on the displayed frame Read the following topics they provide the details that can help you set up automatic measurements so that they best support your data analysis tasks Measurement Selection The instrument takes automatic measurements of the following categories Amplitude Timing More Histogram and Comm optional on TDS7000B Series Check Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported for a listing of the measurements that you can choose Number of Measurements The instrument can take and update up to eight measurements at one time You can apply measurements to any combination of sources described below You can take all eight measurements on Ch1 for example or you can take measurements on Ch1 Ch4 Math1 Math4 Refl Ref4 or a histogram Measurement Sources All channel reference and math waveforms can serve as sources for automatic measurements Some measurements such as delay and phase require two sources For example delay would be used to measure an input from one measurement source for example C1 with respect to an output in another source C2 High Low Method The levels that the automatic measurement system derives as the High Top or Low Bottom for a waveform influence the fidelity of amplitude and aberration measurements You can select a
329. ments and resources See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup Trig Display Cursors Horizontal Acquisition Setup N Zoom Controls Autoset Undo Last Autoset East Acquisitions Acquisition uisition Mode m Fast Acquisitions Roll Pk Detect Hi Res muds EJ Envelope WfmDB EE INTENSITY 3 33 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set Roll Mode Cont Control elements and resources To disable roll 6 Touch the Horiz button Select Acquisition tab from the Horiz mode Horiz Acq control window Or select Horizontal Acquisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control ee window Select the Acquisition tab Undo Last Autoset East Acquisitions 7 Select Roll Mode OFF to disable roll mode Acquisition Or whenever you set the Horizontal SCALE to 40 ms pistona Fast Acquisitions eS per division or faster roll mode turns off At record Pk Detect Hi Res Ra lengths greater than 500 points the time per division JIL required to turn off roll mode becomes slower q Envelope WimDB EE Note Envelope Average Fast Acquisition and Waveform Database acquisition modes inhibit roll mode Acquisition Control Background This section contains background information on the data sampling and acquisition process that can help you more effectively set up the acquisition window of each channel This section describes the following m The ac
330. method the acquisition mode to turn on or off DPO mode and to define and enable FastFrame setups What do you want to do next Learn about Acquisition modes 1 Learn about FastFrame Learn about External Reference 3 264 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To dig deeper CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 6 4 To use online help Cont You can search for help using the usual methods available for help on a PC From the menu bar select Help and then select Contents and Index From the online help finder see below choose from the three Contents tabs Topics TDS7000B and CSA7OOOB Ser X Index Find Click atopic and then click Display Or click another tab such as Index Control elements and resources Utilities EE Buttons Help on Window F1 Contents and Index LS Specifications Technical Support Customer Feedback About TekScope Boy ea en ESN ey SN I Introducing the TDS 0008 and CS5A70008 Series Instruments Alouch Screen Front Panel Connectors vertical Controls Horizontal Controls zoom Controls Trigger Controls Run Stop Controls General Purpose Controls Multipurpose Knobs 2en Interface feta ktop i Panel srence Information Touch to explore the topic titles and to h
331. mode but Envelope mode unlike Peak Detect gathers peaks over many trigger events m Average The instrument processes the number of waveforms that you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running average of the input signal This mode reduces random noise Acquiring and displaying a noisy square wave signal illustrates the difference between the modes Note how Average reduces the noise while Envelope captures its extremes Fife he EEA eF Sample Peak Detect Hi Res Envelope Average m Waveform Database Using waveform database technology the instrument processes a much larger sample of data The waveform database is a three dimensional accumulation of source waveform data over several acquisitions In addition to amplitude and timing information the database includes a count of the number of times a specific waveform point time and amplitude has been acquired The database is 200 lines by 500 columns with a 64 bit counter for each pixel location You can use color graded displays based on counts to highlight waveform activity Parametric 3 26 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms measurements derived from the database use statistical techniques to produce more stable accurate results If you select Infinite Persistence the counts accumulate continuously Samples sets the minimum number of sampl
332. mong the modes the instrument provides for determining these levels You can set the modes differently for each measurement m Histogram Sets the values statistically It selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Histogram is the best setting for examining pulses See Figure 3 36 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms High Min Max High Mean High Histogram Mid reference Low Histogram Low Mean Low Min Max Figure 3 36 High Low tracking methods m Min max Uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses See Figure 3 36 m Histogram mean Sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the mean or average value derived using all values either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level This setting is best for examining eye patterns and optical signals See Figure 3 36 m Noise Optional on TDS7000B Series Tells the instrument if the noise measurement is at the top or the bottom of the eye diagram m
333. move the help out of the way so you can operate the DOSER NE instrument Touch the Help Topics Print Options Close Minimize Restore Help button to Horizontal amp Acquisition Setup Control Window Acquisition Tab see the last help topic Access this control window from the Acquisition tab of the Horizontal Control Window again Overview Acquistion Mode Y Fast Acquisitions Roll Mode Equivalent Time Patrol Window Overview Use these controls to set the acquisition setups of all live channel waveforms The acquisition controls are common to all channels Touch a tab in a help window to navigate between the Overview and specific topics of Wims Touch an outlined control it shown in the help window re Acquisition is the process of sampling the analog input signal digitizing the signal to convert it into digital data and then assembling the to receive more specific signal information into a waveform record The instrument creates a digital representation of the input signal by sampling the voltage level of i i the signal at regular time intervals The sampled and digitized points are stored in memory along with the corresponding timing information information about the The instrument uses the digital representation of the signal for display for measurements or for further processing control You can use the acquisition controls of the Horizontal Acquisition control window to define the sampling
334. n cc cece ccc cette eee eeeee Assemble Equipment 0c00y agen abn ad eave oa deer dad dae ea inl Self TBa te Sie she Wane y Vee ie ab Ae Vee eget oe eens He A Functional Tests ios ois yawa et AAA OWAN ERARA Check Vertical Operation sor owsst atas Pes ada doe E E AS Check Horizontal Operation 0 cece e cece ee eee eens Check Trigger Operation sen 0 0 eee eee eee eee eee Check Fil Systema was sone ie ney ee Ae Oa eens Se Perform the Extended Diagnostics 2 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee ee Accessories amp Options 0 cece cece cece cece cece cece eeeee OPULODS sien aa ahi sah OAN gute ay sae cata aaah Max a tis ates PNCCOSSOMES el iu aa Baca ck Gel ogee a pao ge haga EEE AA Mang Seas ae MEO aad tele Operating Basics Operational Maps ccc cece cece cere a eee ecees Documentation Map cece cece cece cece cece e cece eees System Overview Maps cece cece cece e rece ee cecees Functional Model Map 0 cece cece eee een e nen eens Process Overview Map 02 cece eee eee eee tee eee O User Interface Map Complete Control and Display CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual xi xiii xiii xiv Ii i ierrnrnerhem eepe meme L l l o l PRR RRR f f m i oe oe i VUR WWNNNNNNN m ABR NDD ALUN AmE IYAWNEFHTONIAUH ULP Table of Contents Reference Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Fea
335. n m Try switching the acquisition to Envelope mode Envelope searches for samples with the highest and lowest values over multiple acquisitions and can detect faster signal components over time m Turn on PeakDetect acquisition mode If the waveform becomes an envelope aliasing was occurring To Set Acquisition Modes Use the procedure that follows to set the data acquisition mode and specify CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 29 Acquiring Waveforms Overview Prerequisites To select an acquisition mode Select the acquisition mode Set waveform count average and envelope only Set the stop mode 3 30 1 acquisition start stop methods For more information display online help when performing the procedure To set acquisition modes Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls set up Triggering should also be set up Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq setup window Touch an Acquisition Mode button to set the acquisition mode choose from the following modes Sample m Peak Detect m HiRes Envelope m Average m Waveform Database For Average and Envelope modes only select the number of acquisitions to average or envelope For Waveform Database mode select the number of samples desired Push the RUN STOP button or touch Run Stop in the Run Stop control window to toggle between starting Ru
336. n amplitude related measurements Note that the acquisition window also includes I division above and below the displayed graticule area See Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 18 Trigger and Display Set basic trigger controls to gate waveform acquisition and use the display to interactively scale position and offset waveforms See the sections Triggering on page 3 63 and Displaying Waveforms on page 3 119 Flexible Control Access This manual focuses on basic setup through the front panel and then through use of the User Interface UI Application displayed on screen The online help system also documents the UI CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 11 Acquiring Waveforms To Set Up Signal Input Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to scale and position input signals for acquisition For more information display online help while performing the procedure Overview To set up signal input Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The acquisition system should be set to run continuously See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup Connect input 2 Connect to the signal to be acquired using proper Z SS signal probing and connecting techniques ojpooooco g Q E D EA Note For more details on control over input setup push l 2 8E S the Vert button to display the Vertical control window ola ols and
337. n and if in service mode instrument calibration Displays a window that you use to run instrument diagnostics and view the diagnostic status and error log If errors are displayed refer the instrument to qualified service personnel Deassigns the multipurpose knobs from their current function Set the multipurpose knob readouts to display momentarily always or never Displays and allows you to set the time the momentary readouts are displayed Displays a window that you use to enable prompts before the instrument performs requested actions autoset autoset undo default recall setup overwrite delete setup or delete reference waveform set keypad trigger level defaults select whether horizontal scale or sample rate is held constant when you change record length and select the type of measurement annotations Displays a window that you use to enable optional features and external applications 1 If error code 512 is displayed from the Utilities Instrument Calibration menu run Signal Path Compensation and then from the Utilities Instrument Diagnostics menu run the diagnostics CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 15 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Help Commands Table C 13 lists the commands available from the Help menu on the menu bar Table C 13 Help menu commands Menu Help on Window Contents and Index Restore Help Specifications Technical Support Customer Feedback About TekScope
338. n displays the waveform at the normal display rate You can CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 41 Acquiring Waveforms control the waveform intensity using adjustable or automatic brightness see To adjust the intensity on page 3 46 for more information Fast Acquisitions mode adds intensity or gray scale information like an analog instrument to each point in the waveform array The waveform array is a three dimensional array two dimensions of display pixels and a third dimension of pixel values Display pixel values are incremented each time they are written by a waveform acquisition 3 42 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Normal DSO mode 1st acquired Next acquired Next acquired waveform record waveform record waveform record hol EA Ee N J N J N J y y vy x Dead time Dead time Dead time Waveform Waveform Waveform memory memory memory Display Updated display Updated display Fast Acquisition mode Acquired waveform records Waveform Waveform Waveform Intensity controls gt memory Intensity controls gt memory Intensity controls gt memory bit maps bit maps bit maps Fast acquisitions display Fast acquisitions displa
339. n the output CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Reference Level 20 048 Level Offset 223 6mV Reference Level k G Level Offset 223 6mY m Reference Level am Level Offset G EE 3 209 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a spectral math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources Set the phase 13 Select the Phase tab scale Suppression Threshold 200 00B 14 To select the vertical scale factor touch Degree Radian or GroupDelay m Degree sets the phase units to degrees Phase is displayed using degrees as the scale where degrees wrap from 180 to 180 m Radian sets the phase units to radians Phase is displayed using radians as the scale where radians wrap from st to 7 m GroupDelay unwraps the phase spectrum and displays its negative derivative The topic Using the Phase Controls on page 3 190 provides in depth information on the setup for phase displays 15 To specify whether to unwrap phase in a spectral analysis phase waveform touch Unwrap to toggle it on Ee or off 16 To set the level in dB that a magnitude in the spectrum must exceed to have its phase computed to reduce the effect of noise in your phase waveform touch Suppression Threshold and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the threshold level I
340. nabled and then press Enter 9 Press the F10 key to save and exit Confirm the Save of Configuration changes when you are prompted on screen 10 Use the Windows network setup utility to define the instrument as a network client and configure it for your network You can find the network setup utility in the Windows Start menu if you select Settings gt Control Panel and then double click Network Consult your network administrator for specific instructions to make these settings NOTE If you want to disable network access for the instrument perform the above procedure except substitute Disabled for the command listed in step 8 The instrument will boot faster with network access disabled Setting up a Dual Display Use the following steps to set up the instrument for dual display operation You can operate the instrument while having full use of Windows and other applica tions on the external monitor CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 17 Installation 1 Use the On Standby switch to power down 2 Connect a keyboard and mouse 3 Connect an external monitor 4 Power on 0 o Se lo oo OD a 6 oA cp HEBEEEEEE off Je O OKKA JO 0000o SaaS SEEE J Eee ole lSs8 o ere re
341. nd and then touch Enter m Verify that the trigger READY indicator on the front panel flashes about once every second as the waveform is updated on screen 8 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the Probe Compensation output Check File System Equipment required One BNC cable One 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch DOS compatible formatted disk One TCA BNC TekConnect adapter None Prerequisites 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the equipment to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 1 13 Instrument under test a QS lt BNC cable from PROBE COMPENSATION output to CH 1 input Figure 1 13 Setup for the file system test 3 Insert the test disk Insert the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive 4 Set up the instrument Push the front panel AUTOSET button 5 Touch the Vert button and then touch Offset Adjust the Ch1 Offset to 0 25 V using the multipurpose knob 1 30 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Incoming Inspection 6 Set the Vertical SCALE to 100 mV per division 7 Set the time base Set the horizontal SCALE to 1 ms div The time base readout is displayed at the bottom of the graticule 8 Save the settings a Pull down the File menu to select Instrument Setup This displays the instrument setups control window Touch th
342. nd noise you subtract must be identical to the noise in your signal Or you can integrate a single waveform into an integral math waveform as shown below Source waveform 1 Math waveform 1 With spectral analysis you can analyze waveforms in the frequency domain The interface is similar to a dedicated spectrum analyzer relieving you of the burden of knowing the details of the underlying algorithms see Figure 3 43 S i Curst Pos i i 72 5MHz Normal waveform of an gt mn impulse response Gata Mie Mane v Center Freq FFT waveform of the gt Hpt Fi p 7 Freq Span magnitude response Pe esis Res BW 40 0MHz_ Ref Level 20 008 FFT waveform of the gt m t m phase response peer tills IG 100mv Q WW y2 57 1dB 2 72 5MHz 200ns div HEH 20 0dB 31 2MH OMG Ay 4 160B 2 145 OMHZ 25GS s 400ps pt 1 0 125MHz Ay Af 57 38ndB Af 72 5MHz DE 4 0mVv gt 52 34dB Figure 3 43 Spectral analysis of an impulse CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 167 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Defining Math Waveforms 3 168 This instrument supports mathematical combination and functional transforma tions of waveforms it acquires Figure 3 44 shows this concept Channel waveform Math expression Math waveform Ch2 Function source Math1 Figure 3 44 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform You c
343. ndicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the high and low ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 3 horizontal arrows on the mid ref indicating the start mid and end time End arrows point toward each other and the mid arrow points toward the positive part of the cycle In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 3 horizontal arrows on the mid ref indicating the start mid and end time End arrows point toward each other and the mid arrow points toward the negative part of the cycle In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows pointing toward each other at their own mid refs indicating the start and end time In detailed mode
344. ndow 3 109 A Then B A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 110 3 116 A Trigger holdoff 3 74 level presets 3 75 3 76 trigger when 3 97 A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 89 3 94 3 96 3 98 3 99 3 102 3 109 3 115 lt 3 84 gt 3 84 A Only 3 109 AND 3 96 3 98 3 103 Chi Ch2 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 94 3 96 3 98 3 100 3 103 clock source 3 100 data source 3 100 define inputs 3 96 3 98 3 100 3 101 3 103 define pattern type 3 96 3 98 3 103 delay time 3 110 either 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 falling edge 3 98 3 100 FALSE 3 96 3 99 glitch 3 83 3 84 3 102 level 3 84 3 88 3 95 logic 3 96 3 98 3 99 lower level 3 92 NAND 3 96 3 98 3 103 negative 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 NOR 3 96 3 98 3 103 OR 3 96 3 98 3 103 pattern 3 96 polarity and width 3 83 3 85 3 87 positive 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 pulse 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 94 rising edge 3 98 3 100 runt 3 85 3 102 set thresholds 3 96 3 98 3 103 set to ECL 3 90 set to TTL 3 90 setup hold 3 99 3 102 slew rate 3 89 source 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 92 3 94 state 3 98 thresholds 3 86 3 90 timeout 3 94 3 102 timer 3 94 transition 3 89 3 102 trig delay 3 110 trigger if 3 93 trigger when 3 96 3 99 TRUE 3 96 3 99 upper level 3 92 width 3 87 3 102 window 3 92 3 102 A Trigger level ECL 3 75 3 76 TTL 3 75 3 76 user 3 75 3 76 A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 110 3 116 A Then B 3 110
345. next side lobe that occurs due to energy leakage Different windows have different leakage characteristics The more narrow the resolution bandwidth of the window the more leakage in the spectrum m Zero Phase Reference This is the position in the time domain gate that is the reference point for phase in the output spectrum That is if a sine wave input has its peak at the zero phase reference position then it reads out as zero phase in the spectrum If the phase is to be correct when doing impulse response testing the impulse in the time domain must be located at this position in the gate interval m Coefficients These are used to generate the windows which are constructed from a cosines series For the Gaussian window the value of a is given instead of a set of coefficients You can find descriptions of cosine series windows in Handbook of Digital Signal Processing Engineering Applica tions by Elliot ISBN 0 12 237075 9 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 195 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Gaussian Window This is the default window function see Figure 3 55 It is unique in that the time domain shape of an exponential Gaussian function transforms into a Gaussian exponential shape in the frequency domain This window provides optimal localization in both the time and the frequency domain This is the filter shape most commonly used in spectrum analyzers Amplitude
346. ng substeps to verify passing of internal diagnostics a Display the System diagnostics menu m Ifthe instrument is in toolbar mode touch the MENU button to put the instrument into menu bar mode From the Utilities menu select Instrument Diagnostics This displays the diagnostics control window b Run the System Diagnostics m First disconnect any input signals and probes from all four channels m Touch the Run button in the diagnostics control window c Wait The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper instrument function This verification will take several minutes When the verification is finished the resulting status will appear in the diagnostics control window NOTE If diagnostic error message 512 is displayed run signal path compensa tion and then rerun Instrument Diagnostics d Verify that no failures are found and reported on screen All tests should pass e Run the signal path compensation routine From the Utilities menu select Instrument Calibration This displays the Instrument Calibration control window Touch the Calibrate button to start the routine f Wait Signal path compensation may take five to ten minutes to run 1 22 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Incoming Inspection g Confirm signal path compensation returns passed status Verify that the word Pass appears in the instrument calibration control window 2 Re
347. nly with horizontal delay on B trigger after delay with horizontal delay off B trigger after delay with horizontal delay on B trigger on events with horizontal delay off B trigger on events with horizontal delay on Tif Reset is set waiting on B event s only occurs until Reset condition you specify is satisfied At that point the Trigger system resets and the sequence Wait for A Main trigger Reset restarts with waiting for the A Event Wait user specified trigger delay time Wait the user specified number of B trigger events Wait the user specified number of B trigger events Figure 3 31 Trigger and Horizontal Delay summary 3 108 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Wait for B trigger event Wait for B trigger event Wait user specified horizontal delay time Wait user specified horizontal delay time Wait user specified horizontal delay time Acquire posttrigger data Triggering Sequential Trigger Reset You can choose three methods to reset sequential triggers m None does not reset sequential triggers Triggers function as previously explained Timeout resets sequential triggers if the time you set expires before the B trigger event occurs m Transition resets sequential triggers if a signal transition you select occurs before the B trigger event occurs m State resets sequential triggers if a si
348. nnection and Conditioning This section presents overviews of the instrument features related to setting up the input signal for digitizing and acquisition It addresses the following topics m How to turn on channels and adjust vertical scale position and offset m How to set horizontal scale position and access record length and trigger position controls m How to get a basic trigger on your waveform NOTE Terminology This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and horizontal acquisition window throughout this section and elsewhere These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires The terms do not refer to any windows or display windows on screen Figure 3 1 shows the model for each input channel Scale K1 K2 K3 To the J N Coupling N Vertical offset D 50 Q remainder gt of the acquisition External Probe Sain attenuation Vertical scale Vertical Input position termination Figure 3 1 Input and Acquisition Systems and Controls 3 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Use input conditioning to ensure the instrument acquires the data that you want to display measure or otherwise process To ensure the best possible data for displaying and further processing do the following m Set the vertical scale to control the size of the vert
349. nnection and Conditioning How to connect waveforms to the instrument channels how to scale and position the channels and timebase for acquiring waveforms Setting Acquisition Controls How to choose the appropriate acquisition mode for acquiring your waveforms how to start and stop acquisition Acquisition Control Background Background information on the data sampling and acquisition process Using Fast Acquisition Mode Using Fast Acquisition mode to capture and display transient events such as glitches or runt pulses often missed during longer dead times that accompany normal DSO operation Using FastFrame Using FastFrame to capture many records in a larger record and then view and measure each record individually OIE Converter CSA7000B Series Using the Optical to Electrical Converter to test optical signals Storage Waveform transform system Trigger Horizontal Auxiliary l trigger m time base CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 7 Acquiring Waveforms NOTE This section describes how the vertical and horizontal controls define the acquisition of live waveforms These controls also define how all waveforms are displayed both live and derived waveforms math waveforms reference waveforms and so on The sections that follow cover display related usage m Displaying Waveforms on page 3 119 m Creating and Using Math Waveforms on page 3 167 Signal Co
350. nning and stopping acquisitions Push the SINGLE button or touch Single Sequence in the Run Stop control window to acquire enough waveforms to satisfy the acquisition mode and then stop Control elements and resources See page 3 63 for trigger setup Horizontal Acquisition Acquisition Mode Sample Pk Detect Hi Res EN E S WH m o E Average Envelope l of Wims 16 INTENSITY CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To select real time or equivalent time sampling To set acquisition modes Cont To select real time sampling interpolated real time sampling or equivalent time sampling Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq control window Or select Horizontal Acquisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control window Select the Acquisition tab Select the sampling mode m Equivalent Time uses both the real time and equivalent time sampling as appropriate see Table 3 2 on page 3 38 Real Time Only limits the instrument to real time sampling Real Time Only prevents the very fast horizontal scale settings from being selected m Interpolated Real Time limits the instrument to real time sampling If the instrument cannot accurately get enough samples for a complete waveform it will interpolate Note The instrument will use the interpola
351. noe ess Tran Transition A Select At wet Stand Y To specify the direction of the pulse edge touch Slope ca cs oye POS ither and select Pos positive Neg negative or Either from the window Pos monitors the transition time slew rate of the positive going edges of pulses The edge must first cross the lower threshold and then cross the upper threshold Neg monitors the transition time slew rate of the negative going edges of pulses The edge must first cross the upper threshold and then cross the lower threshold m Either monitors positive and negative going edges of pulses The edge may first cross either threshold and then cross the other CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 89 Triggering Overview To trigger based on transition time Cont Control elements and resources Set the The threshold levels and the delta time setting determine the transition time transition time slew rate setting To set these parameters Mode A Transition gt Acquire 5 Touch the Upper Level or Lower Level button and use Source Transition Time Trigger the upper and lower levels Upper Level BE the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the values for Triooer vee Transition Note You can set the level to a value appropriate to Lower Level either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch Level Tigger Lovee MEE and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL To
352. not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Wear Eye Protection Wear eye protection if exposure to high intensity rays or laser radiation exists Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual xiii General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property A A Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Earth Te
353. nsible for paying any associated taxes or duties This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or consumables d to repair a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product or e to repair damage or malfunction resulting from failure to perform user maintenance and cleaning at the frequency and as prescribed in the user manual if applicable THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER
354. nt Control elements and resources To select the XYZ This format compares the voltage levels of the format Cont CH 1 X and CH 2 Y waveform records point by point as in XY format XYZ requires Fast Acquisitions mode The displayed waveform intensity is modulated by the CH 3 Z waveform record XYZ format is not triggered A 5 division signal including position and offset on CH 3 produces a blank screen a 5 division signal produces full intensity For help 3 For more information on the controls described in this procedure touch the Disp or Horiz button Touch the HELP button in the toolbar Table 3 4 XY and XYZ format assignments CSA7000B Series and TDS7000B Series In fast acquisition Using FastFrame 3 48 Ch3 FastFrame is an acquisition mode that lets you capture many records in a larger record and then view and measure each record individually FastFrame lets you quickly capture multiple acquisitions in the acquisition memory of a single channel Figure 3 16 shows how FastFrame combines the desired captured frames into one larger waveform For example FastFrame would let you store 4000 frames depending on the record length option installed of 500 samples each into one waveform FastFrame mode lets you jump to and view the frame that you select Time Stamps can display the absolute trigger time for a specific frame and the relative time between triggers of two specified frames FastFrame lets you
355. nt math waveform is an integral waveform its vertical scale is in volt seconds its horizontal scale is in seconds The source signal is integrated over its entire record length therefore the math waveform record length equals that of the source waveform Offset and Position When creating integrated math waveforms from live channel waveforms consider the following topics m You should scale and position the source waveform so that it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped which will result in errors in the integral waveform m You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your integral waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so that it is clipped DC Offset The source waveforms that you connect to the instrument often have a DC offset component The instrument integrates this offset along with the time varying portions of your waveform Even a few divisions of offset in the source waveform may be enough to ensure that the integral waveform saturates clips especially with long record lengths 3 174 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Define a Math Waveform Use the procedure that follows when defining a math waveform Remember to ensure that the sources you use exist Acquisitions should be running or the channels should al
356. nter 3 186 center frequency 3 212 3 214 coefficients 3 194 3 195 coherent gain 3 194 dB 3 188 3 209 dBm 3 188 3 209 defining spectral math waveforms 3 182 definition of gate parameters illustrated 3 185 degree 3 210 display the math control window 3 206 3 207 display the spectral waveform 3 208 duration 3 183 3 213 duration and resolution control effects illustrated 3 184 example 3 215 example of scallop loss for a Hanning Window without zero fill illustration 3 195 example of the effects of setting the phase suppres sion threshold illustrated 3 191 FFT length 3 193 Flattop2 window 3 192 3 194 3 201 3 211 frequency domain controls 3 182 frequency domain span 3 213 frequency range 3 212 frequency span 3 212 gate controls 3 184 gate duration 3 213 gate position 3 213 gating controls 3 182 Gaussian window 3 192 3 194 3 196 3 211 group delay 3 191 3 210 Hamming window 3 192 3 194 3 198 3 211 Hanning window 3 192 3 194 3 199 3 211 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 17 Index how aliased frequencies appear in a spectral waveform illustrated 3 205 impulse response testing 3 191 Kaiser Bessel window 3 192 3 194 3 199 3 211 linear 3 188 3 209 magnitude verses frequency 3 182 multiple analyzer control locks 3 183 nearest side lobe 3 194 3 195 phase reference point 3 213 phase reference position 3 190 phase unwrap 3 190 a
357. nts 3 140 cursor types 3 151 3 152 cursor units depend on sources 3 154 cursors are display limited 3 152 cursors ignore the selected waveform 3 152 cursors treat sources independently 3 153 customize measurements 3 141 display measurement statistics 3 146 display the calibration instructions 3 161 display the cursor controls window 3 155 enable amp position the gates 3 150 FastFrame 3 142 gates 3 141 gating 3 150 graticule cursor and automatic measurements 3 140 high low method 3 142 histogram 3 142 3 148 histogram counting 3 158 histogram counting stays on 3 158 histogram mean 3 143 3 148 histogram measurements 3 160 histogram size 3 158 horizontal cursors 3 151 horizontal histogram view and measurement data illustrated 3 157 indep cursor 3 156 low frequency compensation 3 163 math waveforms 3 141 3 142 max 3 146 mean 3 146 measure part of a waveform 3 141 measurement gating 3 150 measurement selection 3 142 measurement sources 3 142 min 3 146 min max 3 143 3 148 multipurpose knobs 3 154 noise 3 143 number of measurements 3 142 open histogram setup window 3 158 optimizing measurement accuracy 3 160 paired cursors 3 151 reference levels method 3 143 reference level calculation methods 3 144 references 3 141 3 142 relative reference 3 143 remove measurements 3 145 see statistics on measurement results 3 141 select a cursor
358. nts User Manual Appendix A Specifications Optical to Electrical Converter CSA7000B Series only Test optical signals using the integrated optical to electrical converter and a fully calibrated signal path Recovered clock and data signals are available Optical reference receivers are available for selected optical communications standards Signal Processing Average Envelope and Hi Res Acquisition Use Average acquisition mode to Features remove uncorrelated noise from your signal Use Envelope to capture and display the maximum variation of the signal Use Hi Res to increase vertical resolution for lower bandwidth signals Waveform Math Set up simple math waveforms using the basic arithmetic functions or create more advanced math waveforms using the math expression editor Waveform expressions can even contain measurement results and other math waveforms Spectral Analysis Display spectral magnitude and phase waveforms based on your time domain acquisitions Control the instrument using the traditional spectrum analyzer controls such as span and center frequency Display Features Color LCD Display Identify and differentiate waveforms easily with color coding Waveforms readouts and inputs are color matched to increase productivity and reduce operating errors Enhance visualization of waveforms with color grading Digital Phosphor The instrument can clearly display intensity modulation in your signals The instrument automatical
359. nts and resources Display the 6 From the toolbar touch Math and select the spectral math Math 1 tab waveform Spectral Analysis 7 Touch the Predefined Mag button m Predefined The instrument sets up a predefined magnitude spectral a a analysis waveform 8 To see the settings touch the Spectral Analysis Setup Me uny Sberaanicr button 3 oie Rec Length Window Type Center Freq nae 500C ETA 62 EkH2 Scale sets the vertical scale factor and lets you set Leva oft Sim eon pir the vertical scale Duration Gate pur Resolution Gate Length Res BW 50 500 OH m Reference sets the value at the top of the display ethos and offset sets the waveform position with respect to its ground reference m Rec Length sets the number of samples in the waveform acquisition Sample rate sets the sample rate Duration sets the time over the acquired waveform also changes record length Resolution controls sample rate and record length to keep the duration constant while changing the time between samples of the acquired waveform 3 216 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Display the spectral math waveform Cont Spectral math example cont Window Type affects the shape of the spectral analyzer response in the frequency domain that is the ability to resolve frequency in the output spectrum Gate Position sets th
360. o ce C aEADY level settings shared or independent of the Source selection ENE patien m Shared makes level settings the same for all trigger Sr SS gS sources m Independent makes level settings apply only to the selected trigger source CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 69 Triggering Overview To set to 50 5 To select the 6 trigger source 3 70 Triggering from the front panel Cont To quickly obtain an edge glitch timeout serial or width trigger push the trigger LEVEL knob The instrument sets the trigger level to the halfway point between the peaks of the trigger signal This function has no effect for the other advanced trigger types You can also set the level to 50 in the Trigger control window When the phased locked loop is active Comm and Serial Trigger only which are optional on the TDS7000B Series pushing the trigger LEVEL knob recycles the clock recovery trigger circuit The instrument will attempt to acquire lock once If the input data is disrupted removed or heavily distorted the instrument may not acquire lock or may lose lock If the recovered clock is not locked to the incoming data the waveform display will not be stable Once the input data is available press the PUSH SET TO 50 knob to force the instrument to reacquire lock When using Comm triggering pushing the trigger PUSH SET TO 50 knob sets the levels for the selected code Push the up
361. o Use Online Help oriye rron ryn eee cece eens 3 263 Appendix A Specifications 0 ccc ccc cece eee ee eee A 1 Product and Feature Description ss iasi sies saaa Sia cee cee cee eee A 2 Acquisition Features oiean 0 eee cece ence eens A 2 Signal Processing Features ocna i saor an EAA EEEN eee A 3 Display Features ar a aA a aa S A ANAA UNA Benes epee ss A 3 Measurement Features eio cc n cece e a A 3 TSE ECU aa a aE a Btw aa a a N a A aE RA A 4 Convenience Features 0 ce cece eee eee A 4 Specification Ta Bless na sea eG Pee e Bias ty eee WG eed rol can lela esa eee del aes A 5 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported B 1 Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements B 5 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements 0000 0000 B 6 P Valles ities ep cotta Wao ee ee Raa ae Get ee de B 7 TI Values sere sch oe Sat sted a Sak ONE E AA ach ated wae al B 8 T2 Values io sles cnet nei a age Se eed ate Wes aca a ane ed weaned B 8 DED Valdis pruna tact sei EEEE Stu Ale ed ah ee asad a ate Waal ees ee cel B 8 Measurements Annotations 0 0 eee c ccc cee eee eees B 9 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands eeeeeeeceeeeee C 1 File commandS derya eaaa E ihdged a EE E N we ce ace wean GT C 1 Edi Command s tan ie eh A rhe ATAR wate eth eects C 3 Vertical COMMANAS 0 55 0 0 55 48 t sete speek ce eevee ones eye eea ha e uae s ecules C 4 Horizontal and Acquisition Commands
362. o create user masks Displays the Mask Edit control window that you use to edit user masks Table C 10 lists the commands available from the Math menu on the menu bar CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual C 13 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 10 Math menu commands Menu Math Setup Display On Off Position Scale Label Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Spectral Setup Magnitude Spectrum Phase Spectrum Spectral Controls Set Math Averages Equation Editor Function Displays the Math Setup control window that you use to create math waveforms Toggles the display of math waveforms on and off Displays the vertical Position and Scale control window that you can use to change the vertical position and scale of waveforms Displays a control window that you use to label your waveforms Creates a predefined math waveform Creates a predefined math waveform Creates a predefined math waveform Creates a predefined math waveform Displays the Spectral Math Setup control window that you use to create spectral math waveforms Creates a predefined magnitude spectral math waveform Creates a predefined phase spectral math waveform Displays the Spectral Math controls window that you can use to control your spectral math waveform Displays the Math Averaging controls window that you use to set up averaging in math waveforms Displays the Math Equation Editor setup window that you use to create math wav
363. o setup B 1 To set the B Event trigger from the toolbar touch Trig Tri triggering and select the B Event tab of the Trigger control window 2 To specify the trigger type select it from the Trigger Leon Type list The Trigger control window will display controls for the trigger type you select m p Set 50 3 To set the trigger controls for the type you selected Se make appropriate settings in the controls that displayed from step 2 For assistance click Help from the toolbar to display help on the controls Trigger Levels You can also read about setting up the various trigger iN types in the procedures that follow Just remember to select the B Event tab not the A when setting up B trigger types m To Trigger on a Glitch on page 3 83 m To Trigger on a Runt Pulse on page 3 85 m Trigger Based on Pulse Width on page 3 87 7o Trigger Based on Transition Time on page 3 89 m Triggering on a Window on page 3 92 m Trigger Based on Pulse Timeout on page 3 94 m Trigger on a Pattern on page 3 95 To Trigger on a State on page 3 98 To Trigger on Setup Hold Time Violations on page 3 99 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 115 Triggering Overview To Reset if 1 no B Trigger For further assistance 3 116 To trigger on a sequence Cont 4 To set the trigger system to reset the sequence if a B trigger does not occur within certain constrains from t
364. om the menu bar or toolbar anywhere in the graticule or on an object The shortcut menu is context sensitive and varies with the area or object where you right clicked Some examples are shown in the figure at right Turn Math 1 OFF Edit Expression Spectral Controls Set Math Averages Set Math Variables Add Measurement r Label Color Save Wim Save All Waveforms Right click Math waveform handle 2 6 Clear Data Autoset Default Setup Cursors Screen Capture Save All Waveforms Add Screen Text Display Format Display Persistence Color Palette Graticule Style Minimize Ctr Trigger Source Trigger Coupling Slope Set Level to SO Mode HoldoFF Trigger Levi Marker gt Right click Trigger readout Math Scale 20 ny Remove Remove Al Statistics Reference Levels Gating changeMeas Source Change Al Meas Sources gt B change Meas Type Right click Statistics CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual a ae eee Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Use these buttons to start and stop acquisition or start a single acquisition sequence The ARM READY and TRIG D lights show the acquisition status Page 3 72 Turn knob to adjust waveform intensity Page 3 46 Push button to turn Fast Acquisition on or off Page 3 40 Use these knobs and buttons to set the trigger parameters Push AD
365. on when Horiz Delay and Ref Position are zero T1 readout Time to First Point Additional Time to Cursor Cursor Units Depend on Sources A cursor that measures amplitude or time will read out in the units of its source as indicated in Table 3 10 Note mixed sources require Delta Cursor readouts to follow units of the cursor 1 source Table 3 10 Cursor units Cursors Standard units Readout names Horizontal volts watts V1 V2 AV Vertical seconds bits T1 T2 AT F1 F2 AF Waveform Screen volts watts seconds bits V1 V2 AV T1 T2 AT 1 If the V1 and V2 units do not match the AV readout defaults to the units used by the V1 readout Multipurpose knobs You can change cursor position using the position controls in the Cursor setup window dragging the cursor into position using the touch screen or mouse or by turning the front panel multipurpose knobs The multipurpose knobs also work with other controls If a setup window item has an adjustable value you can adjust it with the multipurpose knob or keypad after touching the setup control NOTE To make small changes with the multipurpose knobs push the FINE button before turning the knob When a FINE button is illuminated its multipur pose knob makes smaller adjustments 3 154 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Set the Cursor Sources Overview Prerequisites Display the cursor controls windo
366. onnect the Probe Calibration Fixture 0004 3 162 To Calibrate Probes isus ices ea il oe eed gs Re ol RE a ee se 3 162 To Deskew Channels soe casei fa ie ee eats ee al oa a ee ge 3 162 To Compensate Passive Probes 00 eee eee cee cee eee 3 163 Serial Mask Testing oracio ccc cece cee eee eee eee e eee eee 3 165 Creating and Using Math Waveforms ceeeeececees 3 167 Defining Math Waveforms 0 ce ccc cee cee eens 3 168 Usine MoE yaaa eta th acts dyer di atevin bo eine AAA CETA Placevie Se oier oh 3 169 To Define a Math Waveform d eretar cece eee eee 3 175 Operations on Math Waveforms 0 00 cece cece eee eee 3 177 Using Math Waveforms biek EEE cece eee eens 3 178 To Use Math Waveforms enserrer biei cee ccc cece eens 3 179 Defining Spectral Math Waveforms 0 c cee eee eee eee 3 182 Using Spectral Math Controls 0 0c cece eee eee 3 183 Recognizing Aliasing 60 eee a cee eee 3 204 To Select a Predefined Spectral Math Waveform 0 3 206 To Define a Spectral Math Waveform 0 0 0 0 e eee 3 207 Spectral Math Example serait ros tiri urt cece cee eee 3 215 Data Input Output bisa dve ea Soils Guevis Sedna wears iaie 3 221 Saving and Recalling a Setup 0 cee ee ee eee eee 3 221 Using Auto Increment File Name 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 222 TO Save Your Setups ewe oe an sew eed We TO
367. ons Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual D 1 Appendix D Cleaning Flat Panel Display Cleaning D 2 A The display is soft plastic and must be treated with care during cleaning CAUTION Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel display Do not use abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display Do not spray liquids directly on the display surface Do not scrub the display with excessive force Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a clean room wipe such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes 05701 available from Kimberly Clark Corporation If the display is very dirty moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface Avoid using excess force or you may damage the plastic display surface CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual a ae Glossary AC coupling A type of signal transmission that blocks the DC component of a signal but uses the dynamic AC component Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition The process of sampling signals from input channels digitizing the samples into data points and assembling the data points
368. ontrol window 6 Inthe Palette window select Color or Black amp White for the color palette of your exported images 7 In the View window select whether you want to export the Full Screen or Graticules Only 8 In the Image window select whether you want to export using Normal or InkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color Mode Normal exports the image exactly as it appears on screen m nkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color exports the image with colors designed to print with the white background 9 Touch Data Format and select the data format from the drop down list Control elements and resources a Export Setup EJ Images Waveforms Measurements fz Promptfor Filename Palette Image before Exporting Color Nomel C Black amp White C InkSaverMode me seedy Enhanced Pi View ata Format Eull Screen Stee alls Graticule s Only Bimep EMP Readouts Below Graticule Bpot oK Cancel Help a Export Setup EJ Images Waveforms Measurements fr Promptfor Filename Palette Image before Exporing Color Normal Black amp White C InkSever Mode earen Ponema Enhanced p Viw Data Format Full Screen Erz C Graticule s Only Bitmap EMP x JPEG R PNG Readouts Below Graticule Epot OK Cancel Help CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview Setup to export waveforms To save a
369. ontrol knob Glossary 3 Control window Glossary 3 A Trigger 3 83 3 85 3 89 3 94 3 96 3 98 3 99 3 102 3 109 A gt B Seq Trigger 3 110 3 116 B trigger 3 115 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 3 Index Controlling data input and output 3 221 Copy C 3 a waveform 3 246 setup C 3 waveforms 3 246 Copy MyScope control window 3 261 Copying waveforms 3 235 Coupling 3 10 C 4 ground Glossary 7 trigger 3 67 Create custom control window 3 257 Create MyScope control window 3 257 Creating and using math waveforms 3 167 Cross hair graticule 3 137 C 9 Crossing B 4 C 12 Cursor 3 150 controls C 11 measurements 3 140 3 151 3 214 mode C 11 position 3 155 C 11 sources 3 155 style 3 156 tracking 3 156 type 3 155 C 11 types 3 152 units 3 154 Cursor controls window 3 155 Cursor measurements 3 214 Cursor readout V bars 3 214 Cursors 3 151 Glossary 3 using 3 152 with derivative waveforms 3 173 3 181 with FFT waveforms 3 205 3 214 Cursors menu cursor controls C 11 cursor mode C 11 cursor position C 11 cursor setup C 11 cursor type C 11 h bars C 11 independent C 11 screen C 11 track C 11 v bars C 11 waveform C 11 Custom control window 3 257 Customer feedback C 16 Customize measurements 3 141 Customizing the display 3 131 Cycle area B 1 C 12 Glossary 3 Cycle distortion B 5 C 12 Cycle mean B 1 C 11
370. op2 WIN OW ososan inro 6 Fae FES 5S ESOS TRONS Oa eT WERT OR ESS 3 202 Figure 3 62 Tek Exponential window in the time and the frequency COMAINS 6 055 62858 855065 MoS 6480 65 5 86 PRES TOS SOS SRS 3 203 Figure 3 63 How aliased frequencies appear in a spectral Waveform 53 64 oie Pads Peek FOS d Sone Sebi eee Vases Serra 3 205 Figure 3 64 Auto increment file name feature 68 3 223 Figure 3 65 Print window cc cece cece cece eee eeeees 3 250 Figure 3 66 Hardcopy formats cece eee reece eens 3 251 Figure 3 67 Page setup window c cece ec ceceececes 3 252 Figure 3 68 Print preview window ccceeeeceececes 3 253 Figure B 1 Levels used to determine measurements B 5 Figure B 2 Eye diagram and optical values 0005 B 7 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual ix Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information Table 1 2 Line fuses sesso eresesss iad eh a eee ee eae ee eae Table 1 3 Vertical settings ccc cece cece eee e ee eee Table 1 4 Options sirrien ccc ec cece cece ce reece renee evens Table 1 5 Standard accessories cece cece cece evens Table 1 6 Optional accessories ccc cece eee e eee evees Table 3 1 Additional resolution bits cece ee ee ween Table 3 2 Sampling mode selection ccceeeecevees Table 3 3 How interleaving
371. optical and electrical standards You can verify circuit design performance and perform interface compliance testing Mask testing results are reported live providing real time feedback Mask hits are highlighted on the display and accompanied by readouts indicating the number of waveforms tested pass fail results and hit counts File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons Tek Stopped 08 Jul 03 15 06 17 Test Summary i y Status Passed Total Hits 0 Failed Wfms 0 Setup Figure 3 42 Pass Fail mask testing If the Bessel Thompson filter is on the instrument is an optical reference receiver For detailed information on using Serial Mask Testing to test your signals for compliance to optical and electrical standards see the CSA7000B amp TDS7000B Option SM Serial Mask Testing and Option ST Serial Triggering User Manual CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 165 Measuring Waveforms 3 166 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Once you have acquired waveforms or taken measurements on waveforms the instrument can mathematically combine them to create a waveform that supports your data analysis task For example you might have a waveform obscured by background noise You can obtain a cleaner waveform by subtracting the background noise from your original waveform note that the backgrou
372. or taking Histograms 3 157 To Start and Reset Setup for histogram counting 3 158 Histogram Counting Optimizing Measurement Increase accuracy by compensating the 3 160 Accuracy instrument and adjusting deskew To Compensate the Setup to compensate the instrument 3 160 Instrument CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Overview Tasks ortopics Subtasks or subtopics Section title Contents Page no Data Processing Taking Measurements To Connect the Probe Connecting the probe calibration and 3 162 Calculation Cont Calibration Fixture deskew fixture to the instrument gont To Calibrate Probes Improving measurement accuracy by 3 162 calibrating your probes To Compensate Passive Compensating passive probes 3 163 Probes To Deskew Channels Adjusting delay between channels 3 162 Serial Mask Testing Pointer to mask testing information 3 165 Math Chs Exx Creating and Using Math Functions for processing waveforms 3 167 2 4 35 gt lt Waveforms extracting segments of waveforms etc Ta 7 o ail See Defining Math Waveforms oe of performing math operation on 3 168 ASin ACos ATan Sinh waveiorms Cosh Tanh Average To Define a Math Defining math waveforms 3 175 Invert Sqrt Log 10 Log e Waveform Exp Magnitude Real Soca Phase and Imag Operations on Math Overview of measuring and adjusting 3 177 i Waveforms math waveforms To Use Math Waveforms Example setups for measu
373. orm impulse response testing and the phase is continuous then phase values outside these ranges may occur The spectral analyzer then wraps the data with disconti nuities in the display from 180 to 180 degrees Phase unwrap will display the correct result by unwrapping the phase Phase unwrap is only valid when the phase spectrum is a continuous function of frequency Therefore do not use it when analyzing the harmonic content of the typical repetitive signal Suppression Threshold Random noise in the spectrum may have phase values over the entire range This could make the phase display unusable However you can set the suppression threshold control to a level in dB The phase of any complex spectral points with a magnitude below this threshold is set to zero Phase Unwrap Algorithm The algorithm searches for the largest magnitude in the current span Phase unwrap is then performed in both directions in frequency from that point This results in a stable phase unwrap Phase Spectrum dejitter An instrument acquisition system jitters by one sample interval Signals at the Nyquist frequency only have two samples per cycle This would cause 180 of phase jitter if it were not corrected The instrument phase spectrum is dejittered so that accurate measurements of phase are obtained from DC to the Nyquist frequency CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Magnitude vs frequen
374. out five divisions m The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right on screen when rotated 8 Verify horizontal delay a Center a rising edge on screen m Set the horizontal POSITION knob so that the rising edge where the waveform is triggered is lined up with the center horizontal graticule m Change the horizontal SCALE to 20 ps div The rising edge of the waveform should remain near the center graticule and the falling edge should be off screen b Turn on and set horizontal delay CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 27 Incoming Inspection Check Trigger Operation 1 28 d From the Horiz Acq menu select Horizontal Acquisition Setup Touch the Horizontal tab in the displayed control window Touch the Delay Mode button to turn delay on Double touch the Horiz Delay control in the control window to display the pop up keypad Touch the keypad buttons to set the horizontal delay to 1 ms and then touch the ENTER key Verify the waveform Verify that a rising edge of the waveform is within a few divisions of center screen Adjust the horizontal delay Rotate the upper multipurpose knob to change the horizontal delay setting Verify that the rising edge shifts horizontally Rotate the front panel horizontal POSITION knob Verify that this knob has the same effect it also adjusts delay but only when delay mode is on Verify the delay toggle function m Rotate
375. ow Min NegativeOvershoot Amplitude x 100 Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse Voltage measurement The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region Timing measurement The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time Expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one waveform cycle Timing measurement Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to happen in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive Width O Parad O0 PositiveDutyCycle CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 1 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Positive Overshoot Positive Width _f Rise time ie RMS Mean Median StdDev Hits in Box Waveform Count Peak Hits Pk Pk Max Mean 1 StdDev Mean 2 StdDev Mean 3 StdDev Definition Voltage measurement over the entire waveform or gated region Max High Amplitude 197 PositiveOvershoot Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated reg
376. ow to set up 3 99 maximum hold time 3 81 negative setup or hold times 3 81 positive setup or hold times 3 81 trigger point location 3 81 Shared trigger level 3 69 Shutdown C 2 Shutting down 1 10 Signal connection and conditioning 3 8 SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 9 2 10 Signal path compensation 3 160 3 166 Sin x x 3 135 C 9 Sin x x interpolation 3 39 3 134 Glossary 8 SINGLE 3 28 3 30 Single sequence 3 28 Single sequence off 3 30 SINGLE TRIG button 3 77 Single shot sampling 3 37 Single mode cable Glossary 15 Site considerations 1 6 Size zoom C 5 C 7 Slew rate trigger 3 79 Glossary 15 600 ps limitation 3 91 7 5 ns limitation 3 91 how to set up 3 89 3 118 Slope 3 69 Glossary 15 Slope main trigger menu 3 89 Slope trigger 3 67 Snapshot C 11 Snapshot of measurements 3 149 Software upgrade 1 3 Software installation 1 13 1 15 Source A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 3 94 Sources 3 141 3 142 Span 3 185 Specifications A 1 help menu C 16 Spectral analysis displaying phase 3 210 Spectral analyzer controls 3 212 Spectral averaging 3 182 Spectral controls C 14 Spectral grading C 10 Spectral Math reference level 3 188 Spectral math 3 dB BW in bins 3 194 acquisition mode 3 204 affects of frequency domain control adjustments illustrated 3 187 affects of trigger jitter 3 203 aliasing 3 204 averaging 3 204 bandwidth 3 212 Blackman Harris 3 192 3 194 3 199 3 211 ce
377. p TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering To Trigger ona Runt Pulse When you select the type Runt the instrument will trigger on a short pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first To set up for runt triggering do the following procedures Overview To trigger on a runt pulse Control elements and resources Select runt 1 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of triggering the Trigger control window and touch Select A Event f A gt B Seq B Event f Mode AR Acquire 2 Touch Runt eS tet me Reta Runt Chi Y Upper Level Lower Level 800 0mV Trigger Levels Stand Y Select the 3 To specify which channel becomes the pulse trigger et keanan GS Ever eee z Source unt Trigger Runt source source touch Source and select the source from the pia az A r finer list ary T E 3 ia Seon The source selected becomes the trigger source for EEE Glitch Runt Width and Transition catty Select the 4 To specify the direction of the runt pulse touch Polarity Emmm ME ape 5 Source unt Trigger Runt polarity and select Pos positive Neg negative or Either from yijikdskkdsd NN eecsar 2 os Y the window l Sal act Pena Pos looks at positive going pulses ees Trigger Levels 2000nv Polarity m Neg looks at negative going pulses Sani pos NES m Either looks at both positive and negative pulses Set to trigger To determine how wid
378. p hold type triggers on the relative timing between two signals Comm optional on TDS7000B Series is a special trigger used on commu nication signals You can use Comm triggers to test communications signals and Mask testing automatically uses Comm triggers to set up signals for mask testing You can trigger on the clock recovered from optical CSA7000B Series only or electrical communication signals m Serial optional on TDS7000B Series is a special trigger used on signals with serial data patterns You can trigger on the clock recovered from optical CSA7000B Series only or electrical communication signals Trigger Modes The trigger mode determines how the instrument behaves in the absence of a trigger event m Normal trigger mode enables the instrument to acquire a waveform only when it is triggered If no trigger occurs the instrument will not acquire a waveform rather the last waveform record acquired remains frozen on the display If no last waveform exists none is displayed See the Normal trigger mode part of Figure 3 22 You can push FORCE TRIGGER in the Trigger control window to force the instrument to make a single acquisi tion Auto trigger mode automatic mode enables the instrument to acquire a waveform even if a trigger does not occur Auto mode uses a timer that starts after a trigger event occurs If another trigger event is not detected before the timer times out the instrument forces a trigger The
379. panel I O ports Ports located on the rear panel Video output port Upper video port DB 15 female connector connect a second monitor to use dual monitor display mode Video is DDC2B compliant Scope XGA video port Lower video port DB 15 female connector 31 6 kHz sync EIA RS 343A compliant connect to show the instrument display including live waveforms on an external monitor Parallel port IEEE 1284 DB 25 connector supports the following modes standard output only bidirectional PS 2 compatible bidirectional enhanced parallel port IEEE 1284 standard mode 1 or mode 2 v 1 7 bidirectional high speed extended capabilities port ECP Serial port DB 9 COM1 port uses NS16C550 compatible UARTS transfer speeds up to 115 2 kb s Keyboard port PS 2 compatible instrument must be powered down to make connection Mouse port PS 2 compatible instrument must be powered down to make connection LAN port RJ 45 connector supports 10 base T and 100 base T Audio ports Miniature phone jacks for stereo microphone input and stereo line output USB ports two Allows connection or disconnection of USB keyboard and or mouse while instrument power is on GPIB port IEEE 488 2 standard interface A 20 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 7 Input output port specifications Cont Characteristic Probe Compensator Output Analog Signal Output amplitude Analog Signal Output bandw
380. pe K Help Recall Reference Waveform Look in Waveforms ck Ey File name 030709 102346 win i x Cancel Help Files of type Waveform Files wim Access to virtual keyboard CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview Recall your waveform Display your reference waveform For further assistance To Clear References Overview Prerequisites Display the reference control window Delete the reference To recall your waveform Cont 10 Touch the Recall button to recall the waveform file To cancel without recalling a waveform touch the Cancel button Touch Display to toggle the display of the reference waveform on For more help on recalling waveforms touch the Help button to access contextual online help Control elements and resources Cancel Help Ref Ref2 Ref3 Refs Save Wim to Refi Position 5 E B nan EX 0 0div K cE Save Wim to File NAN y Recall Ref fron Display AR Recall Delete Wim Fil Saye 3 Delete Scale Label 1oy Ua a ivi a Horz Pos 50 0 Refi Save all Wims to Files ALA Delete See page 3 263 to learn about using online help You can clear individual references of data or delete waveform files If you are sure you do not want the data a reference waveform contains use the procedures that follow to clear it To clear all ref
381. phic programs PNG creates files png in a compressed image format that is nonlossy Spreadsheet creates files CSV in a format usable by spreadsheets Excel Lotus 1 2 3 and Quattro Pro MatLab creates files DAT in a format usable by MatLab MathCad creates files DAT in a format usable by MathCad Note that the MathCad file is an ASCII file the first four values of which contain header information The first header value holds the record length The second header value holds time in seconds between samples The third header value holds the trigger position expressed as an index in the data position The fourth header value refers to the fractional trigger position Also note that the delimiters are carriage returns To Export Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to export a waveform or waveforms to the instrument hard disk a floppy disk or third party storage device Overview To save a waveform Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up forth 3 236 2 Make sure the waveform image or measurement to be exported exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform an active reference and so Control elements and resources m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 m See page 3 29 for acquisition setup m See page 3 63 for trigger setup CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview Select for
382. procedure See Customize Graticule and Waveforms on page 3 137 3 136 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms Customize Graticule and Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments Waveforms that you can make Overview Customizations you can make Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the waveforms to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math p000 waveform See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup Change 2 From the Display setup control window select the O waveform Colors tab etereca color mth colr colors aa Ba 3 Choose a color palette from the Color Palette list Normal Green and Gray give the appearance of an intensity graded display similar to an analog instrument Spectral and Temp use hue to indicate the frequency of occurrence and to highlight events User and User Palette let you create a custom color palette Change 4 From the Display setup control window select the y A eo graticule style Objects tab ee A Display Date Time f Li pa 5 Touch the Full Grid Cross Hair or Frame button to i ea Display Trigger T select that style of graticule CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 137 Displaying Waveforms Overview Customizations you can make Cont Related control elements an
383. ptical reflections from that interface up to and including the device under test s final photo diode termination 11 peak to peak total aberration system including O E to CH1 input adapter and instrument The step response to a fast optical square OFF edge reaches toc within 2 of the final 0 level within 2 ns after the 10 transition point 1310 nm and 1550 nm 40 uW peak to peak 20 uW 17 dBm average power assuming 50 average duty cycle 780 nm and 850 nm 80 uW peak to peak 40 uW 14 dBm average power assuming 50 average duty cycle Assumes the scale factor is set to minimum uW div settings and signal is at least 2 divisions peak to peak 10 uW per division to 500 uW per division Optical reference receiver typically available from the following scale factors 1310 nm and 1550 nm 13 5 uW per division to 66 uW per division 850 nm 25 uW per division to 125 uW per division 780 nm 28 uW per division to 142 uW per division 1 All specifications are with the OJE electrical out to CH1 input adapter installed CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 9 Data storage specifications Characteristic Nonvolatile memory retention time typical Floppy disk Hard disk CD RW Windows memory Table A 10 Power source specifications Characteristic Power consumption Source voltage and frequency Fuse rating 0 25 in x 1 25 in size 5mm x 20mm size D
384. pulse testing the resulting impulse waveform is converted to frequency by Fourier transform and the bandwidth is defined as 3 dB 10 log vertical swing at frequency vertical swing at DC During reference receiver curve calculation however the definition is changed to match the industry standard definition which assumes electrical bandwidths are 3 dB 20 x log vertical swing at frequency vertical swing at DC Bandwidth for Unfiltered The curve calculation of frequency response for the unfiltered settings uses the Settings definition for dB and bandwidth where 3 dB 10 log vertical swing at frequency vertical swing at DC that is the optical bandwidth Bandwidth for Reference The curve calculation of frequency response for reference receiver settings uses Receiver settings the definition of dB and bandwidth that matches the industry standard which assumes electrical bandwidths where 3 dB 20 log vertical swing at frequen cy vertical swing at DC CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 61 Acquiring Waveforms 3 62 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering To properly acquire data that is to use the instrument to sample a signal and digitize it into a waveform record that you want to measure or otherwise process you need to set up the trigger conditions This section provides background on and the procedures for using the basic elements of triggering sour
385. quisition hardware m The sampling process sampling modes and the waveform record m Both the normal and Fast Acquisitions acquisition cycles Acquisition Hardware Before a signal can be acquired it must pass through the input channel where it is scaled and digitized Each channel has a dedicated input amplifier and digitizer as shown in Figure 3 8 each channel can produce a stream of digital data from which waveform records can be extracted See Signal Connection and Condi tioning on page 3 8 for further description of scaling positioning and DC offsetting of channels 3 34 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Figure 3 8 Digitizer configuration Sampling Process Acquisition is the process of sampling the analog input signal of an input channel converting it into digital data and assembling it into a waveform record which is then stored in acquisition memory Sampling then is the process that provides a waveform record per trigger event see Figure 3 10 on page 3 36 The signal parts within the vertical range of the amplifier are digitized See Figure 3 9 5 0 V P oV ov OV oV J Lae 5 0V 5 0V Input signal Sampled points Digital values Figure 3 9 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing Acquisition Modes The instrument acquisition system can process the data as it is acquired averaging or enveloping the waveform data to produce enhanced waveform records
386. r ce ssaveceeinie le sins seal gle sve een iece A A 3 36 Real Time Sampling dar Ee eE nite ciara ete ue gitis ere ele Wein Wale ARE EA 3 37 Equivalent Time Sampling 00 0 E cee eee eee eee 3 37 Interpolation o es OEE EE nine ciara ree nie gts ore ls Weinreb vegeta ee 3 39 Inter C AVM opono ig eSB Seat eA ned aha ce ade Raia E eee atagtng 3 40 Using Fast Acquisition Mode rererere nsa teire rsa cece eee eee 3 40 Using Fast Acquisitions re rate E A ccc eee eens 3 41 To Turn Fast Acquisitions On and Off 000000008 3 44 TO See Display FOr ates si sod re ete cane sree ie gins ere inde Shar EE oe Suave 3 47 Came Fasthrame oes 2 ocd AE E ante gine Sere oie gta oF le Lol gars rele Negev 3 48 Using FastFrame Acquisitions oeira nsa eee cee eee eee 3 49 LO Seb FastFrame Mode aaa e nse uaa eee ie gies eve ln ei EEEE EA 3 50 Time Stamping Frames 0 ccc ccc ec eee ee eee eee ene 3 52 OE CONVE tA ara ci cers o r E accra ss tate car aha edt aad oe une hs A Raye nae cadre hoe 3 55 Connecting Optical Signals sestu rai eaa eee eee eee eee 3 55 Attenuating Optical Signals 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee 3 55 Front Panel Connectors inre ni 8 eer Aveta ace ene oud aaa A A areal ads 3 56 Optical Input Connector sene a a a EEEN EA EEA 3 56 Output Connectors aein a e edie ele EE AE a EA E ne EE a 3 56 O E Electrical Out to Ch1 Input Adapter 0008 3 57 O E to SMACAGapter 6 hence deh cute Woot ni
387. r new math expression to the math waveform 3 176 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Apply averaging Finished For further assistance To define a math waveform Cont 10 11 12 _ _ 3 4 Touch Avgs to display the Math Averaging control window The controls in the window apply to the math waveform defined by the expression Select one of the Math x n controls and set the number of averages using the multipurpose knobs or keypad This number of averages affect math waveforms if the Avg function is used Touch Close to close the window touch Editor to open the Define Edit Expression window touch Setup to open the math control window or touch Spect to open the Spectral control window Once you have defined the math expression to your satisfaction Touch the the apply button Then touch the OK button to dismiss the dialog box See To Use Math Waveforms on page 3 179 for more procedures Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access context sensitive help on math waveforms Operations on Math Waveforms Related control elements and resources Math Averaging Mathi n 2 Math2 n 2 Math3 n 2 Math4 n 2 Editor Spect l Setup Close Math Averaging Spect Close See Accessing Online Help on page 3 263 for overview of the online help system This ins
388. r saved waveforms Using comments you can store informa tion readable upon recall describing each waveform that you save Virtual Keyboarding If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name waveform files The Reference control window includes a Keyboard button When you touch or click it the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the waveform path name file name and comment You cannot recall a waveform into a channel or a math waveform The instru ment recalls each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations Ref1 Ref4 To Save Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to save a waveform or waveforms to a reference location the instrument hard disk CD RW disk a floppy disk or third party storage device Overview To save a waveform Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up 2 Make sure the waveform to be saved exists that is your 0000 source must be a channel an active math waveform or an active reference Display the waveform with the setup in which you want to save it m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 ia m See page 3 29 for acquisition setup For help in setup and acquiring waveforms check the pag j references at right m See page 3 63 for trigger setup Display the 3 From the toolbar touch Refs and select the Ref 1 to Ref Refs reference 4
389. r system and then uses the B Delayed trigger to trigger the instrument if a specific condition is met You can choose one of two trigger conditions m Trig After Time After the A trigger arms the trigger system the instrument triggers on the next B trigger event that occurs after the Trigger Delay Time CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 103 Triggering You can set the trigger delay time with the keypad or the multipurpose knobs m Trigger on n Event After the A trigger arms the trigger system the instrument triggers on the nt B event You can set the number of B events with the keypad or the multipurpose knobs NOTE The traditional delayed trigger mode called Runs After is served by Horizontal Delay You can use horizontal delay to delay acquisition from any trigger event whether from the A Main trigger alone or from a sequential trigger that uses both the A Main and B Delayed triggers See Triggering with Horizontal Delay On on page 3 106 for more information Using Sequential Read the following topics they provide details that can help prevent false steps Triggering in setting up to trigger on your waveforms Trigger Sources In most cases it makes sense to set separate trigger sources for the A Main and B Delayed triggers Line is not available as a source for the B trigger Trigger Types When using sequential triggering both the A trigger and B trigger systems
390. r two conditions m You must have selected Equivalent Time in the Acquisition Setup control window You must have set the instrument to a sampling rate that is too fast to allow it to get enough samples with which to create a waveform record using real time sampling If both conditions are met the instrument takes a few samples with each trigger event and eventually obtains enough samples to construct a waveform record The instrument makes multiple acquisitions of a repetitive waveform to obtain the sample density required for a waveform record See Figure 3 12 Equiva lent time sampling should only be used on repetitive signals The sampling speeds and the number of channels that you choose affect the mode the instrument uses to sample waveforms m The instrument always real time samples at slower time base settings faster time settings force the instrument to switch from real time sampling to equivalent time sampling or interpolation depending on whether Equivalent Time or Interpolated Real Time is selected The instrument extends the limit at which it must switch from real time sampling by using the digitizers of channels that are turned off to sample the channel or channels that are turned on Check Table 3 2 below to determine the time base setting s at which the switch from real time sampling RT to equivalent time sampling or interpolation ETT occurs for your instrument CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instrum
391. r with Enhanced Waveform Color exports the image with colors designed to print with the white background Touch Help for more information CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 251 Data Input Output Page Setup X Paper Size Letter E Source Automatically Select ISA Orientation Margins inches Fortrait Left 0 2 E Bigh 0 2 Landscape Top foz E Bottom o2 Palette View Image Color fe Full Screen Normal Black amp White Graticule s Only C Ink saver Mode Enhanced Readouts Below Graticule vi Print Preview Cancel Print Help Figure 3 67 Page setup window To Preview the Page To preview your printout from the menu bar select the File menu and then select Print Preview The instrument displays the standard MS Windows XP Print Preview window shown in Figure 3 68 Access the Windows help system for more information 3 252 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Print i zoom In Zoom Out Close Page Setup Hela Ella Edt Yerlleal HortevAcq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Malh App Lilitas Help Buitons VTA gas E ME 500my A Figure 3 68 Print preview window To Print Using Pressing the Windows Print Screen key copies the currently displayed bitmap to Print Screen the clipboard This bitmap does not include the instrument waveforms or
392. ratios The decibel scale is logarithmic It is often used to express the efficiency of power distribution systems when the ratio consists of the energy put into the system divided by the energy delivered or in some cases lost by the system One milliwatt of optical power is usually the optical reference for 0 dBm The formula for decibels is dB 20 loe for optical dB 10 log 72 where V is the voltage of the incident pulse V is the voltage reflected back by the load Po is the power out P is the power in and log is the decimal based logarithmic function See Optical Bandwidth on page 3 60 dBm A logarithmic measure of power referenced to 1 milliwatt 1 mW optical power 0 0 dBm dam 10g Beige DC coupling A mode that passes both AC and DC signal components to the circuit Available for both the trigger system and the vertical system Delay measurement A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two different waveforms Delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of post trigger data Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitizing is composed of two steps sampling and quantizing CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Display system The part of the instrument that shows waveform
393. rd Cancel to close the window without making changes or Help to access more information _ For further 18 For more help on copying files touch the Help button assistance to access contextual online help CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources FastFrame data range Frames fi to 1 All Frames a Copy Setup x Images Waveforms Measurements Measurements Data Format Displayed Measurements Text X C Measurements Snapshot Histogram Data CSY Copy Cancel Help Data Format z Numeric Text Cancel Help See page 3 263 to learn about using online help 3 249 Data Input Output Printing Waveforms To Print from Front Panel To Print from Menu Bar 3 250 You can print the display screen including any waveforms displayed Before you can print you must install and set up your printer Consult the instructions that come with your printer Also for printer setup instructions you can display Windows help and access its section on printers To print a waveform from the front panel push the front panel PRINT button The display screen will print on the default printer For additional print options see the topics that follow To print a waveform from the application menu bar select the File menu and then select Print The instrument displays the standard Microsoft Windows XP
394. re one end of the span goes to DC or Nyquist depending on which direction the center frequency is adjusted the span decreases to allow the center frequency to go further in the direction it is being adjusted If you are unable to increase the center to the desired value then increase the sample rate using either the sample rate or resolution controls You may also change sample rate by using the HORIZONTAL SCALE knob on the instrument front panel m Resolution Bandwidth RBW This is the 3 dB down bandwidth of the spectral analyzer frequency response to a sine wave input The resolution bandwidth is affected by two parameters m Different window functions produce different filter response shapes in the spectrum and result in different resolution bandwidths m The gate width of the input data affects the resolution bandwidth RBW Gate width has units of seconds The resolution bandwidth directly controls the gate width but the numerical value is entered in units of Hz Therefore the time domain gate markers move as you adjust the RBW control Window Bin Width Gate Width RBW Where the Window Bin Width is the resolution bandwidth in units of bins It depends on what window function is used The gate width is in units of seconds Figure 3 49 demonstrate the effects of adjusting center frequency and span Center frequency is a horizontal position control for the spectrum Span is a horizontal scale control Resolution bandwidth
395. ready be on and reference waveform sources should contain saved waveforms and so on These sources do not have to be displayed to be Overview Prerequisites Display the math control window Select a math waveform To define an expression used To define a math waveform 1 All channel and reference Waveforms and automatic measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on 2 From the toolbar touch the Math button to display the Define Math control window Math 1 Math 2 3 Select the Math x tab for the math waveform that you want to define Be sure to touch Display to toggle it on so that the waveform displays Mathi Display If the waveform that you select already exists its math expression appears in the window You can still use the waveform by touching the Clear button which discards its previous math expression Or repeat step 3 to select another waveform gt Touch one of the Predefined Expression buttons to use a predefined math expression or touch Editor to Define Edit a new math expression CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources _ZZ m See page page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup Mah3 Math4 Position 0 0div Scale 1 0 Predefined Expression gt i
396. reate math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference waveforms By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data into math waveforms you can derive the data view that your application requires You can create math waveforms that result from m Mathematical operations on one or several waveforms add subtract multiply and divide Logical operations greater than less than less than or equal greater than or equal not equal or equal m Variables that you set m Regular scalars such as 3 14 m Function transforms of waveforms such as integrating differentiating and so on m Spectral analysis of waveforms such as an impulse m Measurement scalars can be used in expression for example you can use the measurement feature this instrument provides to measure the average of a waveform and subtract it from the original waveform to define a new math waveform You can create up to four math waveforms see Using Math on page 3 169 for more examples Math waveforms can be used in other math Math waveforms autoscale when the math waveform is first defined and turned on Advanced functions such as CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms integrate differentiate average square root and log can be taken on single waveforms or complicated expressions In FastFrame math is applied to each frame Some operations that you cannot use with mat
397. rerequisites None 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hookup the signal source Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 1 9 to the channel input you want to test beginning with CH 1 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 23 Incoming Inspection NOTE If a probe is not available connect the probe compensation output to the channel input using a BNC cable and adapters 3 Turn off all channels If any of the front panel channel buttons are lighted push those buttons to turn off the displayed channels See Figure 1 10 4 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you are currently testing The button lights and the channel display comes on CSA7404 TDS7404 TDS7254 amp TDS7154 BNC cable from PROBE GOME SF eae Connect the probe tip to Calibration and Deskew the short pin and the Fixture pin as shown af TDS7704B CJ 1 probe ground to the long NOTE If a probe is not available connect the probe 5 compensation output to the channel input usinga BNC lt gt cable and adapters NOTE If a probe is not available connect the probe compensation output to the channel input using a BNC cable and adapters the jumper BNC cable from the PROBE COMPENSATION output to the GAIN CAL SIG input on the fixture
398. research or development projects CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 15 Glossary Glossary 16 Time base The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis attributes of a waveform record The time base determines when and how long to acquire record points Timeout trigger A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the instrument does NOT find a pulse of the specified polarity and level within the specified time period Trace The visible representation of an input signal or combination of signals Identical to waveform Trace Expression The definition of what the trace displays It can include one or more channels combined arithmetically and modified by functions Trigger An event that marks time zero in the waveform record It results in acquisi tion and display of the waveform Trigger level The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger on edge trigger mode Vertical acquisition window The vertical range of the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires Vertical bar cursors The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a waveform record The instrument displays the value of the active moveable cursor with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars Waveform The shape or form visible representation of a signal CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User
399. resources Qualify window 6 To qualify the window trigger select from these Trigger trigger drop down list combinations Note that the Trigger controls change as you select different combinations of options Window Event Trigger if Window Enter Window Occurs Y Exits Window Inside gt t m Enter Window and Occurs or Exits Window and rane Occurs Trigger the instrument when the signal enters or leaves the window defined by the threshold levels Inside limits and greater than or Outside limits and greater than Trigger the instrument when the signal enters or leaves the window defined by the threshold levels for the time specified by Time Window Event and Trigger if Window Logic When the instrument detects a signal entering or leaving the window defined by the threshold levels it checks the logic state of up to two other available channels and triggers only if their conditions are met For more information on qualifying triggers see Logic Qualify a Trigger on page 3 102 Window Trigger Window Event Trigger if Window Enter Window Logic Pattern i Ch3 Cch4 xY KY 1N 1 Set mode and 7 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger holdoff types Refer to Select the trigger mode on page 3 71 and Set holdoff on page 3 74 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on nd Trigger Holdoff on 66 For mode and holdoff setup see Select the trigger page 3 ceand Tmgger Moldan on p
400. rical converter to the CH1 input of the instrument This connection allows you to use the instrument as a calibrated reference receiver Adapters are interchangeable between CSA7000B Series instruments while still allowing calibrated reference receiver mode Figure 3 19 Using the OJE Electrical Out to Chi Input adapter O E to SMA Adapter Use the O E to SMA adapter if you need to connect the Electrical Out of the optical to electrical converter to input channels other than CH1 or if you need to connect the output to other equipment Store the O E to SMA adapter on the front of the O E Electrical Out to Ch1 Input adapter Cleaning Optical Small dust particles and oils can easily contaminate optical connectors and Connectors reduce or block the signal Take care to preserve the integrity of the connectors by keeping them free of contamination CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 57 Acquiring Waveforms 3 58 A Optical Dark Compensation CAUTION To prevent loss of optical power or damage to the optical connectors keep the connectors clean at all times When cleaning the connectors with a swab use gentle circular motions Use only high quality cleaning supplies that are non abrasive and leave no residue To reduce the need for cleaning immediately replace protective caps on the optical connectors when not in use Use the following items to clean optical connectors m Clean dust free
401. ries Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Set Roll Mode Overview Prerequisites To enable roll mode To single sequence roll mode To turn off roll mode acquisitions To set Roll Mode oh bad g The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up Triggering should also be set up Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq control window or select Horizontal Ac quisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control window Select the Acquisition tab Select Roll Mode AUTO to enable roll mode When the horizontal scale is 100 ms per division at a record length of 500 points and the acquisition mode is Sample or Pk Detect roll mode turns on As the record length becomes larger the time per division required to enter roll mode becomes slower Note Envelope Average FastAcq and Waveform Database acquisition modes inhibit roll mode Push the SINGLE button to start acquiring and acquire enough waveforms to satisfy the acquisition mode and then stop Do the following step to stop acquisitions in roll mode m f you are not in Single Sequence push RUN STOP to stop roll mode m f you are in Single Sequence roll mode acquisi tions stop automatically when a complete record is acquired CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Use the procedure that follows to set up roll mode acquisitions Control ele
402. rigger portion of the a waveform z s MODE m READY on the instrument can accept and is o 5 oust EV EL sn waiting for a valid trigger to occur EX S A m ARM on the trigger circuitry is filling the pretrigger portion of the waveform record m TRIG D and READY on valid A trigger recognized waiting for a delayed trigger When a delayed trigger is recognized the posttrigger portion of the delayed waveform will fill m ARM TRIG D and READY off the digitizer is stopped Trigger status 2 To quickly determine the settings of some key trigger from acquisition parameters check the Trigger readout at the bottom of Time base readout the display The readouts differ for edge and the advanced triggers 278us div 1 25MS s_ 800ns pt F0 0V A trigger Trigger Trigger level source Ch 1 slope rising edge 3 72 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To check trigger status Cont Control elements and resources Trigger 3 To see the trigger point and level on the waveform Trigger point indicator shows location and display check the graphic indicators Trigger Point and the trigger position on the level from Trigger Level Indicator wavefc rm record display Both the trigger point indicator and level bar are displayed from the Display menu See Customizing the Display on page 3 131 for more information The trigger point indicator shows hor
403. ring and 3 179 adjusting math waveforms Spectral Math operations Defining Spectral Math Functions for frequency domain analysis 3 182 Waveforms of your waveforms To Select a Predefined Selecting a predefined spectral math 3 206 Spectral Math Waveform waveform To Define A Spectral Math Setup to define a spectral math waveform 3 207 Waveform Spectral Math Example An example of performing spectral 3 215 analysis of a signal Optimizing Instrument compensation Optimizing Measurement Procedures for compensating the instru 3 160 Measurement and compensation or Accuracy ment compensating passive probes and Accuracy calibration of probes calibrating active voltage probes CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 5 Overview Tasks or topics Data Input and Output Remote Commu nication MyScope Control Windows Help Help Subtasks or subtopics All uploading and down loading of waveforms calculation results and other data GPIB Creating editing using MyScope control windows Using Online Help Using Online Help Data Input Output Primary reference for uploading and 3 221 downloading of any data to or from the instrument Saving and Recalling a Background and setup for saving and 3 221 Setup recalling setups To Save Your Setup Saving an instrument setup 3 223 To Recall Your Setup Recalling an instrument setup 3 226 Saving and Recalling Background and setup for savin
404. rminal Mains Disconnected Mains Connected OFF Power ON Power Standby xiv CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Preface This user manual covers the following information About This Manual Describes the capabilities of the instrument how to install it and how to reinstall its software Explains how to operate the instrument how to control acquisition of processing of and input output of information Lists specifications and accessories of the instrument This manual is composed of the following chapters Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your instrument and provides an incoming inspection procedure Operating Basics uses maps to describe the various interfaces for controlling the instrument including the front panel and the software user interface These maps provide overviews of the product and its functions from several viewpoints Reference comprises an encyclopedia of topics see Overview on page 3 1 that describe the instrument interface and features and gives background and basic information on how to use them The online help onboard the instrument application describes the interface features and their usage detailed descriptions of all programming commands are found in the Programmer Online Guide Appendices provides additional information including the specifications measurements and cleaning information CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments Us
405. rms C 1 Glossary 13 Reference selection C 15 Reference level calculation methods 3 144 References 3 141 3 142 clear 3 233 clearing 3 233 delete 3 233 Related manuals xvi Relative reference 3 143 Release notes for plug amp play software 1 13 Remote communication 3 255 Remote control C 10 Remote display C 10 removable hard drive 1 12 Remove measurements 3 145 remove the hard drive 1 11 Repetitive signal 3 31 Reset all C 9 Reset histogram counting 3 158 Reset histograms C 12 Reset statistics C 12 Reset zoom factors zoom menu 3 130 Resolution 3 21 3 183 C 6 Resolution bandwidth 3 186 3 212 Restore application C 14 Restore help C 16 Right click map 2 6 Rise time B 3 C 12 Glossary 14 Rising edge A Trigger control window 3 98 3 100 RMS B 3 C 11 Glossary 14 Roll mode auto C 6 illustrated 3 28 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 untriggered 3 28 untriggered with single sequence 3 28 using 3 33 Run application C 14 RUN STOP 3 30 3 49 Run stop C 6 C 8 Run Stop button only 3 27 Runt setup C 8 Runt trigger 3 78 C 7 Glossary 14 A Trigger control window 3 85 how to set up 3 85 3 118 how to setup 3 102 S S N ratio B 5 C 12 Sample 3 24 3 30 Sample acquisition mode Glossary 14 Sample interval 3 21 Glossary 14 defined 3 36 Sample rate maximum 3 40 Samples number of 3 27 Sampling 3 37 Glossary 14 modes C 6 process defined 3 35 process illustrated
406. rol window 17 To use these settings for all measurements toggle the Use On All Meas button to On To set different values for some measurements toggle the Use On all Meas button to Off CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Annotation Type Standard Detailed Ref Levs Gating arta Statistics Annotation Meas1 Use On Use On All Meas All Meas fon 3 147 Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Set 18 To select how the instrument determines the base and measurement reference levels Cont 3 148 19 20 top of the waveform touch Min Max Histogram or Histogram mean m Min max Uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses See Figure 3 36 on page 3 143 m Histogram Selects the most common values above or below the midpoint Since this approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Histogram is the best setting for examining pulses See Figure 3 36 on page 3 143 m Histogram mean Calculates the mean value using all values either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Histogram mean is best for examining eye
407. rol cursors Toggles cursors on and off Enables the selected cursor type Sets the selected cursor tracking mode Displays the Cursor Position control window that you use to position the cursors Displays the Cursor Setup control window that you use to set up and control cursors Table C 8 lists the commands available from the Measure menu Table C 8 Measure menu commands Menu Measurement Setup Snapshot Amplitude CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Submenu High Level Low Level Amplitude Maximum Minimum Peak to Peak Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Mean RMS Cycle Mean Cycle RMS Function Displays the Math Setup control window you use to display measurements setup measurement reference levels gating statistics and histograms Displays a snapshot of all single waveform measurements of the selected waveform Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform C 11 Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 8 Measure menu commands Cont Menu Time Comm More Histogram Measure ments Statistics Reference Levels Gating Waveform Histograms Rise Time Fall Time Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform Positive Width Negative Width Period Frequency Delay Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform Ext Ratio dB Eye Height Eye Width E
408. rol window C TekScope MyscopelVertical tcv C TekScope MyscopelMyScapel tow C TekScope Myscope030802_082516 tcw Ci TekScopelMyscope030802_082524 tew CiiTekScopelmMyscope limit test tew Select the MyScope control window that you want to E Look in E MyScope e EE use and then click Open asi limit test tew ai measure tcw a Measurement tew a MyControls tew a MyScopel tew ai test tew a test2 tcw a Vertical tcw Files of type MyScope files tow Cancel CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual MyScope To Display the Active Use the following procedure to display the active MyScope control window Myscope Control Window Overview To display the active MyScope control window Select from 1 menu Control elements and resources Select MyScope gt Current or click MyScope in the l ts Math MyScope Utilities Help MyScopel toolbar mode Your MyScope control window remains active even when it is not displayed Surai New Control Window Open Control Window Edit Control window To Edita MyScope Control Use the following procedure to edit a MyScope control window Window Overview To edit a MyScope control window Control elements and resources Select from 1 Select MyScope gt Edit Control Window s Math MyScope Utilities Help menu Curent New Control Window Open Control Win
409. rop down list and buttons to navigate FAROT AET directory to the directory of the file to delete EEE Wavetomns mgm Find your file 6 Select the file type in the Files of type drop down list to force the file listing to only include these types Use File name 8 wim for waveforms Files of type Waveform Files wim x Cancel Help Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set to wfm for waveforms Access to virtual keyboard 7 Choose your waveform file by clicking an existing name in the file list Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields 3 234 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To clear references Cont Control elements and resources Delete the file 8 Touch the Delete button to Delete the file To cancel without deleting a file touch the Cancel button Cancel Help o For further 9 For more help on deleting files touch the Help button assistance to access contextual online help See page 3 263 to learn about using online help Exporting and Copying Waveforms This instrument also supports export of waveform data to a file The instrument can export waveforms ima
410. s amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B DC voltage measurement accuracy CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B Average acquisition mode 16 aver ages Delta voltage measurement between any two averages of 16 waveforms acquired under the same setup and ambient conditions DC voltage measurement accuracy TDS7704B Average acquisition mode 16 averages Description 2 mV div to 3 98 mV div 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 1 V div Measurement type 2 mV div to 3 98 mV div 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div 2 mV div to 3 98 mV div 4 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 1 V div 2 5 6 x net offset 1V 2 2 x net offset 1V 2 2 x net offset 10V DC accuracy in volts 2 5 6 x net offset 1V x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 08 division x V division 2 2 x net offset 1V x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 08 division x V division 2 2 x net offset 10V x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 08 division x V division 2 5 6 x net offset 1V x reading 0 16 division x V division setting 2 2 x net offset 1V x reading 0 16 division x V division setting 2
411. s measurements control windows status and other parameters Dragging The act of changing your touch panel selection by moving your finger without removing it from the screen The selection that is activated is the last one that you were touching before removing your finger Dual Graticule A display with two graticules Each one is half the height of the single graticule Fast Acquisition mode A mode that increases the waveform capture rate up to 400 000 waveforms per second This very fast capture rate greatly increases the probability that runts glitches and other short term changes will accumulate in waveform memory The instrument then displays the waveform at the normal display rate using variable or infinite persistence This display mode emulates the display of an analog instrument Edge Trigger Triggering occurs when the instrument detects the source passing through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope Envelope acquisition mode A mode in which the instrument acquires and displays a waveform that shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions Equivalent time sampling ET A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many repetitions of the event These instruments use a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling which uses an internal clock that runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The instrument ta
412. s Instruments User Manual Process Block Description 1 The instrument starts in the idle state it enters this state upon power up upon receiving most control setting changes or upon finishing acquisition tasks 2 Control settings are implemented as they are requested When you toggle the RUN STOP control to RUN the instrument starts the hardware 3 The instrument acquires samples until the pretrigger portion of the waveform record channel being acquired is filled 4 The instrument then begins waiting for a trigger Acquiring continues to take place keeping the pretrigger points current until triggering criteria are met or a trigger is forced Auto trigger mode only and the instrument accepts a trigger 5 The instrument acquires samples until the posttrigger portion of the waveform record channel being acquired is filled 6 If averaging enveloping or waveform database is on the record becomes part of the multi acquisition record that these modes produce The process loops back to step 3 above to acquire additional records until the number of acquisitions required for the acquisition mode currently set are processed and then processing continues to step 7 below 7 At this point the acquisition record is in DSP memory and is available to the instrument for measurement of its parameters display and so on The instrument then checks for a user specified stop condition and either returns to its idle state or cont
413. s a voltage to a digital value Real time sampling A sampling mode where the instrument samples fast enough to completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event Use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events Record length The specified number of samples in a waveform Recovered Clock A clock signal derived from and synchronous with a received data sequence Reference memory Memory in an instrument used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The instrument saves the data even when the instrument is turned off or unplugged Reference Waveforms Waveforms that are static not live see live waveforms Reference waveforms are channel or math waveforms that you save to references Once saved they do not update CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 13 Glossary Glossary 14 Rise time The time it takes for a leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value typically 10 to a HighRef value typically 90 of its amplitude RMS Amplitude voltage measurement of the true Root Mean Square voltage Runt trigger A mode in which the instrument triggers on a runt A runt is a pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first The crossings detected can be positive negative or either Sample acquisition mode The instrument creates a record point by saving the first
414. s to 62 5 kHz The cursor readout now indicates the center frequency set in step 9 Control elements and resources Cursor 100 0kHz bijet eaaa aaea E 200mv Q 2004B 12 5kHz okHz OkHz DE 232mV ee a BR Curst Pos 0 0Hz Curs2 Pos 62 5kHz HGH 200mv 2 IH fi 0 0Hz 400 usidiv I0 t2 G2 5kHz en 1 25MSis 800rs pt 20 0dB 12 5kHz Or af 62 5KHZ BG 7 232V 3 218 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Spectral math example cont Control elements and resources Measure the 14 Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the Curs1 Gurst Pos test results Pos to 3 0 kHz and the Curs2 Pos to 11 0 kHz Curs2 Pos aok In this example the cursors are now on the third and eleventh harmonic of the probe compensation signal Read the frequencies from the cursor readouts w p I 200V 2 WE 20098 12 5kHz 15 Touch the Cursor Type Waveform button Touch the Cursor 2 button and then the Math 1 button Now in addition to the frequency at the cursor locations me tp ae the cursor readout displays the amplitude at the cursor Es locations The readout also displays the difference in frequency and amplitude between the cursor locations IE 200mv a IM y2 30 26dB il 3 0kHz IMG 20098 125kHz IR 4y 19 7s f2 11 0kHz Ayia 2 474mdB
415. s will track a waveform vertically Cursors Ignore the Selected Waveform Each cursor measures its source defined in the Cursors Setup dialog box Selecting a waveform for scaling on screen by pushing the CH 3 front panel button for example does not change the source that each cursor measures CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms After you have selected the source from the Cursors Setup control window you can operate the cursor from the front panel knobs and buttons Cursors Treat Sources Independently Each cursor can take a different indepen dent source with each source having its own amplitude scale Consider the example presented by Figure 3 38 on page 3 152 m Cursor 1 is set to measure channel 3 Ch3 which is set to 100 mV per division so cursor readout v1 measures Ch3 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 100 mV div or about 300 mV m Cursor 2 is set to measure reference 4 Ref4 which is set to 20 mV per division so cursor readout v2 measures R4 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 20 mV div or about 60 mV m Note that the value of each graticule division is not readily apparent relative to the delta readout because the delta amplitude readout Av must account for the different amplitude scale settings of the sources To do so the Av readout displays the results of v2 v1 60 mV 300 mV 240 mV automatically accounting for the different scales of the cur
416. sample during each acquisition interval That is the default mode of the acquisition Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a time base For real time digitizers the sample interval is the reciprocal of the sample rate For equivalent time digitizers the time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sampling The process of capturing an analog input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized Two general methods of sampling are real time sampling and equivalent time sampling Screen text Lines displayed on screen that you use to indicate measurement reference levels and points that an automatic measurement is using to derive the measurement value Setting The state of the front panel and system at a given time Setup control window A group of related controls for a major instrument function that the instrument displays across the bottom of the screen CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Setup Hold trigger A mode in which the instrument triggers when a data source changes state within the setup or hold time relative to a clock source Positive setup times precede the clock edge positive hold times follow the clock edge The clock edge may be the rising or falling edge Selected waveform The waveform on which all measurements are performed and which is affected by vertica
417. se neither waveform is clipped that is both waveforms are acquired But if signal amplitude were to extend outside the vertical acquisition window the data acquired is clipped Clipped data causes inaccurate results if used in amplitude related automatic measurements Clipping also causes inaccurate amplitude values in waveforms that are stored or exported for use in other programs If the scale of a math waveform is changed so that the math waveform is clipped it will not affect amplitude measurements on that math waveform m The vertical position adjusts the acquisition and therefore the display of the acquired waveform relative to the vertical acquisition window Figure 3 2b shows how vertical position moves the acquired waveform vertically in the acquisition window to place the acquired waveform in the graticule display CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m As you vary the vertical position the vertical acquisition window moves up and down 5 divisions on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window it appears the waveform moves in the window Actually the position moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the input signal a SCALE setting determines Vertical gt 0 5 Volt the vertical acquisi
418. ses equivalent time sampling when the sample rate is too fast to acquire enough samples using real time sampling Displays the Horizontal control window that you use to turn on and off delay mode position the waveform and set the horizontal scale Displays the Resolution control window that you use to set the record length and view the duration sample rate and resolution Sample Pk Detect Hi Allows you to select the acquisition mode or displays the Acquisition Mode Res Average Envelope control window that you use to select the acquisition mode Wim DB Mode Displays the FastFrame Setup window that you use to set up FastFrame acquisitions on instruments with this feature Displays the FastFrame control window that you use to select the frame to view and the reference frame used by time stamps on instruments with this feature Displays the Zoom Setup window that you use to set up the horizontal and vertical zoom controls CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 4 Horiz Acq menu commands Cont Menu Submenu Function Zoom Graticule Size 50 50 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 50 50 80 20 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 80 20 100 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 100 Size Displays the Zoom Display Area control window that you use to set the zoom graticule size Trigger Commands Table C 5 lists the commands available from the Tri
419. sions times the current time division setting Auto maintains a good value for multipurpose triggering Triggers are ignored during Haldatt Acquisition Acquisition Trigger Holdoff m Time lets you enter a holdoff that may allow more a OT E AS stable triggering than the Auto holdoff This time is 500s omj used at all horizontal scale settings m Random selects a new random holdoff time for each acquisition cycle 3 To change the holdoff time when Time is selected select Trig Holdoff and enter a value in time using the multipurpose knob or the keypad You can set holdoff from 250 ns minimum holdoff available to 12 s maximum available 3 74 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To select a preset trigger level Additional trigger parameters Cont 1 Push the ADVANCED button select the A Event tab and touch either of the Trigger Type buttons Select a Trigger Type such as Edge that uses a level adjustment Select Level and touch the keyboard icon to display the keyboard Select either TTL ECL or USER m TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V m ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V m USER fixes the trigger level at the USER preset voltage When you set the volts div smaller than 200 mV the instrument reduces the TTL or ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels This reduction occurs because the trigger level range is f
420. sition mode 3 30 set the stop mode 3 30 set waveform count average and envelope only 3 30 sin x x interpolation 3 39 SINGLE 3 28 3 30 single sequence 3 28 single sequence off 3 30 to disable roll mode 3 34 to enable roll mode 3 33 to select an acquisition mode 3 30 to select real time or equivalent time sampling 3 31 to set acquisition modes 3 29 to set roll bode 3 33 to single sequence roll mode 3 33 to start acquiring 3 32 to start and stop acquisition 3 32 to stop acquiring 3 32 to take a single acquisition 3 32 to turn off roll mode acquisitions 3 33 trigger point 3 36 untriggered roll 3 28 untriggered roll with single sequence 3 28 using 3 24 using fast acquisition mode 3 40 using FastFrame 3 48 waveform database 3 26 3 30 waveform record 3 36 Acquisition mode C 6 spectral math 3 204 Acquisition modes incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 Acquisition overview 3 34 Acquisition preview 3 121 Acquisition setup C 5 Advanced 3 77 Aliasing 3 29 3 204 Glossary 1 eliminating 3 29 illustrated 3 29 recognizing 3 204 All C 12 Amplitude B 1 C 11 Glossary 1 Analog to digital converter Glossary 1 Analyzer control locks 3 183 AND Glossary 1 AND A Trigger control window 3 96 3 98 3 103 Annotate 3 146 waveforms on screen 3 140 Annotated display 3 141 Appearance C 9 Applications 1 14 derivative math waveforms 3 172 integral math waveforms 3 174 optiona
421. sor sources NOTE If a cursor readout does not seem correct check the source of each cursor in the Cursor setup dialog box Each cursor readout relates to the amplitude and time base settings of its source Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point Remember that each vertical cursor measures the time from the trigger point to itself This relationship is shown in Figure 3 39 on page 3 153 y Horizontal reference 0 First point in record Trigger point of cursor source K J J y y x Horizontal divisions Cursor readout tn Delay x secidiv Cursor Figure 3 39 Components determining Time cursor readout values CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 153 Measuring Waveforms Note that a vertical cursor readout includes and varies directly with the Time to First Point component which varies directly with the horizontal position set for the timebase To see the amount of time to the first point set Horizontal DELAY to 0 0 and set Horizontal Ref to 0 Now the Horizontal position readout shows the time following the first point and adding this value to the cursor readout yields the cursor position on screen relative to first point You can find the horizontal readout both in the control window and in the readout at the bottom of the screen The following relationships hold Time from First Point Horiz Positi
422. sors are the same as waveform cursors except Waveform and Screen cursors that the cursors can be moved off the waveform 1 01V t1 136 8us t2 151 2us 1 98V At 288 dus AVIAt 6 875kV s 1 At 3 472kHz CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 151 Measuring Waveforms 3 152 Using Cursors 2 divisions at 20 mv div Cursors can measure channel reference and math waveforms You must set the source of each cursor explicitly in the Cursor Setup control window Cursors are not available with histograms XY or XYZ modes Cursor operation is easy you move the cursors on screen and read the results in the cursor readouts The following key points will help you use the cursors effectively Cursor Types The cursor types are described in Table 3 9 on page 3 151 There are two cursors displayed for all types Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 You can move cursors with the multipurpose knobs or the cursor position controls in the Cursor Setup control window Curs1 Pos 40 0m F Curs2 Pos z 0 0 He 20 0mV 2 Figure 3 38 Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes 10 0ps div 5 0MS s 200ns pt T 32 0MV Cursors are Display Limited You cannot move a cursor off screen Also if you resize waveforms the cursors do not track That is a cursor stays at its screen position ignoring changes to horizontal and vertical scale and position and vertical offset waveform cursor
423. specifications cece eee e eee Table A 12 Environmental specifications eeeeee Table A 13 Certifications and compliances 2500 Table B 1 Supported measurements and their definition CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Table of Contents Table B 2 Comm measurements and their definition Table B 3 Supported measurements and their definition Table C 1 File menu commands cece cece cece cence Table C 2 Edit menu commands ce cece cece eeeeeee Table C 3 Vertical menu commands ee cece eeeeeee Table C 4 Horiz Acq menu commands eeeeeeeees Table C 5 Trig menu commands cee ee cee ce ceeees Table C 6 Display menu commands eeeeeeeeees Table C 7 Cursor menu commands eeeeeeeceeeeeee Table C 8 Measure menu commands eseeeeeeeeeee Table C 9 Masks menu commands eeeeeeeeeceeeee Table C 10 Math menu commands ec cece eeeeeee Table C 11 Application menu commands eee005 Table C 12 Utilities menu commands eeeeeeeee Table C 13 Help menu commands cee ceeeeeeeees CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual B 4 B 9 C 1 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 7 C 9 C 11 C 11 C 13 C 14 C 14 C 15 C 16 xi Table of Contents xii CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual
424. splayed the zoom position for all waveforms is not 0 0 or zoom lock is not on the magnified display may not match what is shown enclosed in the zoom box To select the waveform that you want to change select the channel Ch Math or reference Ref number for the waveform that you want to change or touch its level marker with the mouse or touch screen Control elements and resources MultiView w 2acnsidiv 25G8 s 400psipt 40 0MV a sonw e IAR Scomv 100ns CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Displaying Waveforms Control elements and resources Overview To zoom waveforms Cont Set up 6 To display the Zoom setup window touch Setup in the MultiView controls window Select the tab for the zoomed oem J Zoom Zoom waveform area that you want to set up Zoom Moniz venen jig Position Position a agale SRE Position Note To reduce the Zoom setup window to the controls EN san pj Ame cea window touch Controls eel pom 7 Select from the Graticule Size list to change the size of the unmagnified Acquisition and Zoom windows m 50 50 allocates half of the available display for the zoomed graticule and half of the available display for the acquisition window 80 20 allocates 80 of the available display for the zoomed graticule and 20 for the acquisition window 100 uses t
425. splayed on screen m Measurements Snapshot exports a snapshot of all measurements m Histogram Data exports current histogram data 20 Touch OK to accept your changes Cancel to close the window without making changes or Help to access more information CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources a Export Setup Images Waveforms Measuremen ts Measurements Displayed Measurements Numeric Measurements Snapshot C Histogram Data CSV Data Format OK EJ iy Prompt for Filename before Exporing p SetFront Panel Print Button to Export Cancel Help Data Format z Numeric Text Measurements Displayed Measurements Measurements Snapshot Histogram Data CSV Export Cancel Help 3 241 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Export your file 21 To export the file from the menu bar select Export Ty Est vertical Horiziacq Trig Reference Waveforms Instrument Setup Recall Default Setup Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Export Setup Select for Export You can also attach the front panel PRINT button to Export Then pressing the PRINT button will export 1040427_062843000 set your file Do the following to attach the PRINT button to a TDsoetponn sel Export Minimize Ctri M Shutdown m From the menu bar select File and
426. ssary 10 negative duty cycle B 2 negative overshoot B 2 negative width B 2 noise pk pk B 4 noise RMS B 4 overshoot Glossary 12 parameter Glossary 9 peak hits B 3 peak to peak B 2 Glossary 11 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index period B 2 Glossary 11 phase B 2 Glossary 12 pk pk B 3 positive duty cycle B 2 positive overshoot B 3 positive width B 3 propagation delay B 1 quality factor B 5 rise time B 3 Glossary 14 RMS B 3 Glossary 14 S N ratio B 5 setup C 11 statistics 3 146 Glossary 9 stddev B 3 tracking Glossary 10 undershoot Glossary 10 waveform count B 3 width Glossary 11 Glossary 12 Measurement accuracy ensuring maximum 3 160 3 166 Measurements C 2 automated 3 140 Classes of 3 139 cursor 3 151 eye diagram B 6 high and low levels defined B 6 levels used in taking B 5 B 6 reference levels defined B 6 reference levels defined eye pattern optical B 7 Measuring waveforms 3 139 absolute reference 3 143 access gating 3 150 annotate measurement 3 146 annotate waveforms on screen 3 140 annotated display 3 141 automatic measurements 3 140 calibrate the oscilloscope 3 161 change cursor position 3 155 channel 3 141 3 142 check the calibration status 3 161 components determining time cursor readout values 3 153 connect the probe calibration fixture 3 162 cursor 3 150 cursor measureme
427. stogram Histogram measurements File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Tek Run Sample Help Buttons O7 Jul 03 17 34 21 Top Limit i 516 8m Bottom Limit 492 8m 3 384 4ps 1 355 506 IE 200m A IEE Mean 1 993ns p1 99462 5 0ns div IEE Max 3 2ns 11 3 14250 20 0GS s 50 0ps pt HERI PK Pk s 2 2ns 2 12710 EN 224mv IEA Min 1 0ns 1 01774 Figure 3 40 Horizontal histogram view and measurement data CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 157 Measuring Waveforms A histogram source can be any waveform channel or math including a reference waveform In addition to using limit controls to set histogram box boundaries you can also use standard Windows drag and drop to resize and reposition the histogram box Histograms are not available in FastFrame Record View XY or Zoom modes Using Histograms Histogram Size The maximum vertical histogram size is 200 The maximum horizontal size is 500 Histogram Counting Stays On Turning on histograms starts histogram counting and data accumulation A sample histogram display is shown in Figure 3 40 Histogram data is continuously accumulated until you explicitly turn off histograms This allows you to continue collecting histogram data even when you turn off the histogram display To Start and Reset Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a meas
428. surements NOTE You can also make graticule measurements counting graticule divisions and multiplying them by the vertical or horizontal scales set for the waveform that you are measuring CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 139 Measuring Waveforms Measurement Cursor Graticule Cursors Readouts readouts readouts Cursi Pos 3 0 08 Curs2 Pos k 4 B4us b Wem 500mV Q HKA Amp 980 0mV Hie ti 0 0s 1 0us div HAI Rise 1 668ns t2 4 84us 500MS s 2 0ns pt IA Freg 102 4kHz At 4 84us 40 0mV k 1 At 206 6kHz Figure 3 34 Graticule Cursor and Automatic measurements Taking Automatic Measurements 3 140 The instrument automatically takes and displays waveform measurements This section describes how to set up the instrument to let it do the work of taking measurements for you Because automatic measurements use the waveform record points and Fast Ac quisitions mode and Waveform Database mode measurements use a multidimen sional array of points automatic measurements are usually more accurate than cursor and graticule measurements And the instrument does the work continu ously taking updating and displaying these measurements Some features of automatic measurements follow Annotate Waveforms On Screen You can create text to mark characterization levels that each measurement uses to compute results see Figure 3 35 See Customizing the Display on page 3
429. system Glossary 5 Display control 3 120 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 5 Index Display control window dots 3 134 infinite persistence 3 134 variable persistence 3 134 vectors 3 134 Display controls intensity 3 46 Display menu appearance C 9 color palette C 10 colors C 9 cross hair C 9 display date and time C 10 display format C 9 display persistence C 9 display setup C 9 display style C 9 Display trigger T C 10 dots C 9 frame C 9 full C 9 graticule style C 9 grid C 9 infinite persistence C 9 intensified samples C 9 intensity 3 46 linear C 9 monochrome gray C 10 monochrome green C 10 n C 10 no persistence C 9 objects C 9 persistence controls C 9 remote display C 10 reset all C 9 screen text C 9 sin x x C 9 spectral grading C 10 temperature grading C 10 user palette C 10 variable persistence C 9 vectors C 9 waveform display on C 10 waveform intensity 3 46 waveform interpolation C 9 xy 3 47 C 9 xyz 3 48 C 9 yt 3 47 C 9 Display on off C 1 C 4 C 13 C 14 Display only 3 162 Display trigger T C 10 Displaying waveforms 3 119 access the display Setup dialog box 3 135 acquisition preview 3 121 Index 6 adjust the horizontal reference 3 125 change graticule style 3 137 change waveforms colors 3 137 checking the zoom scale and position 3 130 color palette 3 132 customizable display elements 3 132 customiz
430. t set Save your setup 10 Touch the Save button to save the setup file To cancel without saving touch the Cancel button For further 11 For more help on saving setups touch the Help assistance button in the toolbar to access contextual help on screen CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources Save Instrument Setup As Save in Setups x ct Ely File name 030709_130553 il Save astype Setup Files set Cancel I Auto incrementtile name Help Access to virtual keyboard Base file name 030709130553 E coum 0 E Save as type Setup Files set kd Cancel W Auto incrementfile name Help See page 3 263 to learn about using online help 3 225 Data Input Output To Recall Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to recall a setup to the instrument Remember that recalling a setup replaces the existing setup which is lost Overview To recall your setup Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up You must have access to a setup saved by the instrument Note This procedure does not make the setup active See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 9 Display the 2 From the toolbar touch Setups and select the Recall Setu i ps setups control Setups tab of the Setups control window window ips RAN Recall Instrument Settings Recall Setting o ron 0 gt Recal
431. t C 3 select for copy C 3 waveform C 3 Edit MyScope control window 3 261 Either A Trigger control window 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 89 Electrical out 3 57 Envelope 3 26 3 30 3 49 acquisition mode 3 49 incompatible with fast acquisitions 3 41 Envelope acquisition mode Glossary 5 Environment requirements 1 6 Equation editor C 14 Equivalent time C 6 Equivalent time sampling 3 37 3 49 random Glossary 5 Erase all references and setups 3 233 Error log C 15 Ethernet 3 255 Excel 3 244 Exiting the application 1 15 Export C 2 save format 3 235 setup C 2 waveforms 3 236 Exporting files using PRINT button 3 242 Exporting waveforms 3 235 Ext ratio C 12 Ext ratio dB C 12 Ext ratio C 12 External reference 2 10 C 15 External signals C 15 Extinction ratio B 4 Extinction ratio B 4 Extinction ratio dB B 4 Eye base B 4 diagram B 6 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 7 Index height B 4 top B 4 width B 4 Eye base C 12 Eye height C 12 Eye top C 12 Eye width C 12 F Fall time B 1 C 12 Glossary 6 Falling edge A Trigger control window 3 98 3 100 FALSE A Trigger control window 3 96 3 99 Fast acquisition 3 40 3 49 automatic selection 3 41 normal DSO and fast acquisition displays 3 44 to adjust the intensity 3 46 to enable fast acquisitions mode 3 45 to select the color palette 3 46 to select the format 3 47 to set display format 3 47 to
432. t signals related to the power line frequency Examples include devices such as lighting equipment and power supplies Because the instrument generates the trigger from the power line you do not have to use a channel input m Auxiliary Trigger AUX IN provides a fifth source that you can use as a trigger input when you need to use the four input channels for other signals For example you might want to trigger on a clock while displaying four other logic signals To use the auxiliary trigger connect the signal to the Auxiliary Trigger input connector The Auxiliary Trigger input is not compatible with most probes nor can you display the auxiliary trigger signal 3 64 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Trigger Types The instrument provides the following categories of trigger types m Edge is the simplest and most commonly used trigger type You can use it with analog or digital signals An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source the signal the trigger circuit is monitoring passes through a specified voltage level in the specified direction the trigger slope m Advanced triggers are a collection of trigger types that are primarily used with digital signals to detect specific conditions The glitch runt width transition and timeout types trigger on unique properties of pulses that you can specify The pattern and state types trigger on logic combinations of several signals The setu
433. t violates setup and hold times relative to a clock This subsection also describes how to use the advanced triggers pattern state and setup hold These trigger types are available for both A and B triggering allowing you extensive latitude in defining both trigger events in the sequence to capture complex signals See Sequential Triggering on page 3 103 for more information Runt glitch width transition timeout and window pulses are not recognized until the instrument sees the trailing edge of the pulse The instrument then triggers or if the trigger is logic qualified checks the logic status of the other CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 77 Triggering channels If the logic qualifying signals are present a trigger is generated Due to this timing there is a chance that the pulse and the logic qualifying signals were present at the same time but not when the instrument checks for them You can check the advanced trigger status in the readout The readout indicates the trigger type and then shows sources levels or any other parameters that are important for the particular trigger type Figure 3 25 shows an example readout for the state trigger type 2 0us div 250MS s 4 0ns pt HXX AND Trigger type State Ch 1 2 3 Inputs High Don t Care Don t Care Ch 4 Input Rising Edge Logic AND Figure 3 25 Example advanced trigger readout Read the following topics they provid
434. t hookup Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the probe compensation output One BNC cable One TekConnect adapter Check Horizontal Equipment Operation required Prerequisites None 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the equipment to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 1 11 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Incoming Inspection Instrument under test mme CJ lt BNC cable from PROBE COMPENSATION output to CH 1 input Figure 1 11 Setup for time base test 3 Set up the instrument Push the front panel AUTOSET button 4 Touch the Vert button and then touch Offset Adjust the Ch1 Offset to 0 25 V using the multipurpose knob 5 Set the Vertical SCALE to 100 mV per division 6 Set the time base Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 us div The time base readout is displayed at the bottom of the graticule 7 Verify that the time base operates Confirm the following statements m One period of the square wave probe compensation signal is about five horizontal divisions on screen for the 200 us div horizontal scale setting m Rotating the horizontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform on screen more horizontal divisions per waveform period counter clockwise rotation contracts it and returning the horizontal scale to 200 us div returns the period to ab
435. tab of the reference in which you want to save the control window waveform Ref 1 Retz ef 3 Refa z Display Postion T a perenne to Refi Feral uth fron rw aoa mal 2 Recan Select the 4 Select the Ch Math or Ref tab of the waveform that j wo gA 2 E Y m waveform to you want to save and then touch the number of the u MA save channel math or reference waveform that you want to E E cme save 3 228 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview Label the waveform Save the waveform to a reference To save a waveform Cont 5 6 If you want to label the waveform touch Label and use your keyboard or the pop up keyboard to create a label for your waveform Display La You can label any channel math or reference waveform T and position the label relative to the display edge and the vertical position of the waveform using the Label control window m Using the menu bar select Vertical and then Label m From the Label control window select the waveform that you want to label using the Source buttons From the Label control window touch Label and use your keyboard or the pop up keyboard to create a label for your waveform Position the label relative to the waveform using the multipurpose knobs your keyboard or the pop up keyboard Touch the Save Wmf to Ref x Save button to save your waveform Data in the existing reference
436. tem Overview Maps The instrument is a highly capable waveform acquisition test and measurement system The following model provides background information on its operation which in turn may provide you insight on how the instrument can be used Functional Model Map Signal Processing Output amp Digital Signal Acquisition amp Transformation Storage Display amp UI Input channels Acquisition Amplitude system scaling page 3 23 Page 3 119 page 3 18 CH 1 4 Trigger Timebase system system page 3 63 pages 3 119 L 3 167 Recovered clock output 5 Recovered data output converter Electrical output Optical to electrical CSA7000B Series Optical input The model comprises four high level subsystems or processes embodying a variety of hardware and software functions and the data that connects them Digital Signal Acquisition System Acquires a waveform record from each signal that you input to each channel using the following subsystems Input Channels Conditions the input signal primarily through the use of analog hardware before the signal is converted to digital form m Trigger System Recognizes a specific event of interest on the input trigger signal and informs the Timebase of the occurrence of the event Also provides recovered clock and data signals optional on TDS7000B Series instruments CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 2
437. terpolates or uses equivalent time see Equivalent Time Sampling on page 3 37 Math waveforms Measurements on channels when in Fast XY or XYZ m Mask testing optional on TDS7000B Series instruments If you select any of these modes before or while Fast Acquisitions is on they will inhibit temporarily turn off Fast Acquisitions mode Using Fast Acquisitions Consider the mode that you want to use to acquire data Automatic Selection Fast Acquisitions automatically selects record length and sample rate to optimize the displayed image by optimizing live time and minimizing dead time Fast Acquisitions selects the sample rates and record lengths and compresses them to 500 pixels to produce the maximum display content Waveform Capture Rate Figures 3 13 and 3 14 illustrate how Fast Acquisitions mode differs from the normal acquisition mode used by digital storage instru ments Note that normal mode follows a capture waveform digitize waveform update waveform memory display waveform cycle Normal mode misses short term events occurring during the long dead times Typical waveform capture rates are 50 waveforms per second Fast Acquisitions mode increases the waveform capture rate to up to 400 000 waveforms per second updating the waveform array many times between displays This very fast capture rate greatly increases the probability that runts glitches and other infrequent events will accumulate in waveform memory The instrument the
438. test pro grams The programmer information contains the following content GPIB configuration information for the instrument m Lists of the command groups and the commands they contain m Detailed command descriptions including syntax and examples m Status and error messages m Programming examples The CD also contains a printable version of the programmer information in the form of a PDF file Manual Performance Verification Procedure This is a printable PDF file that describes how to verify the instrument performance using generic test equip ment User manual This is a PDF file of this user manual Serial Mask User Manual This is a PDF file that describes how to use the serial mask features of the instrument Optional Accessory Software The Optional Applications Software CD contains programs that you can install and run five times per application You can then purchase an upgrade from Tektronix if you decide that you want to continue to use the application Refer to the instructions that accompany the CD for installation information You can install desktop application software on the instrument The instrument has been tested with the following software products installed Microsoft Office 2000 including Word Excel Powerpoint and Access m MathCad m MATLAB CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Installation Other software products may be compatible but have not been tested by Tektron
439. that pops up to navigate to the directory UE Rake E yar caeay containing the file riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data A y Delimi Chi h b h field Note If using MS Excel 2000 or 2002 skip the next Aes Sai OS peti hale ans ss aan ec el step Start import at row 1 File Origin Windows ANSI had In the dialog that displays make the selections as shown at the right as you navigate through the Text Teet Impor VSee Import Wizard You must select delimiter as your data This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see he how your text is affected in the preview below type comma as the delimiter type and General as your Column data format SAE oe Boe I other i hy 2 x I Treat consecutive delimiters as one Text Qualifier zl Note This step assumes MS Excel 97 your tool may have similar import features for comma separated data Check its documentation a Text Date MDY aa General converts numeric values to numbers date values to dates and all remaining values to text Note To plot 2 channels export the first channel with scale factors and time values Export the second chan Do not import column Skip nel as voltages only Data preview Cancel lt Back Next gt 3 244 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Data Input Output Overview To use exported waveforms Cont
440. the front panel horizontal POSITION knob to center the rising edge horizontally on the screen Change the horizontal SCALE to 40 ns div The rising edge of the waveform should remain near the center graticule Readjust the delay setting to position the rising edge 2 divisions to the right of the center graticule line Push the front panel DELAY button several times to toggle delay off and on and back off again Verify that the display switches quickly between two different points in time the rising edge shifts horizon tally on the display 9 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the probe compensation output Equipment required Prerequisites One BNC cable One TCA BNC TekConnect adapter None Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button Hook up the signal source Connect the equipment to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 1 12 Set up the instrument Push the front panel AUTOSET button CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Incoming Inspection Instrument under test eps 2939A g J lt BNC cable from PROBE COMPENSATION output to CH 1 input Figure 1 12 Setup for trigger test 4 Touch the Vert button and then touch Offset Adjust the Ch1 Offset to 0 25 V using the multipurpose knob 5 Set the Vertical SCALE to 100 mV per division 6 Verify that
441. the internal reference or the reference at which SPC was last run Frequency range 9 8 MHz to 10 2 MHz Input sensitivity 200 mV gt p for frequencies between 9 8 MHz to 10 2 MHz Input voltage maximum 7 Vp p Input impedance 1 5 KQ Cin 40 pF measured at gt 100 kHz Internal reference output Frequency 10 MHz 2 5 ppm over any 100 ms interval Aging lt 1 ppm per year Output voltage Vout high Vout low true 22 5 V into open circuit lt 0 7 V with lt 4 ma sink 21 0 V into 50 Q load lt 0 25 V into 50 Q load Serial data output baud rate range CSA7000B Series Fbaud lt 1250 MBd Output swing of 1010 repeating pattern at this baud will only be at least 200 mV into 50 Q Serial clock output frequency range CSA7000B Series Peak to peak output swing at 625 MHz is at least 200 mV p p into 50 Q only Higher frequencies are further attenuated by approximately 6 dB per octave above 625 MHz Use AC or DC coupled 50 termination AC coupling the clock provides about 10 more amplitude Serial data and clock output voltages typical Voh 1 0 V CSA7000B Series only Vol 1 7 V Assumes a load impedance greater than 1 KQ 50 Q source termination If a 50 Q or 75 Q load is used either use a DC blocking capacitor in series with the signal or reference the termination to about 1 3 V The signal amplitude will be correspondingly reduced Serial data output latency typical CSA7000B Series 11 ns 4 ns plus 35 5 clock cycles only A 2
442. the trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal Trigger holdoff helps ensure a stable display Horizontal acquisition window The range of the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the voltage parameters of a waveform The instrument displays the value of the active moveable cursor with respect to ground and the voltage value between the bars Horizontal Reference Point The point about which the trace is expanded or contracted when horizontal size adjustments are made The horizontal reference point remains anchored as the rest of the trace grows or shrinks around it CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Initialize Setting the instrument to a completely known default condition Interpolation The way the instrument calculates values for record points when the instrument cannot acquire all the points for a complete record with a single trigger event That condition occurs when the instrument is limited to real time sampling and the time base is set to a value that exceeds the effective sample rate of the instrument The instrument has two interpolation options linear or sin x x interpolation Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired
443. the waveform on screen turning the knob clockwise increases the amplitude and returning the knob to the original scale setting returns the amplitude to that shown in Table 1 3 for that scale setting CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 25 Incoming Inspection 1 26 7 Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes From the Horiz Acq menu select Horizontal Acquisition Setup Touch the Acquisition tab in the control window that displays Touch each of the acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true see Using the Acquisition Controls on page 3 24 for more information m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there is a small amount of noise present on the square wave m Peak Detect mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise present in Sample mode peak detected m Hi Res mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise that was present in Sample mode reduced m Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise reduced m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise displayed m Waveform Database mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen that is the accumulation of several acquisitions 8 Test all channels Repeat steps 2 through 7 until all four input channels are verified 9 Remove the tes
444. there are 4 horizontal bars indicating the highs and lows None 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 3 horizontal arrows indicating the crossing positions and 4 horizontal bars indicating the highs and lows 2 horizontal arrows at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 3 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Histogram Wim Ct None seni am Hts in Box None Peak Hits 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the peak hits Median 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the median bin Max 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the max bin Min 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the min bin Pk Pk 2 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the min and max bins Mean 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the mean bin Std Dev 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 1 standard deviation U 1 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 1 standard deviation U 2 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 2 standard deviation U 3 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 3 standard deviation
445. time Each point decays in a set time interval 4 From display Style select an available style Vectors displays lines between waveform dots Dots displays waveform record points as dots m Inten Samp displays actual samples as bright dots and blacks out interpolated samples Note Adjustment of display intensity may be necessary to set display intensity to the desired level Interpolation Sin 5 Select an Interpolation mode by choosing Sin x x or Linear For more information see Interpolation on page 3 134 3 135 Displaying Waveforms Overview Set display styles Cont Related control elements and resources Select a 6 From the the Display setup control window see right ee persistence choose a persistence mode mode m Infinite Persistence to make data persist indefinite 7 ly Waveform displays accumulate data as new wes waveform records acquire resulting in a build up of Eons pe data in the displayed waveforms m Variable Persistence to make data persist momentarily but also decay New waveform displays accumulate data as new waveform records acquire but with continuous replacement of the oldest data If you select Variable Persistence set a time at which the oldest data fades away Off to make data display for the current acquisition only m Reset to restart the accumulation of data Continue with 7 For more ways to customize the display see the next next procedure
446. time violation Negative settings for setup or hold times skew the setup hold violation zone to locate it before or after the clocking edge See the bottom and center waveforms of Figure 3 26 The instrument can then detect and trigger on violations of a time range that occurs before or one that occurs after the clock NOTE Keep the hold time setting to no more than 1 5 ns less than one half the clock period hold time period 2 1 5 ns or the instrument cannot trigger this assumes a 50 duty cycle clock CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 81 Triggering Setup Hold Ts Setup time violation gt Ty Hold time zone Setup Hold violation zone Ts Ty re eS i Tg Ty must be 500 ps gt Clock level Clock signal Setup Hold lt violation gt Ts zone gt Ty al Clock level Clock signal Setup Hold lt violation zone gt TH Ts aan lt gt Clock level Clock signal Positive Tg Negative Ty Negative Tg Positive Ty lt gt Figure 3 26 Violation zones for Setup Hold triggering 3 82 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering To Trigger ona Glitch When you select the type Glitch the instrument will trigger on a pulse narrower or wider in width than some specified time To set up for glitch triggering do the following procedures
447. tion Select the Optical Wavelength appropriate for the signals with which you are working Optical conversion gain is set appropriately for the wavelength you select Before performing dark level calibration remove your optical signal from the input and cover the optical input Select Dark Level Calibration to start the dark level compensation Follow the displayed instructions to complete the compensa tion For more information consult the instrument online help Execute a signal path compensation of the instrument as soon as the instrument has reached operation equilibrium that is after a 20 minute warm up Initiate compensation from the Utilities menu Instrument Calibration command For more information see Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 160 Compensation of the instrument also performs an optical dark level compensa tion Wavelength Filter and Bandwidth Selection CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual CSA7000B Series To select the optical wavelength use the Vertical Setup menu This menu is shown in Figure 3 20 on page 3 59 Wavelength and Dark Level menus are not available unless the O E Electrical Out to CH1 Input adapter is installed Chanz Chan3 Ghan4 Ch al ni Display Dark Level o 0 0div Scale Label 1atmw Vertical Zoom Offset Position ls Wavelength i Pass z 13100m Desken Status Cal Calibration Eo atten Remove optic
448. tion that is accessible to users Touch Calibrate to start the calibration Calibration may take several minutes Calibration is complete after Working is no longer displayed in the Calibrate button and Running is no longer displayed in the Status readout The calibration status should be Pass If not recalibrate the instrument or have the instrument serviced by qualified service personnel Touch the Help button to access the online assistance CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources MLE Heip Buttons Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date GPIB Configuration LAN Server Status External Signals Instrument Calibration Instrument Diagnostics Multipurpose Knobs User Preferences Option installation Calibration Instructions Status Signal Path Com PC corrects for DC inaccuracies caused by Pare long term drift Allow the oscilloscope to warm up C Run SPC whenever the ambient temperature of the oscilloscope has changed by more than 5 C or once a week if the three most sensitive ranges are used Calibrate SPC will be adversely affected by input signals with AC components nect ary probes or input signals before running SPC SPC can take up n minutes to run Close Status Pass Calibrate Close See page 3 263 to learn about using online help 3 161 Measuring Waveforms To Connect the Probe Calibration Fixture
449. tion method selected in the display menu to fill in the missing record points either linear or sin x x interpolation The default method is sine x x See Interpolation on page 3 39 for a discussion of interpolation CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources FastFram Setup i Ener 3 31 Acquiring Waveforms To Start and Stop Acquisition Overview To start and stop acquisition Prerequisites 1 To start 2 acquiring To stop 3 acquiring To take a 4 single acquisition For more help 5 3 32 The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up Triggering should also be set up Make sure all the channels to be acquired are turned on use channel buttons see To Set Up Signal Input on page 3 12 if needed Then push the RUN button to begin acquiring Push the RUN STOP button to stop acquisition Acquisition will also stop if triggering ceases while in Normal trigger mode Push the SINGLE button to start acquiring and acquire enough waveforms to satisfy the acquisition mode and then stop See references listed at right Use the procedure that follows to start and stop acquisition Control elements and resources See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup INTENSITY See To Set Acquisition Modes on page 3 29 and To Get More Help on page 3 16 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Se
450. tion window 40 4 Volt window size here 100 mV div x 10 divisions 8 graticule divisions and Channel 1 Graticule 1 division of position reference indicator 0 4 Volt 0 5 Volt b Vertical offset and position Vertical gt 1 0 Volt can change the location of window 0 7 Volt the acquired waveform within the acquisition l window repositioning it so Graticule its waveform appears inthe Channel 1 S DE SA graticule reference Indicator ee Figure 3 2 Setting vertical range and position of input channels The vertical offset control affects the vertical acquisition window and the displayed waveform as follows m The vertical range window is always centered around the offset value It is the voltage level at the middle of the vertical acquisition window With no zero offset as shown in Figure 3 2 a and b that voltage level is zero ground m As you vary vertical offset the middle voltage level moves relative to zero This moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window it appears the waveform moves in the window Actually a larger signal shows what really happens the offset moves the middle of the vertical acquisition window up and down on the input signal Figure 3 3 shows how offset moves the acquisition window to control the portion of the waveform amplitude the window captures CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User M
451. tive control Open access to the Windows operating system enables unprecedented customization and extensibility Key features include m Up to 7 GHz bandwidth and 20 GS s real time sampling rate depending on the model CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 1 1 Product Description 1 2 Record lengths up to 64 000 000 samples depending on model and option Fast acquisition at up to 400 000 acquisitions per second for analog instrument emulation and isolation of data dependent failures during conformance performance testing and for examination of very low level signals in pseudo random bit streams CSA7000B Series Communication signal analysis serial mask testing serial pattern triggering and triggering on communications signals Use of these features is described in the Option SM Serial Mask Testing and Option ST Serial Pattern Trigger User Manual CSA7000B Series Optical to Electrical converter optical reference receiver and clock recovery provides single connection convenience protects integrity of system calibration and increases versatility Up to 2 DC vertical gain accuracy depending on the model Four input channels each with 8 bit resolution CH 3 signal output and auxiliary trigger input and output Sample envelope peak detect high resolution waveform database and average acquisition modes Full programmability with an extensive GPIB command set and a message based interface Tri
452. to minimize interruption to your work flow Help Topics are there when you need more details about a feature m Use the manuals for instructions on putting the instrument into service for procedures on reinstalling its product software for listings of specifications and for overviews of features and their operation m Use the online Programmers Guide either displayed on the instrument screen or on your windows equipped PC for support on operating the instrument from the GPIB How to Use Online Help Overview Prerequisites To use online help The instrument must be powered up and running Use the procedure steps that follow to access contextual help and to learn how to search the help system for more information Control elements and resources See Installation page 1 5 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 263 Accessing Online Help Overview To use online help Cont Control elements and resources For in depth 2 When using the toolbar and you have a control window Hel contextual displayed touch the Help button to open the help overviews system with an overview of the control window that is currently displayed 3 Some windows have a help button as shown at the right Click or gt Help Touch the button to open the help system with an touch here overview of the dialog box that is currently displayed See right Touch the Minimize button in a help window to
453. trigger if the signal stays lower than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value m Either causes a trigger if the signal stays lower or stays higher than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value Set the timer 5 To set the timeout timer touch Timer and use the co ia wenn a Source Timeout Trigger multipurpose knob or keyboard to set the time TriggerType aaa T p p y Timeout Y nae A qm f Sea i 5 Timer s 263 0mV FT 500 0ps e Trigger Levels Trigger When Stays High Stays Low _ Either Sharad Y IEN i oT 3 94 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview Set the level Logic qualify the trigger To set mode and holdoff Trigger based on pulse timeout Cont Control elements and resources 6 To set the Level touch Level and use the multipurpose ZJE Pohe knobs or keypad to set the timeout trigger level E PEE Note You can set the level to a value appropriate to anal l Tm either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch Level l EE and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL qaen m en To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger oe on page 3 102 Pattern Ch3 px 12V 1 2 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types See To set holdoff on page 3 74 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 71 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trig
454. trigger to occur Positive requires that the lower threshold must be first crossed going positive then recrossed going negative without the upper threshold being crossed at all m Negative requires that the upper threshold must be first crossed going negative then recrossed going positive without the lower threshold being crossed at all m Either requires only that either one of the thresholds must be first crossed going in either direction then recrossed going in the opposite direction without the other threshold being crossed at all For all three polarity settings triggering occurs at the point the runt pulse recrosses its first threshold Logic qualify 8 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger the trigger on page 3 102 Control elements and resources Source Runt Trigger thi Vv T jer Upper Level s Deo aR APE soaps Lower Level z Source Runt Trigger Runt E Jase a Selected trigger bar at Unselected trigger bar upper threshold at lower threshold Runt pulse crosses first threshold only recrosses first threshold level and triggers acquisition Trigger if Logic Y Pattern Ch3 px 12V 1 2 3 86 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview To set mode and holdoff Trigger Based on Pulse Width Overview Select width triggering Select the source Select the polarity To trigger on a runt puls
455. trument supports many of the same operations for math waveforms that it provides for channel live and reference waveforms For example you can measure math waveforms with cursors This section introduces these operations m Vertical display scaling and positioning m Taking automatic measurements m Taking cursor measurements m Histograms on math waveforms CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 177 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Using Math Waveforms 3 178 Many of the same instrument tools that prove to be powerful adjuncts for displaying processing and analyzing other waveforms also work on math waveforms For example in addition to the operations listed above you can save math waveforms as references Independent horizontal scaling Each math waveform that you create derives its horizontal scale and position from the sources that you include in its math expression You can adjust these controls for the source waveforms and your adjustments will reflect in the math waveform as the sources update You can also magnify all waveforms including math waveforms using zoom Basically you use the same techniques to work with math waveforms that work with channel waveforms Consider the Source Changes to source waveforms that you include as math ex pression operands are reflected in the math waveform However if Ch1 is 4 divisions high at 100 mV per division then at 50 mV per division Ch1 is 8
456. ts for frequen cies gt 200 kHz attenuates signals lt 200 kHz 50 Q 10 5 V DC peak AC 50 Hz Lowest frequency for Set Level to 50 typical For vertical scale settings 10 mV div and 1 V div Advanced trigger sensitivity typical Advanced triggers 1 0 div from DC to 1 GHz at the TekConnect connector Advanced trigger timing Glitch type Runt type Time qualified runt type Width type Window type A 16 For vertical scale settings 10 mV div and 1 V div Minimum recognizable event width or Minimum rearm time to recognize next time event Minimum glitch width 225 ps 250 ps 170 ps on the TDS7704B Minimum runt width 225 ps 250 ps Minimum runt width 340 ps 450 ps Minimum difference between upper and 250 ps lower limits 225 ps 225 ps 300 ps CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 4 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Transition type Timeout type Logic or state type typical Setup Hold type typical Advanced trigger timer ranges Glitch type Runt type time qualified Width type Timeout type Transition type Pattern type Window type Setup Hold type Logic qualified pulse type trigger minimum timing requirements Glitch Runt Time qualified runt Width Transition Window Description Minimum transition time 0 ps Minimum timeout time 340 ps Minimum event width 100 ps Minimum clock pulse w
457. tures 2 7 Display Map Single Graticule 0 cece eee eee eee 2 8 Front Panel I O Map PETERE ERa a Nas SRE eS pig cakes 2 9 Rear Panel I O Map 2 cc cece cece cc ccc eee cece e cece eens 2 10 OVERVIEW 55 e ok Fe ke ees CoE a E oes ERE OOS ESS 3 1 Acquiring Waveforms c ccc ce cee c cece rer ee eee eeeeee 3 7 Signal Connection and Conditioning 0 00 cee eee eee eee 3 8 Connecting and Conditioning Your Signals 000 3 9 To Set Up Signal Input EnA cee cee eee eens 3 12 To Autoset the Instrument 0 00 0 eee eee eee eee eee 3 15 Wo Reset the Mnstrume nts ch set Aha anea ea a aE a re lace Ria athe A a 3 16 To Get More Help ace a ra arenas tiara rele nee otis ore le Wi diate Weel avenge 3 16 Input Conditioning Background 0 0 0 c cee eee eee 3 17 Setting Acquisition Controls 2 0 0 0 vesan ata eee eee 3 23 Using the Acquisition Controls 0 0 00 eee ee eee 3 24 To Set Acquisition Modes 0 E EERE cece eens 3 29 To Start and Stop Acquisition 0 00 3 32 TEST ROU MOIO i a0 a Scere EEEE nee ets ore SE AAEE 3 33 Acquisition Control Background 0 cece cece cee eee 3 34 Acquisition Hardware erreren eea E cece eee 3 34 Sampling PIOC S uoin r aa espn se uae wee see gts ere ease Siar elena gata 3 35 ACQUISILION Modes ran p anea e wince sina Meelie pte gine ere wile Sista belie AERA 3 35 Waverorm RECO a
458. turn to regular service Touch the Close button to exit the instrument calibration control window Functional Tests The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the instrument functions properly A list of required test equipment is shown on page 1 21 NOTE These procedures verify that the instrument features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits Therefore when the instructions in the functional tests that follow call for you to verify that a signal appears on screen that is about five divisions in amplitude or has a period of about six horizontal divisions and so forth do not interpret the quantities given as limits NOTE Do not make changes to the front panel settings that are not called out in the procedures Each verification procedure will require you to set the instrument to certain default settings before verifying functions If you make changes to these settings other than those called out in the procedure you may obtain invalid results In this case redo the procedure from step 1 When you are instructed to press a front panel button or screen button the button may already be selected its label will be highlighted If this is the case it is not necessary to push the button Check Vertical Operation Equipment OneBNCcable required One P7240 probe P7260 probe for TDS7704B One 067 0405 xx 067 0484 xx for TDS7704B probe calibration and deskew fixture P
459. type 3 155 select measurement parameters 3 141 select measurement sources 3 141 select the cursor sources 3 155 select the waveform 3 145 set cursor style 3 156 set cursor tracking 3 156 set display and reset histogram source and type 3 159 set histogram display options 3 159 set histogram limit controls 3 160 set measurement reference levels 3 147 3 148 signal type 3 143 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Index 13 Index sources 3 141 3 142 split cursors 3 151 standard deviation 3 146 statistics 3 141 take a snapshot of measurements 3 149 take measurements on a frame 3 142 taking automatic measurements 3 140 taking cursor measurements 3 151 taking histograms 3 157 3 165 to calibrate probes 3 162 to compensate passive probes 3 163 to compensate the oscilloscope 3 160 to deskew channels 3 162 to set the cursor sources 3 155 to start and reset histogram counting 3 158 to take automatic measurements 3 144 tracking cursor 3 156 using automatic measurements 3 142 using cursors 3 152 using histograms 3 158 vertical cursors 3 151 vertical cursors measure from the trigger point 3 153 zoom 3 150 Median B 3 C 12 Mesial Glossary 10 Min 3 146 take automatic measurements 3 145 Minimize C 2 Minimum B 2 C 11 C 12 Glossary 10 Min max 3 148 Mode Glossary 10 acquisition 3 35 C 6 trigger C 8 Monochrome gray C 10 Monochrome green C 10 More C 1
460. um amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Mode A stable condition of oscillation in a laser A laser can operate in one mode single mode or in many modes multimode Multimode Cable A thick cored optical fiber compared to single mode cable that can propagate light of multiple modes Multipurpose knobs Front panel knobs you can use to change the value of the assigned parameter NAND A logic Boolean function in which the output of the AND function is complemented true becomes false and false becomes true On the instrument that is a trigger logic pattern and state function Negative duty cycle A timing measurement representing the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative overshoot measurement Amplitude voltage measurement _ Low Min NegativeOvershoot Anpinude x 100 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Negative width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points falling edge MidRef default 50 and rising edge MidRef default 50 on a negative pulse Normal trigger mode A mode on which the instrument does not acquire a waveform record unless a valid trigger event occurs It waits for a valid trigger event before acquiring waveform data NOR A logic Boolean function in which the output of the OR function is complemented true becomes false and false becomes true
461. um sample Model channels Bandwidth rate real time TDS7704B 4 7 GHz 20 GS s CSA7404B 4 4 GHz 20 GS s TDS7404B 4 4 GHz 20 GS s TDS7254B 4 2 5 GHz 20 GS s TDS7154B 4 1 5 GHz 20 GS s Separate Digitizers Ensure accurate timing measurements with separate digitizers for each channel Acquisition on multiple channels is always concurrent The digitizers can also be combined to yield a higher sample rate on a single channel Fast Acquisition Acquire up to 400 000 waveforms per second to see rapidly changing signals or intermittent signal irregularities Long Record Lengths Choose record lengths from 500 points up to 500 000 points per channel up 2 000 000 points on a single channel Extend the maximum record length up to a maximum of 64 000 000 points with memory options Peak Detect Acquisition Mode See pulses as narrow as 400 ps even at the slower time base settings Peak detect helps you see noise and glitches in your signal Acquisition Control Acquire continuously or set up to capture single shot acquisitions Enable or disable optional acquisition features such as equivalent time or roll mode Use Fast Frame acquisition to capture and time stamp many events in a rapid sequence Horizontal Delay Use delay when you want to acquire a signal at a significant time interval after the trigger point Toggle delay on and off to quickly compare the signal at two different points in time CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instrume
462. ument on page 1 9 m See page 3 29 for acquisition setup m See page 3 63 for trigger setup CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 223 Data Input Output Overview Display the 3 setups control window Save the setup 4 Name your 5 setup To save to a file 6 3 224 To save your setup Cont From the toolbar touch Setups and select the Save Setups tab of the Setups control window Touch the number of the setup in which you want to save your setup Data in the existing setup will be overwritten Name your setup file by either Accepting the name that appears in the name field Double clicking in the name field and using the keyboard window to enter a new name replacing the default file name Note You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name field Clicking the existing name and using an attached keyboard to enter a new name To display the Save Instrument Setup As dialog from the Setup control window touch Save The Save Instrument Setup dialog allows for the entry of a file name file type and location Control elements and resources ups Delete Setups Save Instrument Settings Save Settings to File E E ups Delete Setups Save Instrument Settings i 0 a 0 co 1 O m Save Settings to File Da Ss Save Settings to File Save Instrument Setup As
463. und and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical officefhome environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 2 Test and measuring Class 1 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Annex H grounded product Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only A 29 Appendix A Specifications A 30 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual eS eee See ae Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported This appendix provides a list of all supported measurements and their defini tions An illustration showing the levels used to take measurements is also included Table B 1 Supported measurements and their definition Name ca Amplitude Area Cycle Area JUL Burst Width a Cycle Mean yy Cycle RMS f p Delay ES Fall Time Frequency Ti High Definition Voltage measurement The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low Area measurement Voltage over time measurement The area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt seconds Ar
464. ure to the output measure For example a 10X probe will attenuate or reduce the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10 Automatic trigger mode A trigger mode that causes the instrument to automatically acquire if triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period Autoset A function of the instrument that automatically produces a stable waveform of usable size Autoset sets up front panel controls based on the characteristics of the active waveform A successful autoset will set the volts div time div and trigger level to produce a coherent and stable waveform display Average acquisition mode In this mode the instrument acquires and displays a waveform that is the averaged result of several acquisitions Averaging reduces the apparent noise The instrument acquires data as in the sample mode and then averages it according to a specified number of averages Averaging Displaying a trace that is the combined result of several acquisitions thereby reducing apparent noise Bandwidth The highest frequency signal the instrument can acquire with no more than 3 dB x 707 attenuation of the original reference signal Burst width A timing measurement of the duration of a burst CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Glossary Control knob See Knob Channel One type of input used for signal acquisition The instrument has four channels Channel probe deskew A relative time delay
465. urement based on the Histogram Counting default settings for histograms Overview To start and reset histogram counting Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have a waveform displayed Open histogram 2 From the toolbar touch the Meas button and then touch setup window the Histogram button to display the Histogram setup window 3 158 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To start and reset histogram counting Cont Related control elements and resources Set display and 3 reset histogram source and type 4 Set histogram 6 display options Select either the Source Ch Math or Ref tab and then select the waveform source for the histogram Histogram Touch either Histogram Mode Horiz or Vert to start histogram counting and display the histogram data m Horiz Displays a horizontal histogram that shows how time varies in the histogram box Vert Displays a vertical histogram that shows how your vertical units vary in the histogram box Off Turns off histogram counting and display Note This control turns on histogram counting and data display You can only display one type of histogram at a time Touch Reset to reset the histogram count Histograms track numbers of counts Touching Reset resets those counts to zero and begins counting from zero Touch Display to toggle the display of the select
466. ures given here will increase the accuracy of the measurements that you take This instrument can compensate itself and the attached probes optimizing the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms you measure Compensation optimizes the capability of the instrument to take accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature If you are using optical signals CSA7000B Series only see Optical Dark Compensation on page 3 58 to perform a dark level calibration Instrument should be powered on Allow a 20 minute warm up Remove all input signals To compensate the instrument so that it can take accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature use the procedure that follows Related control elements and resources See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and Power on the Instrument on page 1 9 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview Display the calibration instructions Check the calibration status Calibrate the instrument Check the calibration status For further assistance To compensate the instrument Cont 2 From the menu bar select Utilities and then select Instrument Calibration The calibration status should be Pass If the status is Warm up wait until the status changes If the status does not change to Pass use the following steps to calibrate the instrument Note Signal Path Compensation is the only calibra
467. use the Trigger Bar to set the threshold levels touch EEGs gs ee the Disp button select the Objects tab and then touch Maaa e Long to display the long trigger bar otis E o The level settings determine the voltage component of slew TA rate Volts Second To finish specifying the slew rate rigger tevele NE transition time set the time component by doing the following steps 6 Touch Width and use the multipurpose knob or keypad AEvent ase Ses ie rental Rods aeon Aen Source Transition Time Trigger chi v wars ss Than to set the delta time value Trigger Type Transition or Upper Level Select 1x e aca Je Lower Level 800 0mV Trigger Levels Sharad Y 3 90 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Triggering Overview Set to trigger when Logic qualify the trigger To set mode and holdoff To trigger based on transition time Cont The instrument compares the pulse edge of the trigger source against the transition time slew rate set by the upper and lower threshold settings and the delta time set in the window To select whether to trigger on edges with transitions times slew rates faster than or slower than that set by these controls do the following step 7 Touch Transition Less Than or Transition Greater Than m Less Than triggers when the transition time is greater than the time you set m Greater Than triggers when the transition time is less
468. value used as the 100 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot High is also used to help derive the HighRef MidRef MidRef2 and LowRef values Low The value used as the 0 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot Low is also used to help derive the HighRef MidRef MidRef2 and LowRef values HighRef The waveform high reference level used in such measurements as fall time and rise time Typically set to 90 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 143 MidRef The waveform middle reference level used in such measurements as Period and Duty Cycle Typically set to 50 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 143 LowRef The waveform low reference level Used in fall and rise time calcula tions Typically set to 10 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 143 Mid2Ref The middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in two waveform time measure ments such as the Delay and Phase measurements You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 143 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements All eye diagram measurements are based on the power level the voltage level or the time locations of edges within each acquisition Figure B 2 shows an eye diagram and the areas from which values are taken that are
469. ver one year a w j C3 Calibration services extended to cover three years KY IK K K K C5 Calibration services extended to cover five years a w j D1 Calibration data report a w j D3 Test Data for calibration services in Opt C3 a wr K D5 Test Data for calibration services in Opt C5 KY IK K K K R1 Repair warranty extended to cover one year W J K K K R3 Repair warranty extended to cover three years w J a a K R5 Repair warranty extended to cover five years vw r a a K 1 34 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Accessories amp Options Accessories This section lists the standard and optional accessories available for this instrument Standard The following accessories are shipped with the instrument Table 1 5 Standard accessories Accessory Part number Graphical Packing List 071 1231 xx User Manual 071 1226 xx Reference Kit 020 2519 xx Product Software CD CSA7404B TDS7404B TDS7254B amp TDS7154B 063 3632 xx TDS7704B 063 3633 xx Operating System Restore CD 020 2569 xx Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy 020 2449 xx Optional Applications Software CD and Documentation Kit 020 2450 xx Getting Started with OpenChoice Solutions Kit 020 2513 xx Option SM and ST User Manual 071 1228 xx Online Help part of the application software Performance Verification a pdf file on the Product Software CD Programmer Online Guide files on the Product Software CD NIST
470. w Select the cursor sources Select a cursor type Change cursor position To set the cursor sources You must target the cursors to the source they are to measure See Cursors Treat Sources Independently on page 3 153 To do so use the procedure that follows Related control elements and resources Display the waveform to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform See page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup Cursors Push the CURSORS front panel button or from the toolbar touch Cursors Cursor Source ch Charnel ae Cur From the Cursor Source menu select the channel math or reference tab and then select the waveform to take cursor measurements on If you are using Waveform or Screen cursors your must select a source for both cursors by first touching a cursor button before selecting a source Cursor Source Note If a waveform is not available its source button is grayed out From the Cursor Type menu select the H Bars V Bars Waveform or Screen cursor type See Table 3 9 on page 3 151 for an explanation of the cursor types To change the position of a cursor use the multipurpose knobs or the keypad to move a cursor CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 155 Measuring Waveforms Overview Set cursor tracking Set cursor style For further assistan
471. waveform Cont 10 11 12 13 14 Select the Waveforms tab to display the Waveforms control window Touch Data Destination and select the destination format of your exported waveform file see File Formats on page 3 235 for information on the available formats Touch Source Waveform and select the source of the waveform a channel math or reference waveform to export from the list If you want waveform scale factors and time values included in your MathCad Mathlab files touch Include waveform scale factors if not checked only voltage vertical values are exported Touch Data Ordering and select the data order top first bottom first or rotate from the list CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Control elements and resources a Export Setup Ed Images Waveforms Measurements Waveform Data Range 1 to f C Save Samples between Cursors py Promptior Filename Data Destination before Exporting Spreadsheet CSV _ C Samples j Set Front Panel Print Button to Export C Save SamplesinZoomArea ji _ Source Channel 1 E A Number of Samples 5000 FastFrame Data Range Waveform Detail Data Ordering Z 7 Include waveform scale factors Export OK Cancel Help Images Waveforms Measureme Data destination cs Channel 3 Channel 4 Math 1 Math 2 Waveform Detail TF Include wav
472. waveform of the elements from which the measurement result is derived Horizontal bars vertical bars horizontal arrows and vertical arrows indicate the elements used by the measurement See Measurement Annotations on page B 9 for a description of the annotations To annotate measure ments perform the following steps 12 From the Measurements setup control window touch Setup Annotation 13 From the drop down list select the measurement to annotate The readout of the annotated measurement contains an asterisk CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Gating nina Statistics no Measurement Off E Mean All Phasa Weight n Reset Setup Close Ref Levs Gating niin Setup Statistics Meas 7 Meas 8 Measuring Waveforms Overview Show more annotation detail Set measurement reference levels To take automatic measurements Cont 14 To select the amount of annotation detail shown with a measurement from the menu bar touch Utilities User Preferences and then select the Measurement tab to display the Annotation Type setup window 15 From the window select either the Standard or Detailed annotation type Selecting Detailed displays more annotations than selecting standard 16 From the Measurements control window touch Setup Ref Levs to display the Reference Levels setup cont
473. will be overwritten Display Label CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Rea Reta Position ddd Scale 1 0V Horz Pos 50 0 Control elements and resources Save Wim to Refi aj gt g a Save Wim to File Delete Wim Filq nN gt Save all Wims to Files PUL Recall Refi from NNa Delete Horeca 1 X Pos 10div 3 Close ition 0 0diy Seale 1 0 Horz Pos Y Pos 22div Vertical Setup Zoom Controls Display On Off Position Scale OfFeat X Position 1 0div Y Position 2 2div Save Wim to Refi NAN z m Delete Wim Filg Recall Refl from an Save Wim to File NNa Delete 3 229 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Save the 7 To save the waveform to a file touch the Save Wfm to 3 waveform to a File Save button or to save all active waveforms to Display Postion je 0 0div Channel 122 Save Wim to File Scale NA lc ie LY a Save all Wims to Files eS file files touch the Save all Wfms to Files Save button EE Label The Save Reference Waveform As window lists all available waveforms allows for browsing to a Save in Waveforns z Bek Be destination directory saving to file and allows you to 040427 _063412_Ch1 wfm name the waveform file apoena dia hamim E PHX_REF1 WFM B TekScope000_Ch1 wfm B TekScope000_Ch2 wfm E
474. with fast rise times especially if you use zoom and the waveform edges are undersampled CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 39 Acquiring Waveforms NOTE When using either type of interpolation you may want to set the display style so that the real samples are displayed intensified and interpolated samples are dimmed The instructions under Select the Display Style on page 3 135 explain how to turn on intensified samples Interleaving The instrument can interleave its channels to attain higher digitizing rates without equivalent time sampling The instrument applies the digitizing resources of unused channels that is channels that are turned off to sample those that are in use turned on Table 3 3 lists how interleaving more than one digitizer to sample a channel extends the maximum digitizing rate Once you set horizontal scale to exceed the maximum digitizing rate for the number of channels in use see Table 3 3 the instrument will not be able to get enough samples to create a waveform record At that point the instrument will switch from real to equivalent time sampling to obtain additional samples See Equivalent Time Sampling on page 3 37 Table 3 3 How interleaving affects sample rate Maximum digitizing rate when real time sampling Number of channels in use TDS7154B 20 GS sec 10 GS sec 5 GS sec Three or Four Using Fast Acquisition Mode
475. y Af B OkH2 y1 10 47dB 400 nsidiv 1 25MS s_800ns pt 7 232mv For more 16 For additional information on setting up and using information spectral math see Defining Spectral Math Waveforms starting on page 3 182 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 219 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 220 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual EEE Data Input Output This section describes the input and output capabilities of your instrument Specifically it covers m Saving and Recalling a Setup on page 3 221 m Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 227 m Exporting and Copying Waveforms on page 3 235 including exporting and copying of images waveforms measurements and histograms m Printing Waveforms on page 3 250 m Remote Communication on page 3 255 Saving and Recalling a Setup This instrument can save a number of different instrument setups for later recall limited only by the space you have to store the setups By saving and recalling different setups you can switch from setup to setup without having to first manually record your settings and then manually set them This capability is helpful when you want to m Save and recall a setup that optimizes the instrument for displaying and analyzing a certain signal m Save a series of setups to help automate a procedure through recall of a sequence of saved setups as part of performing the proc
476. y Fast acquisitions display Figure 3 13 Normal DSO Acquisition and Display mode versus Fast Acquisition mode CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 43 Acquiring Waveforms ia ov a Fast Acquisition display Normal DSO display Ie ov o Figure 3 14 Normal DSO and Fast Acquisition displays To Turn Fast Acquisitions Use the procedure that follows to set up Fast Acquisitions mode On and Off Overview To turn Fast Acquisitions on and off Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up E gt Triggering should also be set up o oo See page page 3 29 for acquisition setup 3 44 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To turn Fast Acquisitions on and off Cont To enable fast 2 acquisitions mode Enable fast acquisitions in one of three ways m Push the front panel FastAcq button m Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq control window or Select Horizontal Acquisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control window Select the Acquisition tab 3 Touch Fast Acquisitions to toggle Fast Acquisitions to Pk Detect Envelope Fast Acquisitions mode will stay on until you turn it off or until you select an incompatible mode that temporarily inhibits fast acquisitions gt To set
477. y IEEE s e PORT GPIB port to connect to controller oo cee CSA7000B Series Auxiliary external trigger input Auxiliary trigger output signal Analog CH 3 signal output scale and offset controlled by CH3 controls External reference input and internal reference output TDS7000B Series External reference gt input and internal reference output 2 10 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual ay L Overview This chapter describes in depth how the many features of the instrument operate Please note the following points on using this chapter m Each section in this chapter provides background information needed to operate your instrument effectively as well as the higher level procedures for accessing and using the features These procedures emphasize using the front panel when possible m Lower level detailed usage procedures are in the online help system The table that follows on page 3 2 lists operating tasks and the sections in this chapter that document those tasks CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 1 Overview Tasks or topics Signal Input Subtasks or subtopics Acquiring waveforms Acquiring Waveforms Overview of section contents 3 7 Signal Connection and Overview of signal connection and 3 8 Conditioning conditioning techniques and setups To Set Up Signal Input Setting up signal input 3 12 To Autos
478. ye Top Eye Base Crossing Jitter Pk Pk Jitter Rms Jitter 6 Sigma Noise Pk Pk Noise RMS S N Ratio Cycle Distortion Quality factor Area Cycle Area Phase Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform Burst Width Waveform Count Hits in Displays the selected measurement of the histogram Box Peak Hits Median Maximum Minimum Peak to Peak Mean Standard Deviation Mean 1 StdDev Mean 2 StdDev Mean 3 StdDev Reset Statistics Resets measurement statistics Off Displays the selected measurement statistics of current measurements Mean All Statistics Controls Displays the Statistics Controls window Displays the Reference Levels setup window you use to set the reference levels used by your measurements Cursor Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Allows you to select the gating method turn off gating or displays the Zoom 3 Zoom 4 Off Measurement Gating control window you use to define the portion of the waveform you want your measurements taken between Reset Histograms Resets histogram counting Enables a horizontal histogram Enables a vertical histogram Turns off histograms Displays the Waveform Histogram setup window you use to set histograms on your waveforms CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix C Menu Bar Commands Table C 8 Measure menu commands Cont Menu Submenu Function Annotation Standard Detailed Off Allows you to select the type of
479. you capture a specific signal fault or event Dual Triggers Use the A main trigger system alone or add the B trigger to capture more complex events You can use the A and B triggers together to set up a delay by time or delay by events trigger condition Comm Triggers Optional on TDS7000B Series Use comm triggers to trigger on communication signals Serial Triggers Optional on TDS7000B Series Use serial triggers to trigger on serial pattern data Recovered Clock and Data Triggers Use recovered clock and data internally to trigger your waveforms They are also available externally CSA7000B Series only Autoset Use Autoset to quickly set up the vertical horizontal and trigger controls for a usable display If a standard mask is active optional on TDS7000B Series Autoset adjusts the selected waveform to match the mask if possible Touch Screen Interface You can operate all instrument functions except the power switch and the touch screen enable disable switch from the touch screen interface If convenient you can also install a mouse and keyboard to use the interface Toolbar or Menu Bar You can choose a toolbar operating mode that is optimized for use with the touch screen or a PC style menu bar operating mode that is optimized for use with a mouse CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix A Specifications Specification Tables Open Desktop The instrument is built on a Microso
480. your math ad ool waveform must be available channels and references contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on See page page 3 29 for acquisition setup and page 3 63 for trigger setup From the toolbar touch the Math button to display the Math Define Math control window Touch Spectral Analysis Setup and then select the kaaa Create tab to display the Spectral Analysis Setup control window Touch Math x and select the math waveform that you CT want to create from the list E Touch Magnitude to create a magnitude spectral waveform or touch Phase to create a phase spectral waveform SEE T e ee Touch the channel number that contains input data for a the spectral analyzer If you want an averaged spectral waveform touch Average touch Avgs and then set the number of averages in the control window p aos Note If you want to redefine your waveform touch the Clear button and repeat the above steps CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual 3 207 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Display the 8 spectral waveform 3 208 To define a spectral math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources To display your spectral waveform touch either the mel Apply or the OK button me a ae He 50 0mv 2 HH 20 008 250MHz CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Creating and Using Math Wav
481. ype Display resolution Pixel pitch Response time typical Display refresh rate Viewing angle typical Displayed intensity levels Description 64 NRZ Up to 1 25 GBd Edge trigger DC coupling for signals having a slew rate at the trigger point of 0 5 division ns Acquisition mode Error Sample Average 1 waveform interval 200 ps Peak Detect Envelope 2 waveform interval 200 ps 1 5 MBd to 3 125 GBd Above 1250 MHz the clock is only available internally as a trigger source Below 1250 MHz the clock is also available at the Recovered Clock output along with regenerated data CSA7000B Series only lt 0 25 bit period 2 ps rms for PRBS data patterns lt 0 25 bit period 1 2 ps rms for repeating 01 data patterns 2 of requested baud 1 division p p up to 1 25 GBd 1 5 divisions p p above 1 25 GBd Description 210 4 mm 8 3 in W x 157 8 mm 6 2 in H 263 mm 10 4 in diagonal liquid crystal active matrix color display 1024 horizontal x 768 vertical pixels 0 2055 mm horizontal 0 2055 mm vertical 15 ms white to black 59 94 frames per second Horizontal 60 degrees left 60 degrees right Vertical 60 degrees up 45 degrees down Each R G B input is 6 bits giving 64 intensity levels of each color component CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual A 19 Appendix A Specifications Table A 7 Input output port specifications Characteristic Description Rear
482. ysis touch Center Freq and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the center frequency Resolution bandwidth determines how small of a frequency difference may be resolved in the frequency domain output data It basically defines the bandwidth of the filters used to do the frequency domain analysis 22 To set the resolution bandwidth touch Res BW and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the resolution bandwidth CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Related control elements and resources Center Freq Freq Span 625 0mH2 T Res BW 25 0mHz Center Freq 6 C3 Freq Span Res BW 25 0mHz Center Freq a12 5mH2 Freq Span a25 0mez t Res BW Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a spectral math waveform Cont Set the time Time domain controls of the spectral analyzer determine the domain controls sample rate and record length of the acquisition Front panel controls also affect the sample rate and record length but not in the same way These controls allow you to change the duration on the acquisition without changing the sample rate This allows you to control the acquisition in a way that is analogous to the frequency domain span and center frequency controls in a spectral analyzer 23 From the Spectral Analysis Setup menu touch Resolution and adjust the time interval between data samples of the input waveform Note Reso
483. zontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base Jitter RMS 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base Jitter 6 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base B 12 CSA7000B Series amp TDS7000B Series Instruments User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 3 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Comm Noise P P 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries measurement In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left annotations right top and base Noise RMS 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base S N Ratio 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base Cyc Distortion 2 horizontal arrows indicating the time of the rise time of the fall and the reference level In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base In detailed mode 2 horizontal arrows indicating the position of the crossings

Manual - TRS RenTelco

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents